California Proposition 65 Warning
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
WARNING: This product contains or emits
chemicals known to the state of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by
anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the
vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record
information about powertrain performance. The data can be used
to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians
diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with
data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains
confidential.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this
vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded
by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid
damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
NOTICE
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 0 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
00X31-T2A-6300 2016 Accord Sedan Owner's Manual AOM01993
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And
operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and other information on labels and
in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that
could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You
must use your own good judgment.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
● Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
● Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol
3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
● Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.
● Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
● Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please
read it carefully.
3DANGER
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
3WARNING
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
3CAUTION
You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
instructions.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 1 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Contents
This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find
descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover)
represent features and equipment that are available on some, but
not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these
features.
This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and
Canada.
The information and specifications included in this publication were
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any
obligation.
2 Safe Driving P. 27
For Safe Driving P. 28 Seat Belts P. 32 Airbags P. 39
2 Instrument Panel P. 67
Indicators P. 68 Gauges and Displays P. 95
2 Controls P. 113
Clock P. 114 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 116
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
*
P. 138
Adjusting the Seats P. 160
2 Features P. 185
Audio System P. 186 Audio System Basic Operation P. 192, 215
Customized Features P. 298, 316 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
*
P. 340
2 Driving P. 411
Before Driving P. 412 Towing a Trailer P. 417
Refueling P. 497 Fuel Economy P. 499
2 Maintenance P. 501
Before Performing Maintenance P. 502 Maintenance Minder
TM
P. 505
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 537
Climate Control System Maintenance P. 551
2 Handling the Unexpected P. 557
Tools P. 558 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 559
Overheating P. 572 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 574
2 Information P. 583
Specifications P. 584 Identification Numbers P. 588
Emissions Testing P. 591 Warranty Coverages P. 593
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 2 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Contents
Child Safety P. 52 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 64 Safety Labels P. 65
Opening and Closing the Trunk P. 128 Security System P. 132 Opening and Closing the Windows P. 135
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 139 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 158
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 168 Climate Control System P. 180
Audio Error Messages P. 286 General Information on the Audio System P. 291
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 343, 374 Compass
*
P. 409
When Driving P. 421 Braking P. 479 Parking Your Vehicle P. 491
Accessories and Modifications P. 500
Maintenance Under the Hood P. 513 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 529
Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 539 Battery P. 548 Remote Transmitter Care P. 549
Cleaning P. 552
Engine Does Not Start P. 565 Jump Starting P. 568 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 571
Fuses P. 578 Emergency Towing P. 582
Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 589 Reporting Safety Defects P. 590
Authorized Manuals P. 595 Customer Service Information P. 596
Quick Reference Guide
P. 4
Safe Driving
P. 27
Instrument Panel
P. 67
Controls
P. 113
Features
P. 185
Driving
P. 411
Maintenance
P. 501
Handling the Unexpected
P. 557
Information
P. 583
Index
P. 600
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 3 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
4
Quick Reference Guide
Quick Reference Guide
Visual Index
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
❙ System Indicators (P 68)
❙ Gauges (P 95)
❙ Information Display
*
(P 96)
❙ Audio System (P 192, 215)
❙ ENGINE START/STOP Button
*1
(P 140)
❙ Front Seat Heater Switches
*
(P 178)
❙ Ignition Switch
*1
(P 139)
❙ ECON Button (P 441)
❙ Multi-Information Display
*
(P 99)
❙ (Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) System OFF) Button (P 472)
❙ Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Button
*
(P 476)
❙ Audio/Information Screen
(P 193, 216)
❙ Navigation System
*
() See Navigation System Manual
❙ Audio/Information Touch Screen
*
(P 218)
❙ Auxiliary Input Jack
*
(P 188)
❙ Rear Window Defogger (P 154)
❙ Heated Mirror Button
*
(P 154)
❙ Hazard Warning Button
❙ Center Pocket (P 171)
❙ Climate Control System (P 180)
❙ Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) OFF Button
*
(P 486)
❙ Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Button
*
(P 461)
❙ Parking Sensor System Button
*
(P 493)
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 4 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
5
Quick Reference Guide
❙ (+ / (- / / Buttons (P 190)
❙ SOURCE Button (P 190)
❙ Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System
Voice Control Buttons
(P 343, 374)
❙ Navigation System Voice Control Buttons
*
(P 235), () See Navigation System Manual
❙ Steering Wheel Adjustments (P 157)
❙ SEL/RESET Button
*
(P 100)
❙ (Information) Buttons
*
(P 99)
❙ Paddle Shifter (Shift up)
*
(P 434)
❙ Brightness Control (P 153)
❙ (Select/Reset) Knob (P 96)
❙ (Display) Button (P 193, 216)
❙ Paddle Shifter (Shift down)
*
(P 434)
❙ LaneWatch
TM*
(P 473)
❙ Fog Lights
*
(P 146)
❙ Headlights/Turn Signals (P 144)
❙ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Buttons
*
(P 448)
❙ MENU Button
*
(P 190)
❙ Cruise Control Buttons (P 442)
❙ Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Button
*
(P 466)
❙ Horn (Press an area around .)
❙ Distance Button
*
(P 455)
❙ Wipers/Washers (P 151)
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 5 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Visual Index
6
Quick Reference Guide
❙ Door Mirror Controls (P 159)
❙ Passenger's Front Airbag
(P 42)
❙ Parking Brake (P 479)
❙ Glove Box (P 170)
❙ Rearview Mirror (P 158)
❙ Hood Release Handle (P 515)
❙ Power Door Lock Master Switch (P 126)
❙ Power Window Switches (P 135)
❙ Interior Fuse Box (P 580)
❙ Driver's Front Airbag (P 42)
❙ Trunk Main Switch
*
(P 130)
❙ Fuel Fill Door Release Handle (P 498)
❙ Trunk Release (P 128)
❙ Shift Lever
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
(P 430, 432)
Automatic Transmission
(P 436)
Manual Transmission (P 438)
❙ Wireless Charger
*
(P 174)
❙ Accessory Power Socket
(P 173)
❙ USB Port (P 187)
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 6 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
7
Quick Reference Guide
❙ Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P 61)
❙ Sun Visors
❙ Vanity Mirrors
❙ Map Lights (P 169)
❙ Front Seat (P 160)
❙ Seat Belts (P 32)
❙ LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P 57)
❙ Side Curtain Airbags (P 48)
❙ Grab Handle
❙ Ceiling Light (P 168)
❙ Coat Hook (P 176)
❙ Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P 59)
❙ Rear Seat (P 166)
❙ Accessory Power
Socket
(P 173)
❙ Side Airbags (P 46)
❙ Sunglasses Holder
(P 177)
❙ Moonroof Switch
*
(P 138)
❙ USB Port
*
(P 187)
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 7 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Visual Index
8
Quick Reference Guide
❙ Maintenance Under the Hood (P 513)
❙ Windshield Wipers (P 151, 537)
❙ Tires (P 539, 559)
❙ Door Lock/Unlock Control (P 119)
❙ Power Door Mirrors (P 159)
❙ Headlights (P 144, 529)
❙ How to Refuel (P 498)
❙ High-Mount Brake Light (P 536)
❙ Emergency Trunk Release Lever (P 131)
❙ Opening/Closing the Trunk (P 128)
❙ Parking Lights (P 144, 531, 533)
❙ Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights
(P 144, 531, 532, 533)
❙ Fog Lights
*
(P 146, 531)
❙ Multi-View Rear Camera (P 496)
❙ Trunk Release Button
*
(P 129)
❙ Brake Lights (P 534)
❙ Back-Up Lights (P 535)
❙ Taillights (P 535)
❙ Rear Side Marker/Taillights (P 534)
❙ Rear Turn Signal Lights (P 534)
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 8 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
9
Quick Reference Guide
Eco Assist System (P 441)
Ambient Meter
● Changes color to reflect your driving
style.
Green: Fuel efficient driving
Light green: Moderate acceleration/
deceleration
White: Aggressive acceleration/
deceleration
● The ambient meter color changes in
accordance with your brake or
accelerator pedal operation.
ECON Button (P 441)
Helps maximize fuel economy.
ECON Mode Indicator (P 78)
Comes on when the ECON button is pressed.
Models with multi-information display
The message is displayed for a few seconds
when the ECON button is pressed.
Ambient Meter
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 9 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
10
Quick Reference Guide
Safe Driving (P 27)
Airbags (P 39)
● Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and
your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety (P 52)
● All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
● Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
● Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard (P 64)
● Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon
monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon
monoxide gas can accumulate.
Before Driving Checklist (P 31)
● Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,
steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Seat Belts (P 32)
● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat.
● Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.
Fasten your lap belt as
low as possible.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 10 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
11
Quick Reference Guide
Instrument Panel (P 67)
Canada
U.S.
Low Fuel Indicator
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator
Parking Brake
and Brake System
Indicator (Red)
Canada
U.S.
Washer Level
Indicator
*
System Indicators
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®) System
Indicator
VSA® OFF Indicator
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
Electric Power
Steering (EPS) System
Indicator
Lights Indicators
Lights On Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Fog Light Indicator
*
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
System Indicators
CRUISE CONTROL
Indicator
*
Adaptive Cruise Control
(
ACC
) Indicator (Amber)
*
CRUISE MAIN
Indicator
*
Tachometer
Speedometer
Fuel Gauge
Security System
Alarm Indicator
Shift Lever
Position
Indicator
*
Gauges (P 95)/Information Display
*
(P 96)/
Multi-Information Display
*
(P 99)/System Indicators (P 68)
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
System Indicators
Temperature Gauge
M (7-speed manual
shift mode) Indicator/
Shift Indicator
*
Maintenance Minder
Indicator
*
Smart Entry System
Indicator
*
Starter System
Indicator
*
System Message
Indicator
*
ECON mode Indicator
Road Departure Mitigation
(RDM) Indicator
*
Collision Mitigation Braking
System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) Indicator
*
Light Control Indicator
*
Door and Trunk
Open Indicator
Brake System
Indicator (Amber)
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
Canada
U.S.
Models with
information
display
Models with
information
display
Auto High-Beam
Indicator (Green)
*
/
Auto High-Beam
Indicator (Amber)
*
Lane Keeping Assist System
(
LKAS
) Indicator (Amber)
*
Lane Keeping Assist System
(
LKAS
) Indicator (White)
*
Parking Sensor
System Indicator
*
Adaptive Cruise Control
(
ACC
) Indicator (White)
*
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 11 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
12
Quick Reference Guide
Controls (P 113)
Clock (P 114)
The audio system receives signals from GPS
satellites, updating the clock automatically.
a Select , then select Settings.
b Select Clock/Info, then Clock
Adjustment.
c Adjust the hours and minutes by
selecting / .
d Select OK to set the time.
Models with two displays
3
4
a Enter the Clock Adjustment screen.
2 Adjusting the Clock (P 114)
b Rotate to change hour, then press
.
c Rotate to change minute, then
press .
Models with one display
ENGINE START/STOP
Button
*
(P 140)
Press the button to change the vehicle’s
power mode.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 12 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
13
Quick Reference Guide
Turn Signals (P 144)
Lights (P 144)
Turn Signal Control Lever
Right
Left
Light Control Switches
Low Beam
High Beam
Flashing
Wipers and Washers
(P 151)
*1:Vehicle with auto wiper
*2:Vehicle without auto wiper
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
Adjustment Ring
(-: Low Sensitivity
*1
(- : Lower speed, fewer sweeps
*2
(+: High Sensitivity
*1
(+ : Higher speed, more sweeps
*2
MIST
OFF
AUTO
*1
: Wiper speed varies automatically
INT
*2
: Low speed with intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Pull toward
you to spray
washer fluid.
Steering Wheel (P 157)
● To adjust, pull the adjustment lever
towards you, adjust to the desired
position, then lock the lever back in place.
Unlocking the Front
Doors from the Inside
(P 124)
● Pull either front door inner handle to
unlock and open it at the same time.
● Unlocking and opening the driver’s door
from the inner handle unlocks all the
other doors.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 13 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
14
Quick Reference Guide
Trunk (P 128)
● To unlock and open the trunk:
• Pull the trunk release.
• Press the trunk release button on the remote
transmitter or the smart entry remote.
• Press the trunk release button
*
on the
trunk lid.
Trunk Release
Power Door Mirrors
(P 159)
● With the ignition switch in ON
(w
*1
, move
the selector switch to L or R.
● Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
Power Windows (P 135)
● With the ignition switch in ON
(w
*1
, open
and close the power windows.
● If the power window lock button is in the
off position, each passenger's window
can be opened and closed with its own
switch.
● If the power window lock button is in the
on position (indicator on), each
passenger's window switch is disabled.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have
an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of
an ignition switch.
Power Window Lock Button
Window
Switch
Indicator
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 14 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
15
Quick Reference Guide
Climate Control System (P 180)
● Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
● Press the button to turn the system on or off.
● Press the button to defrost the windshield.
The climate control system is voice operable. (P 235)
Models with navigation system
Driver’s Side
Temperature Control
Buttons
(Windshield Defroster) Button
SYNC (Synchronized) Button
Air flows from floor and windshield
defroster vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and dashboard
vents, and back of the center console
*
.
Air flows from dashboard vents and
back of the center console
*
.
AUTO Button
(On/Off) Button
(Recirculation) Button
MODE Control Button
/ (Fan Control) Buttons
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Passenger’s Side Temperature Control Buttons
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 15 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
16
Quick Reference Guide
Features (P 185)
Audio Remote Controls
(P 190)
●
(+ / (- Button
Press to adjust the volume up/down.
● SOURCE Button
FMAMCDUSBiPod
Bluetooth® AudioPandora®
*
AUX
FMAMSiriusXM®
*
CDUSBiPod
Pandora®
*
Bluetooth® AudioAudio
Apps
(+ / (- / / Button
SOURCE
Button
Models with one display
Models with two displays
● / Button
Radio:Press to change the preset station.
Press and hold to select the next or
previous strong station.
CD/USB device:
Press to skip to the beginning of
the next song or return to the
beginning of the current song.
Press and hold to change a folder.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 16 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
17
Quick Reference Guide
Audio System (P 192, 215)
(P 192)
Models with one display
Audio/Information Screen
BACK Button
FM/AM Button
(Skip/Seek) Button
Selector Knob
Button
VOL/
(Volume/Power) Knob
CD Button
AUX Button
CD Slot
(CD Eject) Button
Preset Buttons (1-6)
SETTINGS Button
(Skip/Seek) Button
PHONE Button
MENU Button
DISP Button
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 17 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
18
Quick Reference Guide
(Power) Button
(HOME) Icon
VOL (Volume)
Icons
(MENU) Icon
(BACK) Icon
Audio/Information Touch Screen
Audio/Information Screen
App List
(P215)
For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual
Models with two displays
MAP
*
*
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 18 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
19
Quick Reference Guide
Driving (P 411)
M Indicator
Shift Indicator
Manual Transmission
*
(P 438)
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT)
*
(P 430, 432)
● Shift to
(P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.
● Shifting
Park
Turn off or start the engine.
Transmission is locked.
Neutral
Transmission is not locked.
Drive (S)
● Better acceleration.
● Increased engine
braking.
● Going up or down hills.
● On models with paddle
shifter, 7-speed manual
shift mode can be used.
Models without
paddle shifter
Models with
paddle shifter
Depress the brake pedal
and press the release button
to move out of
(P.
Press the release button to
move the shift lever.
Move the shift lever without
pressing the release button.
Reverse
Used when reversing.
Drive
● Normal driving.
● On models with paddle
shifter, 7-speed mode can
be used temporarily.
Low
*
● Further increased engine
braking.
● Going up or down hills.
Shift Down
(-
Paddle Shifter
Shift Up (+
Paddle Shifter
7-Speed Manual Shift
Mode
*
(P 434)
● Allows you to manually
shift the transmission up or
down without removing
your hands from the
steering wheel.
When the shift lever is in (S
● Pulling a paddle shifter
changes the mode from
continuously variable
transmission (CVT) to 7-speed
manual shift mode.
● The M indicator and the
selected speed number are
displayed in the shift indicator.
When the shift lever is in (D
● Pulling a paddle shifter
temporarily changes the mode
from continuously variable
transmission (CVT) to 7-speed
manual shift mode. The
selected speed number is
displayed in the shift indicator.
Shift Lever
Release
Button
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 19 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
20
Quick Reference Guide
Automatic Transmission
*
(P 436)
● Shift to
(P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.
● Shifting
Park
Turn off or start the engine.
Transmission is locked.
Neutral
Transmission is not locked.
Drive (S)
● Automatically changing
gears between 1st and 5th
(5th gear is used only in at
high speed).
● Used when towing a trailer
in hilly terrain.
● Used to increase engine
braking.
Depress the brake pedal
and press the release button
to move out of
(P.
Press the release button to
move the shift lever.
Move the shift lever without
pressing the release button.
Reverse
Used when reversing.
Drive
Normal driving.
Shift Lever
Release
Button
VSA® OFF Button (P 472)
● The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system
helps stabilize the vehicle during
cornering, and helps maintain traction
while accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces.
● VSA® comes on automatically every time
you start the engine.
● To turn VSA® on or off, press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
Cruise Control (P 442)
● Cruise control allows you to maintain a
set speed without keeping your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
● To use cruise control, press the CRUISE
*
/
MAIN
*
button, then press the –/SET
button once you have achieved the
desired speed (above 25 mph or 40 km/h).
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 20 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
21
Quick Reference Guide
Collision Mitigation
Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) OFF Button
*
(P 483)
● When a possible collision is likely
unavoidable, the CMBS
TM
can help you to
reduce the vehicle speed and the severity
of the collision.
● To turn the CMBS
TM
on or off, press and
hold the button until you hear a beep.
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
(P 475)
● Detects a change in tire conditions and
overall dimensions due to decrease in tire
pressures.
● The TPMS is turned on automatically
every time you start the engine.
● A calibration procedure must be
performed when certain conditions arise.
Refueling (P 497)
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number 87 or
higher required
Fuel tank capacity: 17.2 US gal (65 L)
a Push the fuel fill door
release handle.
b Turn the fuel fill cap
slowly to remove the
cap.
c Place the cap in the
holder on the fuel fill
door.
d After refueling, screw
the cap back on until it
clicks at least once.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 21 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
22
Quick Reference Guide
Maintenance (P 501)
Under the Hood (P 513)
● Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer
fluid. Add when necessary.
● Check brake fluid and clutch
*
fluid.
● Check the battery condition monthly.
a Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the
dashboard.
b Locate the hood latch lever, pull the lever up, and lift up
the hood.
c When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly
locked in place.
Lights (P 529)
● Inspect all lights regularly.
Wiper Blades (P 537)
● Replace blades if they leave streaks
across the windshield.
Tires (P 539)
● Inspect tires and wheels regularly.
● Check tire pressures regularly.
● Install snow tires for winter
driving.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 22 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Quick Reference Guide
23
Handling the Unexpected (P 557)
Flat Tire (P 559)
● Park in a safe location and replace the
flat tire with the compact spare tire in the
trunk.
Indicators Come On
(P 574)
● Identify the indicator and consult the
owner's manual.
Engine Won’t Start
(P 565)
● If the battery is dead, jump start using a
booster battery.
Blown Fuse (P 578)
● Check for a blown fuse if an electrical
device does not operate.
Overheating (P 572)
● Park in a safe location. If you do not see
steam under the hood, open the hood,
and let the engine cool down.
Emergency Towing
(P 582)
● Call a professional towing service if you
need to tow your vehicle.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 23 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
24
Quick Reference Guide
What to Do If
*1:Except U.S. automatic transmission/CVT models
The ignition switch does
not turn from
(0 to (q.
Why?
The power mode does not
change from VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) to ACCESSORY.
Why?
●
The steering wheel may be locked.
●
Try to turn the steering wheel left and right
while turning the ignition key.
●
Move the steering wheel left and right while
pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button at the same time.
The ignition switch does
not turn from
(q to (0 and
I cannot remove the key.
Why?
The power mode does not
change from ACCESSORY
to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Why?
The shift lever should be moved to (P.
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
*1
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
*1
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
*1
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 24 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
25
Quick Reference Guide
Why does the brake pedal
pulsate slightly when
applying the brakes?
This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a
problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
pump the brake pedal.
The rear door cannot be
opened from inside the
vehicle. Why?
Check if the childproof lock is in
the lock position. If so, open the
rear door with the outside door
handle.
To cancel this function, push the
lever to the unlock position.
Why do the doors lock
after I unlocked the doors
using a remote
transmitter?
If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
relocked automatically for security.
Why does the beeper
sound when I open the
driver's door?
The beeper sounds when:
●
The key is left in the ignition switch
*
.
●
The power mode
*
is in ACCESSORY.
●
The exterior lights are left on.
Why does the beeper
sound when I start driving?
The beeper sounds when:
●
Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts.
●
The parking brake lever is not fully released.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 25 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
26
Quick Reference Guide
Why do I hear a screeching
sound when I apply the
brake pedal?
The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 26 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
27
Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.
For Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions ............. 28
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features............ 30
Safety CheckList................................. 31
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts........................ 32
Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 35
Seat Belt Inspection............................ 38
Airbags
Airbag System Components............... 39
Types of Airbags ................................ 42
Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 42
Side Airbags ...................................... 46
Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 48
Airbag System Indicators.................... 49
Airbag Care ....................................... 51
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers ............... 52
Safety of Infants and Small Children.......54
Safety of Larger Children ................... 62
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 64
Safety Labels
Label Locations .................................. 65
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 27 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
28
Safe Driving
For Safe Driving
The following pages explain your vehicle's safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.
Important Safety Precautions
■ Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.
■ Restrain all children
Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat.
■ Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
■ Don't drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don't drink and drive, and don't let your friends drink and drive, either.
1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use
of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the
driver while driving.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 28 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
29
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions
Safe Driving
■ Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to
divert some attention away from driving.
■ Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
■ Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.
To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 29 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
30
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features
Safe Driving
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and
your passengers.
1Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many features that
work together to help protect you and your
passengers during a crash.
Some features do not require any action on your part.
These include a strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger compartment,
front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering
column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat
belts in a sufficient crash.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full
advantage of these features unless you remain seated
in the correct position and always wear your seat
belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to
injuries if they are not used properly.
6
7
8
9
10
11
Safety Cage
Crush Zones
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
Seat Belts
Front Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
Door Locks
Side Airbags
Seat Belt Tensioners
7
7
99
8
8
10
10
6
11
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 30 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
31
uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety CheckList
Safe Driving
Safety CheckList
For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items
each time before you drive.
• After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors are closed and locked.
Locking the doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider
from unexpectedly opening a door.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 124
• Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are
adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the
vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a
crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 160
• Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective
when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller
persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer Head Restraint Positions P. 163
• Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any
passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 35
• Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child's age, height
and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 52
1Safety CheckList
If the door and trunk open indicator is on, a door
and/or the trunk is not completely closed. Close all
doors and the trunk tightly until the indicator goes
off.
2 Door and Trunk Open Indicator P. 74
Models with information display
Models with multi-information display
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 31 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
32
Safe Driving
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the
vehicle, against other passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
- frontal impacts
- side impacts
- rear impacts
- rollovers
■ Lap/shoulder seat belts
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency
locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping
some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to
restrain your body.
The rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with child seats.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 59
1About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
The emergency locking retractor may lock if you lean
forward too quickly. Slower movements will allow
the belt to extend fully without locking.
3
WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases
the chance of serious injury or death in a
crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always
wear seat belts and wear them properly.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 32 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
33
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving
■ Proper use of seat belts
Follow these guidelines for proper use:
• All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the
belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
• Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort
or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability
and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If
the ignition switch is turned to ON
(w
*1
before the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the
beeper will sound and the indicator will blink.
If the driver does not fasten the belt before
the beeper stops, the indicator will remain on.
The beeper will also periodically sound and
the indicator will blink while driving until the
driver's and front passenger’s seat belts are
fastened.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Seat Belt Reminder
1About Your Seat Belts
If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends
the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If
this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the
seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.
Then refasten the belt.
1Seat Belt Reminder
The indicator will also come on if a front passenger
does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to ON
(w
*1
.
When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat,
the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not
sound. The indicator also may not come on and the
beeper may not sound when the occupant is not
heavy enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such
occupants (e.g., infants and smaller children) should
be moved to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag
likely will injure or kill them.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 52
*
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 33 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
34
Safe Driving
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.
The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to-
severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to
inflate the front airbags.
■
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and
thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 34 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
35
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Continued
Safe Driving
Fastening a Seat Belt
After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 160
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then
tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is
secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt or one that does not appear to be working
correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working
properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.
Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or
retractor mechanism.
Pull out slowly.
Correct
Seated
Posture.
Latch
Plate
Buckle
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 35 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
36
Safe Driving
3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic
bones take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to
remove any slack, then check that the belt
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces
of a crash over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter
occupants.
1. Move the anchor up and down while
holding the release button.
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests
across the center of your chest and over
your shoulder.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then
guide the belt by hand until it has retracted
completely.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of
the way and will not get caught by closing the door.
3
WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can
cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly
positioned before driving.
Lap belt
as low as
possible
■
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four
levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height
one level at a time.
After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder
anchor position is secure.
Push
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 36 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
37
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when
driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the
belt as low as possible across the hips.
■
Advice for Pregnant Women
1Advice for Pregnant Women
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is
okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your
unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front
airbag:
• When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle.
• When sitting in the front passenger's seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.
Wear the shoulder belt
across the chest avoiding
the abdomen.
Wear the lap part of the
belt as low as possible
across the hips.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 37 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
38
uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
Safe Driving
Seat Belt Inspection
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:
• Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
• Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily.
u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make
sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of
protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after
any collision.
1Seat Belt Inspection
3
WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can
result in serious injury or death if the seat
belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have
any problem corrected as soon as possible.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 38 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
39
Continued
Safe Driving
Airbags
Airbag System Components
6
7
8
9
8
8
8
8 810
11
12
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 39 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
40
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving
The front, front side, and side curtain
airbags are deployed according to the
direction and severity of impact. Both side
curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover.
The airbag system includes:
a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored
in the center of the steering wheel; the
front passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked SRS
AIRBAG.
b Two side airbags, one for the driver and
one for a front passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
c Two side curtain airbags, one for each
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored
in the ceiling, above the side windows.
The front and rear pillars are marked
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.
d An electronic control unit that continually
monitors and can record information
about the sensors, the airbag activators,
the seat belt tensioners, and driver and
front passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in ON
(w
*1
.
e Automatic front seat belt tensioners. The
driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts
incorporate sensors that detect whether
or not they are fastened.
f A driver’s seat position sensor. If the seat
is too far forward, the airbag will inflate
with less force.
g Weight sensors in the front passenger’s
seat. The front passenger’s airbag will be
turned off if the weight on the seat is 65
lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant
or small child).
h Impact sensors that can detect a
moderate-to-severe front or side impact.
i An indicator on the dashboard that alerts
you that the front passenger’s front
airbag has been turned off.
j An indicator on the instrument panel that
alerts you to a possible problem with your
airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
k Safing Sensor
l A rollover sensor that can detect if your
vehicle is about to roll over and signal the
control unit to deploy both side curtain
airbag.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an
ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 40 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
41
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,
and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing
their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as
far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as
possible.
Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that
can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags
deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp
object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the
covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags
or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
■
Important Facts About Your Airbags
1Important Facts About Your Airbags
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
deployment path of the front airbag by holding each
side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
the airbag cover.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 41 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
42
uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags
Safe Driving
Types of Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags:
• Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver's and front passenger's seats.
• Side airbags: Airbags in the driver's and front passenger's seat-backs.
• Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.
Front Airbags (SRS)
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary
restraint system.
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and
in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Housing Locations
1Types of Airbags
The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch
is in ON
(w
*1
.
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a
small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion
process of the inflator material and is not harmful.
People with respiratory problems may experience
some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
1Front Airbags (SRS)
Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags
(SRS)
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiple-
threshold front airbags (SRS).
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or
both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate
at different rates, depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/
or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help reduce the
likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal
crashes.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 42 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
43
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the
front airbag provides supplemental protection
for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that
they won't interfere with the driver's visibility
or the ability to steer or operate other
controls.
The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.
■
Operation
■
How the Front Airbags Work
1How the Front Airbags Work
Although the driver's and front passenger's airbags
normally inflate within a split second of each other, it
is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can
happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,
or threshold, that determines whether or not the
airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will
provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental
protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 43 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
44
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
■ When front airbags should not deploy
Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur
during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the
severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed
to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: Seat belts and, in vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side airbags
and side curtain airbags offer the best protection in a rollover. Because front airbags
could provide little if any protection, they are not designed to deploy during a
rollover.
■ When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■ When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 44 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
45
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
Your front airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag
related injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver's advanced front airbag system
includes a seat position sensor.
If the seat is too far forward, the airbag
inflates with less force, regardless of the
severity of the impact.
The passenger's advanced front airbag system
has weight sensors.
Although we recommend against carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the sensors
detect the weight of a child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically
turn off the passenger's front airbag.
■
Advanced Airbags
1Advanced Airbags
If there is a problem with the driver's seat position
sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag
will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the
driver's seating position.
For both advanced front airbags to work properly:
• Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats.
• Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat.
• Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
the floor. Improperly positioned objects can
interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
• All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat
belts properly.
• Do not place any cover over the passenger side
dashboard.
Driver’s
Seat
Position
Sensor
Passenger’s
Seat
Weight
Sensors
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 45 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
46
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe Driving
Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger
during a moderate-to-severe side impact.
The side airbags are housed in the outside
edge of the driver’s and passenger’s seat-
backs.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
When the sensors detect a moderate-to-
severe side impact, the control unit signals the
side airbag on the impact side to immediately
inflate.
■
Housing Locations
1Side Airbags
Make sure you and your front seat passenger always
sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can
prevent the airbag from deploying properly and
increases your risk of serious injury.
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.
They can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers
without consulting a dealer.
Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back
covers can prevent your side airbags from properly
deploying during a side impact.
Housing
Location
■
Operation
When
inflated
Side
Airbag
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 46 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
47
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe Driving
■ When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag systems senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle's framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough
impact to deploy the airbag.
■ When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe
It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was towards
the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle's crushable body parts
absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have
been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 47 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
48
uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Safe Driving
Side Curtain Airbags
The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in outer
seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags
equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly
rollover crashes.
The side curtain airbags are located in the
ceiling above the side windows on both sides
of the vehicle.
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy
in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side
impact.
■
Housing Locations
1Side Curtain Airbags
If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is
about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side
curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the
passenger’s side curtain airbag deploys even if there
is no passenger in the passenger seat.
To get the best protection from the side curtain
airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts
properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof
pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.
Side Curtain Airbag Storage
■
Operation
Deployed Side Curtain Airbag
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 48 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
49
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Safe Driving
■ When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal
collision.
Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a
message appears on the multi-information display
*
.
■ When the ignition switch is turned to
ON (w
*1
The indicator comes on for a few seconds,
then goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the
system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don’t, your airbags and seat
belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
3
WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in
serious injury or death if the airbag systems
or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts
you to a possible problem.
*
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 49 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
50
Safe Driving
■ When the passenger airbag off
indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been turned off.
This occurs when the front passenger’s weight
sensors detect 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the
weight of an infant or small child, on the seat.
Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2 Child Safety P. 52
Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.
If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger’s front airbag will not deploy and
the indicator will not come on.
■
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and
no objects on the passenger’s seat, or with an adult
riding there, something may be interfering with the
weight sensors, such as:
• An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back
pocket.
• A child seat or other object pressing against the
rear of the seat-back.
• A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of
the front passenger’s seat.
• The front seat or seat-back is forced back against
an object on the seat or floor behind it.
• An object placed under the front passenger’s seat.
If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and
goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is
near the airbag cutoff threshold.
U.S. Canada
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 50 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
51
uuAirbagsuAirbag Care
Safe Driving
Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
■ When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.
■ When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt
tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.
■ Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable the driver's seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the
passenger's seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate
a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American
Honda Automobile Customer Service at 800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles,
Honda Canada Customer Relations at 888-9-HONDA-9.
1Airbag Care
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
system components, including the airbag, tensioners,
sensors, and control unit.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 51 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
52
Safe Driving
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the
number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province
and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride
in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:
• An inflating front or side airbag can injure
or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
• A child in the front seat is more likely to
interfere with the driver's ability to safely
control the vehicle.
• Statistics show that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when they are properly
restrained in a rear seat.
1Protecting Child Passengers
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear
seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws
restricting where children may ride.
3
WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or
improperly restrained can be seriously
injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be
properly restrained in a child seat. A larger
child should be properly restrained with a
seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 52 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
53
uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers
Safe Driving
• Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt
portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
• Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the
event of a collision.
• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would
likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
• Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
• Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when
the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate
vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
1Protecting Child Passengers
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
To remind you of the passenger's front airbag
hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning
labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the
front visors. Please read and follow the instructions
on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 65
3
WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or
wrap one around their neck can result in
serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat
belt and make sure any unused seat belt a
child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,
and locked.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 53 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
54
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
Safety of Infants and Small Children
An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the
infant reaches the seat maker's weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is
at least one year old.
■ Positioning a rear-facing child seat
Child seats must be placed and secured in a
rear seating position.
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back
in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger's advanced front airbag
system.
2 Airbags P. 39
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger's seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.
■
Protecting Infants
1Protecting Infants
Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a
forward facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions before installation.
3
WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury or death
during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 54 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
55
uuChild Safety uSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child
seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured
forward-facing child seat.
■ Forward-facing child seat placement
We strongly recommend placing a forward-
facing child seat in a rear seating position.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger's front airbag off. A
rear seat is the safest place for a child.
■
Protecting Smaller Children
1Protecting Smaller Children
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations
regarding child seat use where you are driving, and
follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat
for a child up to two years old if the child’s height and
weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.
3
WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat can result in serious injury or
death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 55 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
56
Safe Driving
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).
Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer's use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual.
Proper installation is key to maximizing your child's safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible
child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.
This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat
once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual
for proper installation instructions.
■ Important consideration when selecting a child seat
Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
■
Selecting a Child Seat
1Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is
simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
to simplify the installation process and reduce the
likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 56 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
57
uuChild Safety uSafety of Infants and Small Children
Continued
Safe Driving
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats.
A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of
connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.
2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then
attach the child seat to the lower anchors
according to the instructions that came
with the child seat.
u When installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not
obstructed by the seat belt or any other
object.
■
Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Marks
Rigid Type
Lower Anchors
Flexible Type
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 57 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
58
Safe Driving
3. Open the tether anchor cover behind the
head restraint.
4. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
between the head restraint legs, and secure
the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
For your child's safety, when using a child seat
installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the
seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat
that is not properly secured will not adequately
protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the
child or other vehicle occupants.
Anchor
Tether Strap
Hook
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 58 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
59
uuChild Safety uSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat manufacturer’s
instructions, and insert the latch plate into
the buckle.
u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.
3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all
the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into
the retractor, then try to pull it out to make
sure the retractor is locked.
u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Pull the seat belt all the way
out, and repeat steps 2 – 4.
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt.
u When doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle
seat.
■
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 59 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
60
Safe Driving
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 60 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
61
uuChild Safety uSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
A tether anchorage point is provided behind
each rear seating position. A child seat that is
installed with a seat belt and comes with a
tether can use the tether for additional
security.
1. Locate the appropriate tether anchorage
point and lift the cover.
2. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
through the head restraint legs. Make sure
the strap is not twisted.
3. Secure the tether strap hook onto the
anchor.
4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
■
Adding Security with a Tether
1Adding Security with a Tether
Since a tether can provide additional security to the
lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend
using a tether whenever one is available.
Tether Anchorage Points
Cover
Anchor
Outer Position
Tether Strap
Hook
Anchor
Center Position
Tether Strap
Hook
Anchor
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 61 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
62
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safe Driving
Safety of Larger Children
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who
must sit in front.
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
following questions.
■ Checklist
• Do the child's knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
• Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child's neck and arm?
• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child's thighs?
• Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.
■
Protecting Larger Children
■
Checking Seat Belt Fit
1Safety of Larger Children
3
WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in
front can result in injury or death if the
passenger's front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
have the child sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
needed.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 62 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
63
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safe Driving
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used
properly, position the child in a booster seat in
a rear seating position. For the child's safety,
check that the child meets the booster seat
manufacturer's recommendations.
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
• Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
• Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
• Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
• Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.
■ Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more
mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up
properly.
■
Booster Seats
1Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the
instructions that came with it, and install the seat
accordingly.
There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a
booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat
belt correctly.
Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and
territories require children to use a booster seat until
they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60
lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or
province, or territory where you intend to drive.
■
Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 63 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
64
Safe Driving
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon
monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
■ Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.
• The exhaust system may have been damaged.
• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open,
open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the mode.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked
vehicle with the engine running.
1Carbon Monoxide Gas
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up
with carbon monoxide gas.
Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.
Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the
garage immediately after starting the engine.
3
WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that
expose you to carbon monoxide.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 64 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
65
Safe Driving
Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer
for a replacement.
Sun Visor
U.S. models
Canadian models
Radiator Cap
U.S. models only
Dashboard
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 65 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
66
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 66 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
67
Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.
Indicators ............................................ 68
Information Display Warning and
Information Messages
*
.................... 85
Multi-Information Display Warning and
Information Messages
*
.................... 87
Gauges and Displays
Gauges.............................................. 95
Information Display
*
.......................... 96
Multi-Information Display
*
................. 99
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 67 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
68
Instrument Panel
Indicators
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
*
Parking Brake
and Brake
System Indicator
(Red)
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, then goes off if the parking
brake has been released.
●
Comes on when the parking brake
is applied, and goes off when it is
released.
●
Comes on when the brake fluid
level is low.
●
Comes on if there is a problem
with the brake system.
●
The beeper sounds and the
indicator comes on if you drive
with the parking brake not fully
released.
●
Comes on while driving - Make sure
the parking brake is released. Check the
brake fluid level.
2 What to do when the indicator
comes on while driving P. 576
●
Comes on along with the ABS
indicator - Have your vehicle checked by
a dealer.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes On P. 576
Brake System
Indicator
(Amber)
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, then goes off.
●
Comes on if there is a problem
with a system related to braking
other than the conventional brake
system.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
U.S.
Canada
(Red)
U.S.
Canada
(Amber)
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 68 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
69
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
*
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
●
Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w
*1
, and
goes off when the engine starts.
●
Comes on when the engine oil
pressure is low.
●
Comes on while driving - Immediately
stop in a safe place.
2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Comes On P. 574
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
●
Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, and
goes off either when the engine
starts or after several seconds if the
engine did not start. If “readiness
codes” have not been set, it blinks
five times before it goes off.
●
Comes on if there is a problem
with the emissions control system.
●
Blinks when a misfire in the
engine’s cylinders is detected.
●
Readiness codes are part of the on board
diagnostics for the emissions control
systems.
2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 591
●
Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe
place where there are no flammable
objects. Stop the engine for 10 minutes
or more, and wait for it to cool down.
Then, take the vehicle to a dealer.
2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Comes On or Blinks P. 575
Charging System
Indicator
●
Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, and
goes off when the engine starts.
●
Comes on when the battery is not
charging.
●
Comes on while driving - Turn off the
climate control system and rear defogger
in order to reduce electricity
consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator
Comes On P. 574
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 69 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
70
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
*
Shift Lever
Position
Indicator
*
●
Indicates the current shift lever
position.
2 Shifting P. 430, 432, 436
—
M (7-speed
manual shift
mode) Indicator/
Shift Indicator
*
●
Comes on when 7-speed manual
shift mode is applied.
2 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode P. 434
—
Models with
information
display
Models with
multi-
information
display
Models with
information
display
Models with
multi-
information
display
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 70 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
71
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
*
Transmission
Indicator
*
●
Blinks if the transmission system has
a problem.
●
Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden
starts and acceleration and have your
vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
Seat Belt
Reminder
Indicator
●
Comes on and the beeper sounds if
you are not wearing a seat belt when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
.
●
If the front passenger is not wearing
a seat belt, the indicator comes on a
few seconds later.
●
Blinks while driving if either you or
the front passenger has not fastened
a seat belt. The beeper sounds and
the indicator blinks at regular
intervals.
●
The beeper stops and the indicator goes
off when you and the front passenger
fasten their seat belts.
●
Stays on after you or the front
passenger has fastened the seat
belt - A detection error may have
occurred in the sensor. Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 33
Models with
information
display
Models with
multi-
information
display
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 71 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
72
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
*
Low Fuel
Indicator
●
Comes on when the fuel reserve is
running low (approximately 2.6 U.S.
gal./9.7 Liter left).
●
Blinks if there is a problem with the
fuel gauge.
●
Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon
as possible.
●
Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, then goes off.
●
If it comes on at any other time,
there is a problem with the ABS.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer. With this
indicator on, your vehicle still has
normal braking ability but no anti-lock
function.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
P. 481
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, then goes off.
●
Comes on if a problem with any of
the following is detected:
- Supplemental restraint system
- Side airbag system
- Side curtain airbag system
- Seat belt tensioner
●
Stays on constantly or does not
come on at all - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 72 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
73
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
*
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®)
System Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, then goes off.
●
Blinks when VSA® is active.
●
Comes on if there is a problem with
the VSA® system or hill start assist
system.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka
Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
System P. 471
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®) OFF
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, then goes off.
●
Comes on when you deactivate
VSA®.
2 VSA® OFF Button P. 472
—
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 73 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
74
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
*
Door and Trunk
Open Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds if you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w
*1
,
then goes off.
●
Comes on if any door or the trunk is
not completely closed.
●
The beeper sounds and the indicator
comes on if any door or the trunk is
opened while driving.
●
Goes off when all doors and the trunk
are closed.
Parking Sensor
System Indicator
*
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, then goes off.
●
Comes on if there is a problem with
the parking sensor system.
●
Check if the area around the sensor(s) is
covered with mud, ice, snow, etc. If the
indicator stays on even after you clean
the area, have the system checked by a
dealer.
—
Electric Power
Steering (EPS)
System Indicator
●
Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, and goes
off when the engine starts.
●
Comes on if there is a problem with
the EPS system.
●
Stays on constantly or does not
come on at all - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS)
System Indicator Comes On P. 576
Models with
information
display
Models with
multi-
information
display
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 74 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
75
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
*
Low Tire
Pressure/
TPMS
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w
*1
, then
goes off.
●
May come on briefly if the ignition switch
is turned to ON (w
*1
and the vehicle is not
moved within 45 seconds, to indicate the
calibration process is not yet complete.
●
Comes on and stays on when:
- One or more tires’ pressures are
determined to be significantly low.
- The system has not been calibrated.
●
Comes on while driving - Stop in a
safe place, check tire pressures, and
inflate the tire(s) if necessary.
●
Stays on after the tires are inflated
to the recommended pressures - The
system needs to be calibrated.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 475
●
Blinks for about one minute, and then
stays on if there is a problem with the
TPMS, or when a compact spare tire is
temporarily installed.
●
Blinks and remains on - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer. If the
vehicle is fitted with a compact spare,
get your regular tire repaired or
replaced and put back on your vehicle
as soon as you can.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 75 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
76
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
*
System
Message
Indicator
*
●
Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w
*1
, then
goes off.
●
Comes on along with a beep when a
problem is detected. A system message on
the multi-information display appears at
the same time.
●
While the indicator is on, press the
(information) button to see the
message again.
●
Refer to the Indicators information in
this chapter when a system message
appears on the multi-information
display. Take the appropriate action for
the message.
●
The multi-information display does not
return to the normal screen unless the
warning is canceled, or the
button is pressed.
—
Turn Signal
and Hazard
Warning
Indicators
●
Blinks when you operate the turn signal
lever.
●
Blink along with all turn signals when you
press the hazard warning button.
●
Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A
turn signal light bulb has blown.
Change the bulb immediately.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 531, 533,
534
—
High Beam
Indicator
●
Comes on when the high beam headlights
are on.
— —
Lights On
Indicator
●
Comes on whenever the light switch is on,
or in AUTO when the exterior lights are
on.
●
If you remove the key from the ignition
switch
*1
while the exterior lights are on,
a chime sounds when the driver's door
is opened.
—
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 76 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
77
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
*
Fog Light
Indicator
*
●
Comes on when the fog lights are
on.
— —
Immobilizer
System Indicator
●
Comes on briefly when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w
*1
, then
goes off.
●
Comes on if the immobilizer system
cannot recognize the key
information.
●
Blinks - You cannot start the engine.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0
*1
,
pull the key out, and then insert the key
and turn it to ON
(w
*1
again.
●
Repeatedly blinks - The system may
be malfunctioning. Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
●
Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it. Electrical
problems can occur.
—
Security System
Alarm Indicator
●
Blinks when the security system
alarm has been set.
2 Security System Alarm P. 132
—
Indicator
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 77 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
78
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
*
ECON Mode
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, then goes off.
●
Comes on when you press the
ECON button.
2 ECON Button P. 441
CRUISE MAIN
Indicator
*
●
Comes on when you press the
CRUISE button.
2 Cruise Control P. 442
—
CRUISE
CONTROL
Indicator
*
●
Comes on if you have set a speed for
cruise control.
2 Cruise Control P. 442
—
Washer Level
Indicator
*
●
Comes on when the washer fluid
gets low.
●
Refill the washer fluid.
2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid
P. 528
—
Maintenance
Minder Indicator
*
●
Comes on when the scheduled
maintenance is due soon.
2 Maintenance Minder
TM
P. 505
—
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 78 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
79
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
*
Smart Entry
System
Indicator
*
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you change the power mode to ON.
●
Comes on as soon as a problem is
detected in the smart entry system
or push button starting system.
●
Stays on constantly or does not come
on at all - Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
Starter System
Indicator
*
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, then goes off.
●
Comes on if the starter system has a
problem.
●
As a temporary measure, press and hold
the ENGINE START/STOP button for up to
15 seconds while pressing the brake pedal
and manually start the engine. Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
—
Light Control
Indicator
*
●
Comes on if there is a problem with
the automatic lighting control
system or low beam headlights
*
.
●
Comes on while driving - Turn the lights
on manually and have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
—
U.S.
Canada
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 79 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
80
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
*
Auto High-Beam
Indicator
(Green)
*
●
Comes on when all the operating
conditions of the auto high-beam
are met.
2 Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support
System)
*
P. 147
—
Auto High-Beam
Indicator
(Amber)
*
●
Comes on if there is a problem with
the auto high-beam.
●
Manually operate the headlight switch.
●
If you are driving with the high-beam
headlights when this happens, the
headlights are changed to low beams.
—
●
Comes on when the area around
the camera on the windshield is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc.
●
Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe
it off with a soft cloth.
●
If the indicator does not go off after
cleaning the lens, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 80 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
81
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
*
Road Departure
Mitigation (RDM)
Indicator
*
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, then goes off.
●
Comes on if there is a problem with
the RDM system.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
●
Comes on when the RDM system
shuts itself off.
●
Stays on - The temperature inside the
camera is too high.
Use the climate control system to cool
down the camera.
The system activates when the temperature
inside the camera cools down.
2 Front Sensor Camera
*
P. 445
●
Stays on - The area around the camera is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle
in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft
cloth.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the
indicator and message come back on after
you cleaned the area around the camera.
2 Front Sensor Camera
*
P. 445
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 81 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
82
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
*
Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)
Indicator
(Amber)
*
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, then goes off.
●
Comes on if there is a problem with
ACC.
●
Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
Comes on if anything covers the
radar sensor cover and prevents the
sensor from detecting a vehicle in
front.
●
May come on when driving in bad
weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.)
●
ACC has been automatically
canceled.
●
When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your
vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt
using a soft cloth.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dear if the
indicator does not go off even after you
clean the sensor cover.
Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)
Indicator
(White)
*
●
Comes on when you press the
MAIN button.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 447
—
●
Comes on if the temperature inside
the camera is too high.
●
ACC has been automatically
canceled.
●
Use the climate control system to cool
down the camera.
●
Goes off - The camera has been cooled
down. Pressing the MAIN button can
resume the system.
2 Front Sensor Camera
*
P. 445
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 447
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 82 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
83
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
*
Lane Keeping
Assist System
(LKAS) Indicator
(Amber)
*
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, then goes off.
●
Comes on if there is a problem
with the LKAS.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Lane Keeping
Assist System
(LKAS) Indicator
(White)
*
●
Comes on when you press the
MAIN button.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
*
P. 464
—
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 83 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
84
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
*
Collision
Mitigation
Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Indicator
*
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, then goes off.
●
Comes on when you deactivate
the CMBS
TM
. A multi-information
display message appears for five
seconds.
●
Comes on if there is a problem
with the CMBS
TM
.
●
Stays on constantly without the
CMBS
TM
off - Have your vehicle checked by
a dealer.
2 Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
*
P. 483
●
Comes on when the CMBS
TM
system shuts itself off.
●
Stays on - The area around the camera is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle
in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft
cloth.
2 Front Sensor Camera
*
P. 445
●
When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your
vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt
using a soft cloth.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the
message does not disappear even after you
clean the sensor cover.
2 Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
*
P. 483
●
Stays on - The temperature inside the
camera is too high. Use the climate control
system to cool down the camera. The
system activates when the temperature
inside the camera cools down.
2 Front Sensor Camera
*
P. 445
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 84 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
85
uuIndicatorsuInformation Display Warning and Information Messages
*
Continued
Instrument Panel
Information Display Warning and Information Messages
*
The following messages appear only on the information display.
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not
installed.
2 Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 575
●
Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on
the battery.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 85 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
86
uuIndicatorsuInformation Display Warning and Information Messages
*
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP button
to turn the engine off without the shift lever in (P.
●
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice after
moving the shift lever to (P.
●
Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.
—
●
Appears when the steering wheel is locked.
●
Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing
the ENGINE START/STOP button at the same time.
●
Appears when you close the door with the power mode
in ON without the smart entry remote inside the vehicle.
●
Disappears when you bring the smart entry remote back
inside the vehicle and close the door.
●
Appears when the smart entry remote’s battery
becomes weak.
●
Replace the battery as soon as possible.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 549
Models with smart entry system
Automatic
transmission/CVT
models
U.S. manual
transmission
models
Canadian models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 86 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
87
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
*
Continued
Instrument Panel
Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
*
The following messages appear only on the multi-information display. Press the (information) button to see the message again
with the system message indicator on.
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not
installed.
2 Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 575
●
Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due
soon.
u Consequently, Maintenance Due Now and
Maintenance Past Due follow.
2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-
Information Display P. 510
●
Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets
abnormally high.
2 Overheating P. 572
●
Appears if there is a problem with the automatic
lighting control system.
●
Appears while driving - Manually turn the lights on,
and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
Appears if there is a problem with the low beam
headlights.
●
Appears while driving - The low beam headlights may
not be on. When conditions allow you to drive safely,
have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 87 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
88
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
*
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears if there is a problem with the auto high-
beam.
●
Manually operate the headlight switch.
●
If you are driving with the high-beam headlights when
this happens, the headlights are changed to low beams.
●
Appears when the area around the camera on the
windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, etc.
●
Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a
soft cloth.
●
If the message does not disappear after cleaning the
lens, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
Appears if there is a problem with the parking sensor
system. The beeper sounds.
●
Check if the area around the sensor(s) is covered with
mud, ice, snow, etc. If the indicator(s) stays on even
after you clean the area, have the system checked by a
dealer.
●
Appears when the washer fluid is low.
●
Refill the washer fluid.
2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 528
Models with
auto high-beam
Models with
auto high-beam
Models with
parking sensor
system
Canadian models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 88 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
89
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
*
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when the ignition key is turned to
ACCESSORY (q from ON (w. (The driver’s door is
closed.)
—
●
Appears when you open the driver’s door while the
ignition key is in ACCESSORY (q.
●
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0, then remove the
key.
●
Appears when you open the driver’s door while the
ignition key is in LOCK (0.
●
Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Models without smart entry system
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 89 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
90
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
*
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears after you unlock and open the driver’s door.
2 Starting the Engine P. 423
●
Appears when the steering wheel is locked.
●
Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
●
Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP
button to turn the engine off without the shift lever
in
(P.
●
Move the shift lever to (P. The power mode changes to
VEHICLE OFF.
●
Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.
—
Models with smart entry system
U.S. manual
transmission models
Canadian models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 90 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
91
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
*
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears after the driver’s door is opened when the
power mode is in ACCESSORY.
●
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice with your
foot off the brake pedal to change the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
●
Appears when you close the door with the power
mode in ON without the smart entry remote inside
the vehicle.
●
Disappears when you bring the smart entry remote back
inside the vehicle and close the door.
2 Smart Entry Remote Reminder P. 142
●
Appears when the smart entry remote battery
becomes weak.
●
Replace the battery as soon as possible.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 549
●
Appears if the smart entry remote battery is too
weak to start the engine or the key is not within
operating range to start the engine. A beeper
sounds six times.
●
Bring the smart entry remote in front of the ENGINE
START/STOP button to be touched with.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 566
●
Appears three seconds after the To Start Engine:
Brake + Push message appears.
2 Changing the Power Mode P. 140
●
Appears three seconds after you bring the smart
entry remote in front of the ENGINE START/STOP
button when To Start, Hold Remote Near Start
Button appears. To Start Engine: Brake + Push
appears sequentially.
2 Changing the Power Mode P. 140
Models with smart entry system
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 91 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
92
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
*
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears while you are customizing the settings and
the shift lever is moved out of (P.
2 Customized Features P. 103
●
Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on
the battery.
●
Appears when the battery is not charging.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Checking the Battery P. 548
●
Appears along with the battery charging system
indicator - Turn off the climate control system and rear
defogger to reduce electricity consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On P. 574
●
Appears when the starter system has a problem.
●
As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button for up to 15 seconds while
pressing the brake pedal and manually start the engine.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
Appears for about three seconds when ACC has
been automatically canceled.
●
You can resume the set speed after the condition that
caused ACC to cancel improves. Press the RES/+
button.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 447
●
Flashes when the system senses a likely collision with
a vehicle in front of you.
●
Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the
brakes, change lanes, etc.).
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 447
2 Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
*
P. 483
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 92 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
93
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
*
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when the area around the camera is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe
place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
●
May appear when driving in bad weather (rain,
snow, fog, etc.).
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message
appears again after you cleaned the area around the
camera.
●
Appears if the temperature inside the camera is too
high.
●
ACC/LKAS has been automatically canceled.
●
Use the climate control system to cool down the camera.
●
Goes off - The camera has been cooled down. Pressing
the MAIN/LKAS button can resume the system.
2 Front Sensor Camera
*
P. 445
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 447
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
*
P. 464
●
Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected
line. The steering wheel vibrates rapidly.
●
Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.
●
The color of either line changes from white to amber as
the vehicle gets closer to that side of the lane line.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
*
P. 464
●
Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected
line.
- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the
vehicle is drifting out of a detected line.
- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the
vehicle is drifting out of a detected line. The system
also steers the vehicle to help you remain within
your driving lane.
●
Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.
●
The color of either line changes from white to amber as
the vehicle gets closer to that side of the lane line.
2 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
*
P. 460
●
You can change the setting for the road departure
mitigation system. Normal, Wide, and Warning Only
can be selected.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 298, 316
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
When you selected Warning Only
When you selected Normal or Wide
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 93 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
94
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
*
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Blinks when you fail to steer the vehicle. The beeper
sounds simultaneously.
●
Operate the steering wheel to resume the LKAS.
●
Appears when the LKAS is in operation, or the LKAS
button is pressed, but there is a problem with a
system related to the LKAS. The LKAS cancels
automatically. The beeper sounds simultaneously.
●
If any other system indicators come on, such as the
VSA®, ABS and brake system, take appropriate action.
2 Indicators P. 68
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when you unlock and open the driver’s
door while the engine is running by smart entry
remote.
2 Remote Engine Start
*
P. 425
Models with remote engine starter
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 94 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
95
Instrument Panel
Gauges and Displays
Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators.
They are displayed when the ignition switch is in ON (w
*1
.
Displays your driving speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada).
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Speedometer
■
Tachometer
■
Fuel Gauge
■
Temperature Gauge
1Fuel Gauge
NOTICE
You should refuel when the reading approaches .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from
the fuel gauge reading.
E
1Temperature Gauge
NOTICE
Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the
upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull
safely to the side of the road and allow engine
temperature to return to normal.
2 Overheating P. 572
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 95 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
96
uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display
*
Instrument Panel
Information Display
*
The information display shows the odometer, trip meter, engine oil life and
maintenance service item codes, and other gauges.
Press the (Select/Reset) knob to change the display.
■
Switching the Display
1Switching the Display
Each time you press the knob, the information
display changes as follows:
Some of the items on the information display also
appear on the audio/information screen. They also
change along with the information display changes
while the fuel consumption is shown.
Instant Fuel Economy,
Odometer, Trip Meter A,
Outside Temperature
Instant Fuel Economy,
Range, Trip Meter A,
Outside Temperature
Engine Oil Life
Instant Fuel Economy, Average
Fuel Economy A, Trip Meter A,
Outside Temperature
Instant Fuel Economy, Average
Fuel Economy B, Trip Meter B,
Outside Temperature
Select/Reset
Knob
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 96 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
97
uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display
*
Instrument Panel
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has
accumulated.
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last
reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
■ Resetting a trip meter
To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the knob. The trip meter is
reset to 0.0.
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100
km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the
average fuel economy is also reset.
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada).
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance Minder
TM
.
2 Maintenance Minder
TM
P. 505
■
Odometer
■
Trip Meter
■
Average Fuel Economy
■
Instant Fuel Economy
■
Engine Oil Life
1Trip Meter
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the knob.
1Average Fuel Economy
You can change when to reset the average fuel
economy.
2 Customized Features P. 298, 316
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 97 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display
*
98
Instrument Panel
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
■ Adjusting the outside temperature indicator
Adjust the temperature reading up to ± 5°F or ± 3°C if the temperature reading
seems incorrect.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
.
2. Press and hold the (Select/Reset) knob for 10 seconds or more while the
outside temperature is shown on the information display.
u The information display goes into temperature adjustment mode. The display
starts showing from -5°F to +5°F (U.S.) or -3°C to +3°C (Canada).
3. Release the knob when the right adjustment amount is shown.
u The adjustment is complete.
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy of your previous trips.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Outside Temperature
■
Range
1Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can
affect the temperature reading when your vehicle
speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 98 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
99
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display
*
Continued
Instrument Panel
Multi-Information Display
*
The multi-information display shows the odometer, trip meter, outside temperature
indicator, and other gauges.
It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information.
■ Main displays
Press the (information) button to change the display.
■
Switching the Display
Average Fuel Economy/
Instant Fuel Economy
Range Elapsed Time Average Speed
Blank Screen Vehicle Settings Engine Oil Life
Button
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 99 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
100
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display
*
Instrument Panel
■ Lower displays
Press the SEL/RESET button to change the display.
Odometer Trip A Trip B
SEL/RESET
Button
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 100 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
101
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display
*
Instrument Panel
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has
accumulated.
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last
reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
■ Resetting a trip meter
To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the SEL/RESET button. The trip
meter is reset to 0.0.
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100
km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the
average fuel economy is also reset.
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy of your previous trips.
Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.
■
Odometer
■
Trip Meter
■
Average Fuel Economy
■
Range
■
Elapsed Time
1Trip Meter
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the SEL/RESET button.
1Average Fuel Economy
You can change when to reset the average fuel
economy.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 298, 316
1Elapsed Time
You can change when to reset the elapsed time.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 298, 316
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 101 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display
*
102
Instrument Panel
Shows the average speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada) since Trip A or Trip B was
reset.
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada).
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance Minder
TM
.
2 Maintenance Minder
TM
P. 505
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
■ Adjusting the outside temperature display
Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading
seems incorrect.
■
Average Speed
■
Instant Fuel Economy
■
Engine Oil Life
■
Outside Temperature
1Average Speed
You can change when to reset the average speed.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 298, 316
1Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can
affect the temperature reading when your vehicle
speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
Use the multi-information display's customized
features to correct the temperature.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 298, 316
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 102 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
103
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display
*
Instrument Panel
Use the multi-information display to customize certain features.
■ How to customize
Select the Vehicle Settings screen by pressing the button while the
ignition switch is in ON (w
*1
, and the vehicle is at a complete stop.
Press the SEL/RESET button.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Customized Features
1Customized Features
To customize other features, press the
button.
2 List of customizable options P. 106
2 Example of customization settings P. 110
Customization is possible when you see the driver’s
ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) on the screen.
The driver’s ID indicates which remote transmitter
you have used to unlock the driver’s door. The
customized settings are recalled every time you
unlock the driver’s door with that remote.
When you customize settings: Shift to
(P
Button:
Changes the customize
menus and items.
Multi-Information Display:
Goes to Vehicle Settings.
SEL/RESET button:
Enters the selected item.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 103 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
104
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display
*
Instrument Panel
■ Customization flow
Press the button.
SEL/RESET
Vehicle Settings
“Trip A” Reset Timing
Language Selection
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
Memory Position Link
Door Unlock Mode
Keyless Access Light Flash
4
4
4
4
TPMS Calibration
Driver Assist System Setup
Meter Setup
Position Setup
Keyless Access Setup
SEL/RESET
SEL/RESET
SEL/RESET
SEL/RESET
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
4
ACC Pre-Running Car Detect Beep
ACC Display Speed Unit
4
Keyless Start Guidance Screens
SEL/RESET
Keyless Access Beep
Forward Collision Warning Distance
4
4
4
Lane Keep Assist Suspend Beep
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
Remote Start System ON/OFF
*
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 104 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
105
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display
*
Continued
Instrument Panel
Exit
4
4
4
Door Setup
Maintenance Reset
Default All
SEL/RESET
4
SEL/RESET
4
Lighting Setup
SEL/RESET
4
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Auto Light Sensitivity
4
4
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 105 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
106
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display
*
Instrument Panel
■ List of customizable options
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
TPMS
Calibration
— Calibrates the TPMS. Cancel/Calibrate
Driver Assist
System
Setup
Forward Collision
Warning Distance
Changes at which distance the CMBS
TM
alerts. Long/Normal
*1
/Short
ACC Pre-Running Car
Detect Beep
Causes the system to beep when the system detects a
vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of ACC range.
On/Off
*1
ACC Display Speed Unit Changes the ACC display speed unit.
mph
*1
/km/h
(U.S.)
mph/km/h
*1
(Canada)
Road Departure
Mitigation Setting
Changes the setting for the road departure
mitigation system.
Normal
*1
/Wide/Warning
Only
Lane Keep Assist
Suspend Beep
Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is
suspended.
On/Off
*1
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 106 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
107
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display
*
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Meter Setup
Language Selection Changes the displayed language. English
*1
/French/Spanish
Adjust Outside Temp.
Display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
-5°F ~ ±0°F
*1
~ +5°F
(U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C
*1
~ +3°C
(Canada)
“Trip A” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,
average fuel economy A, average speed A, and
elapsed time A.
With Refuel/IGN Off/
Manually Reset
*1
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,
average fuel economy B, average speed B, and
elapsed time B.
With Refuel/IGN Off/
Manually Reset
*1
Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. On
*1
/Off
Keyless Start Guidance
Screens
Displays the push button start guidance when
conditions are met to change power mode.
On
*1
/Off
Driving
Position
Setup
Memory Position Link
Changes the driver's seat position to a stored
setting.
On
*1
/Off
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 107 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
108
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display
*
Instrument Panel
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Keyless
Access
Setup
Door Unlock Mode
Changes which doors unlock when you grab the
driver’s door handle.
Driver Door Only
*1
/All Doors
Keyless Access Light
Flash
Causes some exterior lights to blink when you
unlock/lock the doors.
On
*1
/Off
Keyless Access Beep
Sets the beeper sound or not when you grab either
front door handle.
On
*1
/Off
Remote Start System
ON/OFF
*
Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
Lighting
Setup
Interior Light Dimming
Time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on
after you close the doors.
60sec/30sec
*1
/15sec
Headlight Auto Off
Timer
Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay
on after you close the driver’s door.
60sec/30sec/15sec
*1
/0sec
Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Max/High/Mid
*1
/Low/Min
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 108 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
109
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display
*
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Door Setup
Auto Door Lock
Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically lock.
With Vehicle Speed
*1
/Shift
from P/Off
Auto Door Unlock
Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically unlock.
All Doors When Driver’s
Door Opens
*1
/All Doors
When Shifted To Park/All
Doors When Ignition
Switched Off/Off
Key And Remote Unlock
Mode
Sets up either the driver's door or all doors to unlock
on the first operation of the remote or built-in key.
Driver Door
*1
/ All Doors
Keyless Lock Answer
Back
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
On
*1
/Off
Security Relock Timer
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and
the security system to set after you unlock the
vehicle without opening any door.
90sec/60sec/30sec
*1
Maintenance
Reset
—
Resets/Cancels the engine oil life display when you
have performed the maintenance service.
Cancel/Reset
Default All —
Cancels/Resets all the customized settings as
default.
Cancel/Set
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 109 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
110
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display
*
Instrument Panel
■ Example of customization settings
The steps for changing the “Trip A” Reset Timing setting to With Refuel are
shown below. The default setting for “Trip A” Reset Timing is Manually Reset.
1. Press the button to select Vehicle
Settings, then press the SEL/RESET
button.
2. Press the button until Meter
Setup appears on the display.
3. Press the SEL/RESET button.
u Language Selection appears first in the
display.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 110 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
111
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display
*
Instrument Panel
4. Press the button until “Trip A”
Reset Timing appears on the display, then
press the SEL/RESET button.
u The display switches to the
customization setup screen, where you
can select With Refuel, IGN Off,
Manually Reset, or Exit.
5. Press the button and select With
Refuel, then press the SEL/RESET button.
u The With Refuel Setup screen appears,
then the display returns to the
customization menu screen.
6. Press the button until Exit appears
on the display, then press the SEL/RESET
button.
7. Repeat Step 6 until you return to the
normal screen.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 111 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
112
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 112 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
113
Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.
Clock .................................................. 114
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions .................. 116
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength
*
... 118
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside .......................................... 119
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside ............................................. 124
Childproof Door Locks ..................... 126
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 127
Opening and Closing the Trunk....... 128
Security System
Immobilizer System .......................... 132
Security System Alarm...................... 132
Opening and Closing the Windows..... 135
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
*
..... 138
Operating the Switches Around the
Steering Wheel
Ignition Switch
*
............................... 139
ENGINE START/STOP Button
*
........... 140
Ignition Switch and Power Mode
Comparison ................................... 143
Turn Signals..................................... 144
Light Switches.................................. 144
Fog Lights
*
...................................... 146
Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support
System)
*
........................................ 147
Daytime Running Lights ................... 150
Wipers and Washers ........................ 151
Brightness Control ........................... 153
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button ........................................... 154
Driving Position Memory System
*
.... 155
Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 157
Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 158
Power Door Mirrors ......................... 159
Adjusting the Seats .......................... 160
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience
Items ................................................ 168
Climate Control System
Using Automatic Climate Control .... 180
Synchronized Mode ......................... 182
Automatic Climate Control Sensors... 183
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 113 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
114
Controls
Clock
Adjusting the Clock
You can adjust the time in the clock display with the ignition switch is in ON (w
*1
.
■ Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock,
then Clock Adjustment.
3. Rotate to change hour, then press .
4. Rotate to change minute, then press .
■ Using the SETTINGS button
1. Press and hold the CLOCK (SETTINGS)
button until the clock display blinks.
2. Press Preset
(4 (Hour) or (5 (Minute) to
adjust the time.
3. Press the CLOCK button again to set the
time.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Adjusting the Time
1Adjusting the Clock
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
You can customize the clock display to show the 12
hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Customized Features P. 298, 316
You can turn the clock display on and off.
2 Customized Features P. 298, 316
Models with one display
1Using the SETTINGS button
To set the time to the nearest hour: Press and hold
the CLOCK button until the clock display blinks, then
press the
(6 (Reset) button.
Depending on the displayed time, the clock sets
forward or backward.
Example:
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:53 will reset to 2:00
Models with one display
Models with one display
CLOCK (SETTINGS)
Button
(6 (Reset) Button
(4 (Hour) Button
(5 (Minute) Button
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 114 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
115
uuClockuAdjusting the Clock
Controls
■ Using the Settings menu on the audio/information touch screen
1. Select , then select Settings.
2. Select Clock/Info, then Clock
Adjustment.
3. Adjust the hours and minutes by selecting
/.
4. Select OK to set the time.
Models with two displays
1Using the Settings menu on the audio/information touch screen
The clock is automatically updated through the audio
system, so the time does not need to be adjusted.
Models with two displays
3
4
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 115 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
116
Controls
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions
This vehicle comes with the following keys:
Use the key to start and stop the engine, to
lock and unlock the doors and to open the
trunk. You can also use the remote
transmitter or smart entry system
*
to lock and
unlock the doors and to open the trunk.
■ Smart entry remote
*
The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the
doors when the smart entry remote battery
becomes weak and the power door lock/
unlock operation is disabled.
To remove the built-in key, pull it out while
sliding the release knob. To reinstall the built-
in key, push the built-in key into the smart
entry remote until it clicks.
■
Master Keys
1Key Types and Functions
All the keys have an immobilizer system. The
immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle
theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 132
The keys contain precision electronics.
Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to
the electronics:
• Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
• Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
• Keep the keys away from liquids.
• Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine
may not start, and the remote transmitter may not
work.
If the keys do not work properly, have them
inspected by a dealer.
You can remotely start the engine using the smart
entry remote.
2 Remote Engine Start
*
P. 425
Models with remote engine starter
Master Key
*
Smart Entry
Remote
*
Smart Entry
Remote with
Remote Engine
Starter
*
Built-in Key
Release Knob
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 116 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
117
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions
Controls
Can be used to start and stop the engine, and
lock and unlock driver's door.
Contains a number that you will need if you
purchase a replacement key.
■
Valet Key
*
1Valet Key
*
When you need to leave a key with a third party,
leave the valet key.
Gray
■
Key Number Tag
1Key Number Tag
Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a
safe place outside of your vehicle.
If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a
dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine,
contact a dealer.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 117 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
118
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength
*
Controls
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength
*
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the smart entry remote when locking/
unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or to start the engine.
In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or starting
the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable:
• Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.
• You are carrying the smart entry remote together with telecommunications
equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.
• A metallic object is touching or covering the smart entry remote.
1Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength
*
Communication between the smart entry remote and
the vehicle consumes the smart entry remote’s
battery.
Battery life is about two years, but this varies
depending on regularity of use.
The battery is consumed whenever the smart entry
remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing
it near electrical appliances such as televisions and
personal computers.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 118 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
119
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Continued
Controls
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
When you carry the smart entry remote, you
can lock/unlock the doors and open the trunk.
You can lock/unlock the doors within a radius
of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door
handle. You can open the trunk within about
32 inches (80 cm) radius from the trunk
release button.
■ Locking the doors and the trunk
Press the door lock button on the front door.
u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all the doors lock; and the
security system sets.
■
Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System
*
Door Lock Button
1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System
*
• Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle
when you get out. Carry it with you.
• Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote,
you can lock/unlock the doors while someone else
with the remote is within range.
• The door may be unlocked if the door handle is
covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if
the smart entry remote is within range.
• If you grip a front door handle wearing gloves, the
door sensor may be slow to respond or may not
respond by unlocking the doors.
• You cannot unlock the door by gripping the handle
after two seconds of unlocking it.
• The door might not open if you pull it immediately
after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle
again and confirm that the door is unlocked before
pulling the handle.
• Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may not
be able to lock/unlock the doors with the smart entry
remote if it is above or below the outside handle.
• The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too
close to the door and door glass.
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works
varies, the battery is probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 549
You can customize the door lock mode and keyless
lock acknowledgement setting.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 298, 316
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 119 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
120
Controls
■ Unlocking the vehicle
Grab the driver’s door handle:
u The driver’s door unlocks.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Grab the front passenger’s door handle:
u All the doors unlock.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Press the trunk release button:
u The trunk unlocks and opens.
2 Using the Trunk Release Button
*
P. 129
Trunk Release Button
1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System
*
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle, the doors will automatically
relock.
The light flash, beep and unlock settings can be
customized using the multi-information display
*
,
audio/information screen
*
or audio/information
touch screen
*
.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 298, 316
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 120 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
121
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
■ Locking the doors
Press the lock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors
lock, and the security system sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first
push):
u The beeper sounds and verifies the
security system is set.
■
Using the Remote Transmitter
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,
the doors will automatically relock.
You can change the relock timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 298, 316
If the interior light switch is in the door activated
position, the interior lights come on when you press
the unlock button.
No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30
seconds.
Doors relocked with the remote: The lights go off
immediately.
2 Interior Lights P. 168
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so
the operating range may vary depending on the
surroundings.
The remote transmitter will not work when the key is
in the ignition switch.
You can lock or unlock doors using the remote
transmitter or smart entry system only when the
power mode in VEHICLE OFF.
The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is
open.
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
All models
LED
Unlock Button
Lock Button
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 121 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
122
Controls
■ Unlocking the doors
Press the unlock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the driver’s door unlocks.
Twice:
u The remaining doors unlock.
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works
varies, the battery is probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 549
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 298, 316
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 122 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
123
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
Fully insert the key and turn it.
■ Locking the driver’s door
Push the lock tab forward a or push the
master door lock switch in the lock direction
b, and close the door.
u The doors cannot be locked when the
key is in the ignition switch
*1
, or the
smart entry remote is inside the vehicle.
■ Locking the passenger’s doors
Push the lock tab forward and close the door.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
When you lock the driver’s door with a key, all the
other doors lock at the same time. When unlocking,
the driver’s door unlocks first. Turn the key a second
time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining
doors.
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 298, 316
Lock
Unlock
■
Locking a Door Without Using a Key
1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the driver’s door, all the other doors
lock at the same time.
Make sure you have the key in your hand before
locking the door to prevent it from being locked in
the vehicle.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 123 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
124
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Controls
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
■ Locking a door
Push the lock tab forward.
■ Unlocking a door
Pull the lock tab rearward.
■
Using the Lock Tab
1Using the Lock Tab
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
driver's door, all the other doors lock at the same
time.
When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the
driver's door, only the driver's door will unlock.
To Unlock
Lock Tab
To Lock
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 124 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
125
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Controls
Pull the front door inner handle.
u The door unlocks and opens in one
motion.
Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks all the other
doors.
To avoid all the doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock,
then lock again before opening the door.
u This setting works for one time only. If you do not want all the doors to be
unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to Off using
the multi-information display
*
, audio/information screen
*
or audio/information
touch screen
*
.
■
Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
The front door inner handles are designed to allow
front seat occupants to open the door in one motion.
However this feature requires that front seat
occupants never pull a front door inner handle while
the vehicle is in motion.
Children should always ride in a rear seat where
childproof door locks are provided.
2 Childproof Door Locks P. 126
Inner Handle
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 125 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks
126
Controls
Press the master door lock switch in as shown
to lock or unlock all doors.
Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock tab.
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock
position, and close the door.
■ When opening the door
Open the door using the outside door handle.
■
Using the Master Door Lock Switch
1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock the driver's door using the
master lock switch, all the other doors lock/unlock at
the same time.
To Unlock
Master Door
Lock Switch
To Lock
■
Setting the Childproof Door Locks
1Childproof Door Locks
To open the door from the inside when the
childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the
unlock position, lower the rear window, put your
hand out of the window, and pull the outside door
handle.
Unlock
Lock
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 126 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
127
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking
Controls
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle locks and unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is
met.
■ Drive lock mode
All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
■ Driver’s door open mode
All doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened.
■
Auto Door Locking
■
Auto Door Unlocking
1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the multi-information
display
*
, audio/information screen
*
or audio/
information touch screen
*
.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 298, 316
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 127 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
128
Controls
Opening and Closing the Trunk
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk
■ Opening the trunk
Open the trunk all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the trunk lid may begin to close under its own weight.
■ Closing the trunk
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to:
u Avoid possible damage.
u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 64
Using the Trunk Opener
Pulling the trunk release to the lower left of
the driver's seat unlocks and opens the trunk.
Trunk
Release
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 128 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
129
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Trunk Release Button
*
Controls
■ Locking the trunk opener
You can lock the trunk release with the master
key
*
or the built-in key
*
.
Using the Trunk Release Button
*
Push up the release button on the trunk lid
after the doors are unlocked.
Even if the trunk is locked, you can open the
trunk if you carry the smart entry remote.
u The beeper will sound.
1Locking the trunk opener
If you need to give the key to someone else, give
them the valet key.
Models without smart entry system
1Using the Trunk Release Button
*
• Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle
when you get out. Carry it with you.
• A person who is not carrying the smart entry
remote can unlock the trunk if a person who is
carrying it is within range.
• Do not leave the smart entry remote inside the
trunk and close the lid. The beeper sounds and the
trunk cannot be closed.
• Do not carry the smart entry remote near the trunk
lid when closing it.
• Do not place the smart entry remote around the
rear seat when closing the trunk.
Trunk Release Button
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 129 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
130
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Remote Transmitter
Controls
Using the Remote Transmitter
Press the trunk release button for
approximately one second to unlock and open
the trunk.
Trunk Main Switch
*
The trunk main switch disables the trunk
release button on the remote transmitter and
the trunk release button on the trunk lid to
protect luggage in the trunk.
1. Make sure the rear seat-back is not folded
down.
2. Turn off the trunk main switch in the glove
box.
3. Lock the glove box.
4. Lock the trunk release.
2 Using the Trunk Opener P. 128
Trunk Button
1Trunk Main Switch
*
If you need to give the key to someone else, remove
the built-in key from the smart entry remote by
sliding the release knob, and give the remote as a
valet key.
ON
OFF
Main Switch
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 130 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
131
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuEmergency Trunk Opener
Controls
Emergency Trunk Opener
The trunk release lever allows you to open the
trunk from inside for your safety.
Slide the release lever in the direction of the
arrow.
1Emergency Trunk Opener
Parents should decide if their children should be
shown how to use this feature.
Lever
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 131 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
132
Controls
Security System
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from
starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic
signals to verify the key.
Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch or
pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button:
• Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch or the
ENGINE START/STOP button.
• Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
• Do not bring a key from another vehicle’s immobilizer system near the ignition
switch or the ENGINE START/STOP button.
•
Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic devices, such as a television set
and audio system are strongly magnetic, or a key chain can become magnetic, too.
Security System Alarm
The security system alarm activates when the trunk, hood or doors are forcibly
opened. The alarm does not go off if the trunk or doors are opened with the key,
remote transmitter or smart entry system.
However, the alarm goes off when a door is opened with the key, then the shift
lever is moved out of
(P (automatic transmission/CVT models) or the hood is
opened before the ignition switch is turned to ON (w
*1
.
■ When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently and all the exterior lights flash.
■ To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the remote transmitter, or smart entry system. The system,
along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Immobilizer System
NOTICE
Leaving the ignition key in the vehicle can result in
theft or accidental movement of the vehicle.
Always take the ignition key with you whenever you
leave the vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.
1Security System Alarm
The security alarm continues for a maximum of two
minutes until the security system deactivates.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 132 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
133
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
Controls
■ Setting the security system alarm
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have
been met:
• The ignition switch is in LOCK
(0
*1
, and the key has been removed from the
ignition switch.
• The hood and trunk are closed.
• All doors are locked from outside with the key, the remote transmitter, or smart
entry system.
■ When the security system alarm sets
The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the
blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system is set.
■ To cancel the security system alarm
The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
transmitter, smart entry system, or the ignition switch is turned to ON (w
*1
. The
security system indicator goes off at the same time.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Security System Alarm
Do not set the security system alarm when someone
is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can
accidentally activate when:
• Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
• Opening the trunk with the trunk release or the
emergency trunk opener.
• Opening the hood with the hood release.
• Moving the shift lever out of (P.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the
security system alarm, the security alarm may go off
once the battery is recharged or replaced.
If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by
unlocking a door using the key or remote transmitter.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add another
device to it.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 133 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
134
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
Controls
■ The panic button on the remote
transmitter
If you press the panic button for
approximately one second, the following will
occur for about 30 seconds:
• The horn sounds.
• Some exterior lights flash.
■ Canceling panic mode
Press any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to ON (w
*1
.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Panic Mode
Panic Button
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 134 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
135
Continued
Controls
Opening and Closing the Windows
Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON
(w
*1
, using the switches on the doors. The driver's side switches can be used to
open and close all of the windows.
The power window lock button on the driver's side must be switched off (not
pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than
the driver's seat.
When the power window lock button is pushed in, you can only operate the driver's
window. Turn the power window lock button on when children are in the vehicle.
■ Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly.
To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
The window opens or closes completely. To
stop the window at any time, push or pull the
switch briefly.
■ Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0
*1
.
Opening either front door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse
If a power window senses resistance when closing
automatically, it stops closing and reverse direction.
The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
3
WARNING
Closing a power window on someone's
hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from
the windows before closing them.
On
Off
Power Window
Lock Button
Indicator
Driver’s
Window
Switch
Front Passenger’s
Window Switch
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 135 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
136
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Controls
To open: Push the switch down.
To close: Pull the switch up.
Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.
To open: Press the unlock button twice
within 10 seconds and hold it down for the
second time.
If the windows stop midway, repeat the
procedure.
■
Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function
Close
Open
■
Opening Windows and Moonroof with the Remote
*
Unlock
Button
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 136 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
137
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Controls
To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the
key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to
the central position, turn the key in the unlock
direction and hold it there.
To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key.
Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the
central position, turn the key in the lock
direction and hold it there.
Release the key to stop the windows/
moonroof at the desired position. If you want
further adjustment, repeat the same
operation.
■
Opening/Closing the Windows and Moonroof with the Key
*
Close
Open
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 137 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
138
Controls
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
*
You can only operate the moonroof when the ignition switch is in ON (w
*1
. Use the
switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
■ Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly.
The moonroof will automatically open or close
all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,
touch the switch briefly.
■ Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
■ Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof
switch.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly,
then release.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Opening/Closing the Moonroof
1Opening/Closing the Moonroof
NOTICE
Opening the moonroof in below freezing
temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you turn the ignition switch off.
Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse
function causes the moonroof to change directions,
then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully
closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,
are clear of the moonroof.
3
WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on
someone's hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the moonroof before opening or closing it.
Open
Close
Tilt
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 138 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
139
Controls
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
Ignition Switch
*
1Ignition Switch
*
You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is
in
(P.
If you open the driver’s door when the key is in LOCK
(0 or ACCESSORY (q, a warning buzzer will sound
to remind you to take the key out.
When this happens, the following messages appear
on the multi-information display:
• In LOCK (0: Remove Key From Ignition
• In ACCESSORY (q: Turn Ignition Switch To Lock
(0) Position
If the key won’t turn from LOCK
(0 to ACCESSORY
(q, turn the key while moving the steering wheel left
and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing
the key to turn.
3
WARNING
Removing the key from the ignition switch
while driving locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
Remove the key from the ignition switch
only when parked.
Manual transmission models
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models
All models
Models with multi-information display
All models
(0 LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this
position.
(q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position.
(w ON: This is the position when driving.
(e START: This position is for starting the engine.
The switch returns to ON
(w when you let go of
the key.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 139 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
140
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
*
Controls
ENGINE START/STOP Button
*
*1: Except U.S. automatic transmission/CVT models
■
Changing the Power Mode
1ENGINE START/STOP Button
*
ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range
You can start the engine when the smart entry
remote is inside the vehicle.
The engine may also run if the smart entry remote is
close to the door or window, even if it is outside the
vehicle.
ON mode:
Indicator in the button is off, if the engine is running.
If the smart entry remote battery is weak, beeper
sounds and the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start
Button message appears on the multi-information
display
*
.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 566
Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON
when you get out.
Operating Range
Automatic Transmission/CVT Manual Transmission
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
Indicator in the button is off.
The steering wheel is locked
*1
.
The power to all electrical
components is turned off.
Press the button without the shift
lever in
(P.
Shift to
(P then press the button.
Press the button.
Without pressing
the clutch pedal
Without pressing
the brake pedal
ACCESSORY
Indicator in the button is on.
Indicator in the button blinks
(from ON to ACCESSORY).
Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position.
ON
Indicator in the button is on.
All electrical components can be
used.
Indicator
Indicator
Shift to (P.
U.S. models
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 140 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
141
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
*
Controls
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the shift lever in (P
*1
and the
power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid draining the battery.
When in this mode:
The steering wheel does not lock.
You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry
system.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning
buzzer sounds.
*1: Automatic transmission/CVT models
■
Automatic Power Off
■
Power Mode Reminder
1Changing the Power Mode
If the power mode does not change from VEHICLE
OFF to ACCESSORY, press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while moving the steering wheel left and
right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the
mode to change.
Except U.S. automatic transmission/CVT models
Except U.S. automatic transmission/CVT models
All models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 141 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
*
142
Controls
Warning buzzers may sound from inside and/
or outside the vehicle to remind you that the
smart entry remote is out of the vehicle. If the
buzzer continues even after the remote is put
back inside, place it within the system’s
operational range.
■ When the power mode is in ON
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and the driver’s door is closed,
warning buzzers sound from both inside and
outside the vehicle. A warning message on
the information display or multi-information
display notifies the driver inside that the
remote is out.
■ When the power mode is in
ACCESSORY
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and all the doors are closed, a
warning buzzer sounds from outside the
vehicle.
■
Smart Entry Remote Reminder
1Smart Entry Remote Reminder
When the smart entry remote is within the system’s
operational range, and the driver’s door is closed, the
warning function cancels.
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle
after the engine has been started, you can no longer
change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or
restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is
in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE
START/STOP button.
Removing the smart entry remote from the vehicle
through a window does not activate the warning
buzzer.
Do not put the smart entry remote on the dashboard
or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer
to go off. Under some other conditions that can
prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the
warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is
within the system’s operational range.
Models with information display
Models with multi-information display
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 142 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
143
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluIgnition Switch and Power Mode Comparison
Controls
Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison
*1:Except U.S. automatic transmission/CVT models
Ignition Switch
Position
LOCK (0)
(with/without
the key)
ACCESSORY (I) ON (II) START (III)
Without Smart Entry
System
●
Engine is turned off and
power is shut down.
●
The steering wheel is
locked.
●
No electrical
components can be
used.
●
Engine is turned off.
●
Some electrical
components such as the
audio system and the
accessory power socket
can be operated.
●
Normal key position
while driving.
●
All electrical components
can be used.
●
Use this position to start
the engine.
●
The ignition switch
returns to the ON (II)
position when you
release the key.
Power Mode VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK)
ACCESSORY ON START
With Smart Entry
System and ENGINE
START/STOP
Button
Indicator-Off
●
Engine is turned off and
power is shut down.
●
The steering wheel is
locked
*1
.
●
No electrical
components can be
used.
Indicator-On or blinking
●
Engine is turned off.
●
Some electrical
components such as the
audio system and the
accessory power socket
can be operated.
Indicator-
On (engine is turned off)
Off (engine is running)
●
All electrical components
can be used.
Indicator-Off
●
The mode automatically
returns to ON after the
engine starts.
Indicator is: On Off
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 143 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
144
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals
Controls
Turn Signals
The turn signals can be used when the ignition
switch is in ON (w
*1
.
■ One-touch turn signal
When you lightly push up or down and release
the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals
and turn signal indicator blink three times.
This feature can be used when signaling for a
lane change.
Light Switches
Rotating the light switch turns the lights on
and off, regardless of the position of the
ignition switch
*1
.
■ High beams
Push the lever forward until you hear a click.
■ Low beams
When in high beams, pull the lever back to
return to low beams.
■ Flashing the high beams
Pull the lever back, and release it.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Right Turn
Left Turn
■
Manual Operation
1Light Switches
If you remove the key from the ignition switch while
the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened.
When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
2 Lights On Indicator P. 76
If you sense that the level of the headlights is
abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off
because it will cause the battery to discharge.
High Beams
Flashing the high beams
Low Beams
Turns on parking, side marker,
tail, and rear license plate lights
Turns on headlights, parking, side
marker, tail, and rear license plate
lights
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 144 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
145
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
Controls
Automatic lighting control can be used when
the ignition switch is in ON (w
*1
.
When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the
headlights and other exterior lights will switch
on and off automatically depending on the
ambient brightness.
u You can change the auto light sensitivity
setting.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 298, 316
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
We recommend that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking facilities.
The light sensor is in the location shown below.
Do not cover this light sensor with anything;
otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not
work properly.
Light Sensor
Models without automatic
intermittent wipers
Light Sensor
Models with automatic intermittent
wipers
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 145 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights
*
146
Controls
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within
a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO.
The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15
seconds after you remove the key or set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK),
take the remote with you, and close the driver’s door.
u You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 298, 316
If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0
*1
with the headlight switch on, but do
not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the switch
is in the AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver’s door. If you unlock
the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the
driver’s door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.
Fog Lights
*
When the low beam headlights are on, turn
the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Headlight Integration with Wipers
*
■
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
Setting
The exterior lights come on
when the ambient light is at
MAX
HIGH
MID
LOW
MIN
Bright
Dark
1Headlight Integration with Wipers
*
This feature activates while the headlights are off in
AUTO.
The instrument panel brightness does not change
when the headlights come on.
At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting
control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of
the number of wiper sweeps.
1Fog Lights
*
When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
They go off when the headlights turn off, or when
the daytime running lights are on.
2 Fog Light Indicator
*
P. 77
Fog Light Switch
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 146 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
147
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam (High Beam Support System)
*
Continued
Controls
Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support System)
*
Uses the camera attached, monitors the space ahead of your vehicle, and
automatically changes the low beam headlights to high beam headlights when
necessary.
1Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support System)
*
The auto high-beam determines when to change the
headlight beams by responding to the brightness of
the lights ahead of your vehicle. In the following
cases, however, the system may not respond to the
lights properly:
• The brightness of the lights from the preceding or
oncoming vehicle is intense or poor.
• Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow,
fog, windshield frost, etc.).
• Other light sources, such as streetlights and electric
billboards are illuminating the road ahead.
• The brightness level of the road ahead constantly
changes.
• The road is bumpy or has many curves.
• A vehicle ahead of you suddenly cuts you off or is
not traveling in the appropriate direction.
• Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear.
If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient
for driving, change the headlight beams manually.
■ The headlight switch is in
AUTO.
■ The lever is in the low beam
position.
■ The system recognizes that you
are driving at night and the
low beam headlights come on.
■ The vehicle speed is above 25
mph (40 km/h).
The system operates when:
The camera is not detecting any lights coming from preceding or oncoming
vehicles: The headlights change to high beams.
15-degree
The camera detects lights coming from a preceding or oncoming vehicle: The
headlights are returned to low beams.
The camera monitors the range within the 30-degree view angle. The distance that
the camera can detect lights ahead differs depending on conditions, such as the
brightness of the lights and the weather.
The system changes between high and low beam headlights when:
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 147 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam (High Beam Support System)
*
148
Controls
Turn the headlight switch in AUTO and pull
the headlight lever to low beam.
2 Light Switches P. 144
The auto high-beam indicator (Green) comes
on.
■ Temporary cancellation
The auto high-beam operation is temporarily canceled while:
• You are continuously driving at a speed below 15 mph (24 km/h).
• The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h).
• The windshield wipers run at high speed for more than a few seconds.
The system operation resumes once the condition that caused it to cancel improves.
■
To Operate the System
1To Operate the System
For the auto high-beam to work properly:
• Do not place an object that reflects light on the
dashboard.
• Keep the windshield around the camera clean.
When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to
apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens.
• Do not attach an object, sticker or film in the area
around the camera.
• Do not touch the camera lens.
If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of
the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer.
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera system to shut
off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front
of the vehicle away from the sun.
If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to
cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can
concentrate heat on the camera.
If the Can Not Operate: message appears:
Park your vehicle in a safe place. Wipe away debris
blocking the windshield, then start driving again. If
the message remains on even after driving for a while
with the clean windshield, have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
Models with multi-information display
Headlight
Switch
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 148 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
149
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam (High Beam Support System)
*
Controls
Disable the system when the vehicle is parked
with the ignition switch in ON (w
*1
and the
light switch is in the AUTO position.
To disable the system: Pull the light switch
lever towards you and hold it for 40 seconds.
The auto high-beam indicator in the meter will
blink twice.
To enable the system: Pull the light switch
lever towards you and hold it for 30 seconds.
The auto high-beam indicator in the meter will
blink once.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
To Disable the System
1To Disable the System
The auto high-beam will remain in the selected
disabled or enabled setting each time you start the
engine.
AUTO Position
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 149 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
150
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights
Controls
Daytime Running Lights
The high beam headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following
conditions have been met:
The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have
been met:
• The ignition switch is in ON
(w
*1
.
• The headlight switch is off, or in .
• The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition switch
or setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights.
The high beam headlights return to the original brightness once the headlight
switch is turned on.
The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when
the head light switch is in AUTO and it is getting darker outside.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Daytime Running Lights
The daytime running lights come on dimmer when
the headlight switch is in than when it is in
AUTO. In AUTO, if the ambient brightness is dark,
the low beam headlights come on.
Models with bulb type parking lights
Models with LED type parking/daytime running lights
Models with bulb type parking lights
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 150 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
151
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Continued
Controls
Wipers and Washers
The windshield wipers and washers can be
used when the ignition switch is in ON
(w
*1
.
■ MIST
The wipers run at high speed until you release
the lever.
■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT
*
, LO, HI)
Change the wiper switch setting according to
the amount of rain.
■ AUTO
*
2 Automatic Intermittent Wipers
*
P. 152
■ Adjusting wiper operation
Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper delay.
■ Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever for more than one
second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two or
three more times to clear the windshield, then stop.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Windshield Wiper/Washer
1Wipers and Washers
NOTICE
Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.
The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber
blades will get damaged.
NOTICE
In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the
windshield, becoming stuck.
Operating the wipers in this condition may damage
them. Use the defroster to warm the windshield,
then turn the wipers on.
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are
operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
interval shortens.
When the vehicle starts moving, the wipers make a
single sweep.
When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s
shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become
the same.
Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.
The pump may get damaged.
The wiper motor may stop motor operation
temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation
will return to normal within a few minutes, once the
circuit has returned to normal.
Models without automatic intermittent wipers
All models
MIST
INT
*
: Low speed with
intermittent
OFF
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Pull to
use
washer.
AUTO
*
: Wiper speed varies
automatically
Lower speed, fewer sweeps
Higher speed, more sweeps
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 151 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
152
Controls
When you push the lever down to AUTO, the
windshield wipers sweep once, and go into
the automatic mode.
The wipers operate intermittently, at low
speed, or at high speed and stops in
accordance with the amount of rainfall the
rainfall sensor detects.
■ AUTO sensitivity adjustment
When in AUTO, you can also adjust the
rainfall sensor sensitivity using the adjustment
ring.
Sensor sensitivity
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Automatic Intermittent Wipers
*
1Wipers and Washers
If the wipers stop operating due to any obstacle such
as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe
place.
Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and turn the ignition
switch to ACCESSORY
(q or LOCK (0
*1
, then
remove the obstacle.
1Automatic Intermittent Wipers
*
The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below.
Do not put the wiper lever in AUTO when cleaning
the windshield or driving through a car wash. If the
wiper lever is in AUTO, and the power mode is in ON,
the rainfall sensor may respond to your hand or car
wash liquids, and the wipers may operate
automatically.
Rainfall Sensor
Adjustment Ring
Low Sensitivity:
Wipers will operate when more
rainfall is detected.
High Sensitivity:
Wipers will operate when less rainfall
is detected.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 152 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
153
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control
Controls
Brightness Control
When the parking lights are turned on and the
ignition switch is in ON (w
*1
, you can use the
brightness control knob to adjust instrument
panel brightness.
Brighten: Turn the knob to the right.
Dim: Turn the knob to the left.
You will hear a beep when the brightness
reaches minimum or maximum. The
information display
*
/multi-information
display
*
will return to its original state several
seconds after you adjust the brightness.
■ Brightness level indicator
The brightness level is shown on the
information display
*
/multi-information
display
*
while you are adjusting it.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Brightness Control
Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on
whether the exterior lights are on or off. The
instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are
on.
Pressing the (Select/Reset) knob switches the
display.
If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness
display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels
the reduced instrument panel brightness when the
parking lights are on.
The brightness can be set differently for when the
exterior lights are on, and when they are off.
Control Knob
On multi-information display
On information display
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 153 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
154
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button
Controls
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button
Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window
and mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w
*1
.
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors
automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes
depending on the outside temperature.
However, if the outside temperature is 32°F
(0°C) or below, they do not automatically
switch off.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button
NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to damage the heating wires.
It is critical to wipe the window from side to side
along the defogger heating wires.
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged.
Also, do not use the system for a long period when
the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery,
making it difficult to start the engine.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 154 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
155
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System
*
Continued
Controls
Driving Position Memory System
*
You can store two driver’s seat positions with the driving position memory system.
When you unlock and open the driver’s door with a remote, the seat adjusts
automatically to one of the two preset positions.
The multi-information display
*
shows you which remote you used to unlock the
vehicle when you enter.
• DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1.
• DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.
1Driving Position Memory System
*
Using the multi-information display
*
, audio/
information screen
*
or audio/information touch
screen
*
, you can disable the automatic seat
adjustment function.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 298, 316
System Operation
The system will not operate if:
• The vehicle speed is above 2 mph (3 km/h).
• Either memory position button is pressed while the
seat is in motion.
• The seat position is adjusted while in operation.
• The memory 1 or 2 position is set fully to the rear.
DRIVER 1
DRIVER 2
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 155 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System
*
156
Controls
1. Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the
driver’s seat to the desired position.
2. Press the SET button.
u You will hear a beep, and the memory
button indicator light will blink.
3. Press and hold memory button
(1 or (2
within five seconds of pressing the SET
button.
u Once the seat position has been
memorized, the indicator light on the
button you pressed stays on.
1. Move the shift lever to
(P.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Press a memory button (
(1 or (2).
u You will hear a beep, and the indicator
light will blink.
The seat will automatically move to the
memorized position. When it has finished
moving, you will hear a beep, and the
indicator light stays on.
■
Storing a Position in Memory
1Storing a Position in Memory
After you press the SET button, the storing operation
will be canceled when:
• You do not press the memory button within five
seconds.
• You readjust the seat position before the double-
beep.
• You set the power mode to any position except
ON.
Memory
Button 1
Memory
Button 2
SET Button
■
Recalling the Stored Position
1Recalling the Stored Position
The seat will stop moving if you:
• Press the SET button, or a memory button ((1 or
(2).
• Adjust the seat position.
•
Shift into any position except (P.
•
Release the parking brake.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Manual transmission models
Memory
Button 1
Memory
Button 2
Automatic transmission/CVT models
All models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 156 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
157
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel
Controls
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up.
u The steering wheel adjustment lever is
under the steering column.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out.
u Make sure you can see the instrument
panel gauges and indicators.
3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever
down to lock the steering wheel in position.
u After adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering
wheel in place by trying to move it up,
down, in, and out.
1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
Make any steering wheel adjustments before you
start driving.
3
WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while
driving may cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the
vehicle is stopped.
To adjust
To lock
Lever
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 157 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
158
Controls
Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving
position.
Flip the tab to switch the position.
The night position will help to reduce the glare
from headlights behind you when driving
after dark.
When driving after dark, the automatic
dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare
from headlights behind you, based in inputs
from the mirror sensor. This feature is always
active.
■
Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions
*
1Adjusting the Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and
adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
2 Adjusting the Seat Positions P. 160
Tab
Daytime
Position
Night Position
Up
Down
■
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
*
1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
*
The auto dimming function cancels when the shift
position is in
(R.
Sensor
Down
Up
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 158 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
159
uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
Controls
Power Door Mirrors
You can adjust the door mirrors when the
ignition switch is in ON (w
*1
.
■ Mirror position adjustment
L/R selector switch: Select the left or right
mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the
switch to the center position.
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press
the switch left, right, up, or down to move the
mirror.
The driver side door mirror has outer and inner
segments.
The outer segment is slightly curved to provide
a wider angle view than a standard flat mirror.
This wider view may help you check areas that
are not visible using a standard door mirror.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
■
Expanded View Driver's Mirror
1Expanded View Driver's Mirror
Objects visible in the outer segment of the driver side
door mirror appear smaller than objects in the rest of
the mirror. But in fact, they are closer than they
appear.
Do not rely on your mirrors. Always look to the side
and behind your vehicle before changing lanes.
Inner Segment
Outer Segment
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 159 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
160
Controls
Adjusting the Seats
Adjusting the Seat Positions
Adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible
while allowing you to maintain full control of
the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,
well back in the seat and be able to
adequately press the pedals without leaning
forward, and grip the steering wheel
comfortably. The passenger's seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far
back from the front airbag in the dashboard
as possible.
■ Adjusting the front power seat(s)
*
1Adjusting the Seats
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow
at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.
Always make seat adjustments before driving.
3
WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
in serious injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front
airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.
Move back.
Allow sufficient
space.
Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Height Adjustment
(Driver’s seat only)
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Lumbar Support
Adjustment
(Driver’s seat only)
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 160 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
161
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
Controls
■ Adjusting the front manual seat(s)
*
1Adjusting the front manual seat(s)
*
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and
forth to make sure it is locked in position.
Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Pull up on the bar to move the
seat, then release the bar.
Height Adjustment
(Driver side only)
Pull up or push down the lever
to raise or lower the seat.
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Pull up the lever to
change the angle.
Driver’s seat is shown.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 161 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
162
Controls
Adjust the driver's seat-back to a comfortable,
upright position, leaving ample space
between your chest and the airbag cover in
the center of the steering wheel.
The front seat passenger should also adjust
their seat-back to a comfortable, upright
position.
Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the
occupant's chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.
■
Adjusting the Seat-Backs
1Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the
seat-back and your back.
Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag
operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.
3
WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in
serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,
and sit well back in the seat.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 162 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
163
uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints
Continued
Controls
Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints
in all seating positions.
Head restraints are most effective for
protection against whiplash and other rear-
impact crash injuries when the center of the
back of the occupant's head rests against the
center of the restraint. The tops of the
occupant's ears should be level with the
center height of the restraint.
To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint: Push it down
while pressing the release button.
■
Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer Head Restraint Positions
1Head Restraints
In order for the head restraint system to work
properly:
• Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
• Do not place any object between an occupant and
the seat-back.
• Install each restraint in its proper location.
3
WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints
reduces their effectiveness and increases
the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and
positioned properly before driving.
Position head in the center
of the head restraint.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 163 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints
164
Controls
A passenger sitting in the center back seating
position should adjust the height of their head
restraint to an appropriate position before the
vehicle begins moving.
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
button.
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove a head restraint:
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the
restraint up and out.
To reinstall a head restraint:
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height
while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked
in position.
■
Changing the Rear Center Seat Head Restraint Positions
■
Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
3
WARNING
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the
head restraints can result in severe injury
during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before
driving.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 164 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
165
uuAdjusting the SeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position
Controls
Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their
seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their
seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or
fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
3
WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat,
with your feet on the floor.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 165 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
166
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
Controls
Rear Seats
1. Remove the center shoulder belt from the
guide.
2. Pull the release lever in the trunk to release
the lock.
3. Fold the seat-back down.
If the rear head restraints get caught on the
front seat-backs, remove the head restraints.
2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head
Restraints P. 164
■
Folding Down the Rear Seat
1Folding Down the Rear Seat
The rear seat-back(s
*
) can be folded down to
accommodate bulkier items in the trunk.
Never drive with the seat-back folded down and the
trunk lid open.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 64
To lock a seat-back upright, push it backwards until it
locks.
When returning the seat-back to its original position,
push it firmly back. Also, make sure all rear shoulder
belts are positioned in front of the seat-back, and the
center shoulder belt is re-positioned in the guide.
Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press
against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the
weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work
improperly.
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 50
Make sure all items in the trunk or items
extending through the opening into the rear
seat is properly secured. Loose items can fly
forward if you have to brake hard.
The front seat(s) must be far enough forward so they
do not interfere with the rear seats as they fold
down.
Guide
Center
Shoulder Belt
Release
Lever
Release
Lever
*
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 166 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
167
uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest
Controls
Armrest
Pull down the armrest in the center seat-back.
■
Using the Rear Seat Armrest
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 167 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
168
Controls
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
Interior Lights
■ ON
The interior lights come on regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■ Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following
situations:
• When any of the doors are opened.
• You unlock the driver’s door.
• You remove the key from the ignition
switch.
• When the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
■ OFF
The interior lights remain off regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■
Interior Light Switches
1Interior Light Switches
In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out
and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed.
The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following
situations:
• When you unlock the driver's door but do not open it.
• When you remove the key from the ignition switch
but do not open a door.
• When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) but do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 298, 316
The interior lights go off immediately in the following
situations:
• When you lock the driver’s door.
• When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w
*1
.
• When you close the driver’s door with the key in
the ignition switch.
• When you close the driver’s door in ACCESSORY
mode.
If you leave any of the doors open without the key in
the ignition switch
*1
, the interior lights go off after
about 15 minutes.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE
START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
Door Activated Position
Off
Door Activated
Position
On
Off
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 168 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
169
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights
Controls
The map lights can be turned on and off by
pressing the lenses.
■
Map Lights
1Map Lights
When the ceiling light switch is in the door activated
position and any door is open, the map light will not
go off when you press the lens.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 169 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
170
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
Interior Convenience Items
Pull the handle to open the glove box.
You can lock the glove box with the built-in
key.
Pull the handle to open the console
compartment.
■
Glove Box
1Glove Box
3
WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury
to your passenger in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while
driving.
Glove Box
Handle
To Lock
Models with smart entry system
■
Console Compartment
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 170 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
171
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Continued
Controls
Pull the handle to open the pocket.
■
Center Pocket
Handle
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 171 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
172
Controls
■ Front seat beverage holders
Are located in the console between the front
seats.
■ Front door beverage holders
■ Rear seat beverage holders
Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat
beverage holders.
■
Beverage Holders
1Beverage Holders
NOTICE
Spilled liquids damage the upholstery, carpeting, and
electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.
Hot liquid can scald you.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 172 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
173
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
The accessory power sockets can be used when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY
(q or ON (w
*1
.
■ Accessory power socket (console panel)
Open the cover to use it.
■ Accessory power socket (console
compartment)
Open the console lid and the cover to use it.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Accessory Power Sockets
1Accessory Power Sockets
NOTICE
Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
This can overheat the power socket.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply
power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180
watts (15 amps) or less.
To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket
with the engine running.
When both sockets are being used, the combined
power rating of the accessories should not exceed
180 watts (15 amps).
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 173 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
174
Controls
To use the wireless charger, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON
(w
*1
.
Charge a compatible device on the area indicated by the mark as follows:
1. To turn the system on and off, press and
hold the (power) button.
u When the system is activated, the green
indicator light comes on.
2. Place the device you want to charge on the
charging area.
u The system will automatically start
charging the device, and the amber
indicator light will come on.
u Make sure that the device is compatible
with the system, and placed with the
chargeable side in the center of the
charging area.
3. When charging is completed, the green
indicator light will come on.
u Depending on the device, the amber
indicator light will stay on.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Wireless Charger
*
1Wireless Charger
*
This system consumes a lot of power, so do not use
the system for a long time when the engine is not
running. This may weaken the battery, making it
difficult to start the engine.
When using the wireless charger, check the user’s manual that
came with the compatible device you want to charge.
3
CAUTION
Metal objects between the charge pad
and the device to be charged will get
hot and can burn you.
• Always remove foreign objects from
the charge pad before charging the
device.
• Be sure the surface is clear of dust and
other debris before charging.
• Do not spill liquids (i. e. water, drinks,
etc.) on the charger and the device.
• Do not use oil, grease, alcohol,
benzine or thinner for cleaning the
charge pad.
• Do not cover the system with towels,
clothing, or other objects while
charging etc.
• Avoid using spraying hair spray,
insecticides, etc, that may contact the
charge pad surface.
Green Indicator
Amber Indicator
Charging Area
(Power)
Button
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 174 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
175
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
■ When charging does not start
Perform one of the solutions in the following table.
Indicator Cause Solution
Green
&
Amber
Blinking
simulta-
neously
There is an obstacle(s) between
the charging area and the
device.
Remove the
obstacle(s).
The device is not within the
charging area.
Move the device to the
center of the charging
area where is
located.
Amber Blinking The wireless charger is faulty.
Contact a dealer for
repairs.
1Wireless Charger
*
NOTICE
Do not place any magnetic recording media or
precision machines within the charging area while
charging.
The data on your cards such as credit cards can be
lost because of the magnetic effect. Also precision
machines such as watches can go wrong.
“Qi” and marks are the registered trademarks
owned by Wireless Power Consortium (WPC).
In the following cases, charging may stop or not start:
• The device is already fully charged.
• The temperature of the device is extremely high
while charging.
• You are at a place that emits strong
electromagnetic wave or noises such as TV station,
electric power plant, or gas station.
A device may not charge if the size or shape of its
chargeable side is not appropriate for use with the
charging area.
Not all devices are compatible with the system.
During the charging phase, it is normal for the
charging area and device to heat up.
Charging may be briefly interrupted when:
• All the doors or the trunk are closed
- to avoid interference with the proper functioning
of the smart entry system.
• The position of the device is altered.
Do not charge more than one device at a time on a
charging area.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 175 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
176
Controls
There is a coat hook on the rear left grab
handle. Pull it down to use it.
The cargo hooks in the trunk can be used to
install a net for securing items.
■
Coat Hook
1Coat Hook
The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy
items.
■
Cargo Hooks
1Cargo Hooks
Heavy objects may damage the hook.
Make sure any items put on this hook weigh less than
6.6 lbs (3 kg).
Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk,
placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far
forward as possible.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 415
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 176 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
177
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
To open the sunglasses holder, push and
release the indent. To close, push it again until
it latches.
You can store eyeglasses and other small
items in this holder.
■
Sunglasses Holder
1Sunglasses Holder
Keep the holder closed while driving except when
accessing stored items.
Push
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 177 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
178
Controls
The ignition switch must be in ON (w
*1
to use
the seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats
faster than the LO setting.
While in HI, the heater cycles on and off.
u The appropriate indicator will be on
while the seat heater is on. Briefly press
the switch on the opposite side to turn
the heater off. The indicator will be off.
When a comfortable temperature is
reached, select LO to keep the seat
warm.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Front Seat Heaters
*
1Front Seat Heaters
*
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and
does not automatically turn off.
3
WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 178 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
179
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
The ignition switch must be in ON (w
*1
to use
the seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats
faster than the LO setting.
There is no heater in the rear center seating
position.
While in HI, the heater cycles on and off.
u The appropriate indicator will be on
while the seat heater is on. When a
comfortable temperature is reached,
select LO to keep the seat warm.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Rear Seat Heaters
*
1Rear Seat Heaters
*
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and
does not automatically turn off.
3
WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 179 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
180
Controls
Climate Control System
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select.
The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers
the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.
Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side control
buttons.
3. Press the (on/off) button to cancel.
■ Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
Press the (recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on
environmental conditions.
Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through
the system.
Fresh air mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in
fresh air mode in normal situations.
1Using Automatic Climate Control
If any buttons are pressed while using the climate
control system in auto, the function of the button
that was pressed will take priority.
The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions
unrelated to the button that was pressed will be
controlled automatically.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
fan may not start immediately when the AUTO
button is pressed.
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows,
turning the system on auto, and setting the
temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to
recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
Pressing the button switches the climate
control system between on and off. When turned on,
the system returns to your last selection.
Floor and
defroster
vents
Floor ventsDashboard and floor
vents, and back of
the center console
*
Dashboard vents
and back of the
center console
*
AUTO Button
Driver’s Side
Temperature
Control Buttons
(Recirculation) Button
/ (Fan Control) Buttons
A/C (Air Conditioning)
Button
Passenger’s Side
Temperature
Control Buttons
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 180 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
181
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
Controls
Pressing the button turns the air
conditioning system on and automatically
switches the system to fresh air mode.
Press the button again to turn off, the
system returns to the previous settings.
■ To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Press the button.
2. Press the button.
■
Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode,
the windows may fog up from humidity. This
impedes visibility.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 181 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
182
uuClimate Control SystemuSynchronized Mode
Controls
Synchronized Mode
You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side and the passenger
side in synchronized mode.
1. Press the SYNC button.
u The system will switch to the synchronized mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using driver’s side temperature control buttons.
Press the SYNC button to return to dual mode.
1Synchronized Mode
When you press the button, the system changes
to synchronized mode.
When the system is in dual mode, the driver side
temperature and the passenger side temperature can
be set separately.
The system adjusts each temperature based on the
information of the sunlight sensor and the sun
position updated by the navigation system.
Models with navigation system
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 182 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
183
uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors
Controls
Automatic Climate Control Sensors
The automatic climate control system is
equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill
any liquid on them.
Sensor
Sensor
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 183 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
184
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 184 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
185
Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.
Audio System
About Your Audio System................ 186
USB Port(s
*
) ..................................... 187
Auxiliary Input Jack
*
........................ 188
Audio System Theft Protection
*
....... 189
Audio Remote Controls.................... 190
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 192
Audio/Information Screen ................ 193
Display Setup ................................... 198
Playing AM/FM Radio ....................... 199
Playing a CD .................................... 201
Playing an iPod ................................ 204
Playing Internet Radio ...................... 207
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 210
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 213
Models with one display
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 215
Audio/Information Screen ................ 216
Audio/Information Touch Screen...... 218
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 232
Display Setup ................................... 233
Voice Control Operation .................. 235
Playing AM/FM Radio....................... 239
Playing SiriusXM® Radio
*
................. 244
Playing a CD .................................... 252
Playing an iPod ................................ 255
Song By Voice
TM
(SBV)...................... 258
Playing Pandora®
*
............................ 262
Playing Aha
TM
................................... 264
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 265
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 268
Models with two displays
HondaLink® ..................................... 270
Wi-Fi Connection............................. 275
Apple CarPlay .................................. 277
Android Auto .................................. 281
Siri Eyes Free.................................... 285
Audio Error Messages ...................... 286
General Information on the Audio
System ............................................. 291
Customized Features................ 298, 316
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
*
... 340
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..... 343, 374
Compass
*
.......................................... 409
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 185 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
186
Features
Audio System
About Your Audio System
The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM® Radio service
*
. It can also
play audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC files, USB flash drives, and iPod, iPhone and
Bluetooth® devices.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel or
the icons on the touchscreen interface
*
.
1About Your Audio System
SiriusXM® Radio is available on a subscription basis
only. For more information on SiriusXM® Radio,
contact a dealer.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 291
SiriusXM® Radio is available in the United States and
Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
SiriusXM® is a trademark of Sirius XM Radio, Inc.
Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not
supported.
iPod, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.
Remote Controls
iPod
USB
Flash
Drive
Models with one display
Remote Controls
iPod
USB
Flash
Drive
Models with two displays
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 186 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
187
uuAudio SystemuUSB Port(s
*
)
Features
USB Port(s
*
)
1. Open the cover.
2. Install the iPod dock connector or the USB
flash drive to the USB port.
1USB Port(s
*
)
• Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
damage it.
• We recommend using an extension cable with the
USB port.
• Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a
hub.
• Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be
damaged.
• We recommend backing up your data before using
the device in your vehicle.
• Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.
If the audio system does not recognize the iPod, try
reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To
reboot, follow the manufacturer’s instructions
provided with the iPod or visit www.apple.com/ipod.
In Center Pocket
In Console Compartment
*
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 187 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
188
uuAudio SystemuAuxiliary Input Jack
*
Features
Auxiliary Input Jack
*
Use the jack to connect standard audio devices.
1. Open the AUX cover.
2. Connect a standard audio device to the
input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo
miniplug.
u The audio system automatically switches
to the AUX mode.
1Auxiliary Input Jack
*
You can return to AUX mode by pressing the AUX
button.
Replacement of the audio system with other than a
genuine Honda system may make the auxiliary jack
inoperable.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 188 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
189
uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection
*
Features
Audio System Theft Protection
*
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as
when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system
may display Enter code. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.
■ Reactivating the audio system
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
.
2. Turn on the audio system.
3. Press and hold the audio system power button for more than two seconds.
u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a
connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize
the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 189 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
190
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Features
Audio Remote Controls
Allow you to operate the audio system while driving.
SOURCE Button
Cycles through the audio modes as follows:
FMAMCDUSBiPod
Bluetooth® AudioPandora®
*
AUX
FMAMSiriusXM®
*
CDUSBiPod
Pandora®
*
Bluetooth® AudioAudio Apps
(+ (- (Volume) Buttons
Press
(+: To increase the volume.
Press (-: To decrease the volume.
Buttons
• When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.
Press : To select the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold : To select the next strong station.
Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.
• When listening to a CD, iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
• When listening to a CD (MP3/WMA/AAC), USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Press and hold : To skip to the next folder.
Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.
1Audio Remote Controls
Some modes appear only when an appropriate
device or medium is used.
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some functions may not be operated.
Button
SOURCE Button
Button
(+ Button
(- Button
MENU
Button
*
Models with one display
Models with two displays
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 190 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
191
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Features
Steering Wheel MENU Button
To choose options for the current audio device, press MENU, Audio Menu, and
then SOURCE.
Options available to you for each audio device:
• Radio: You can select Scan, Auto Select, Save Preset, Seek Up, or Seek
Down.
• HD Radio
TM*
: You can select Scan, Auto Select, Tag Song, Save Preset, Seek
Up, or Seek Down.
• SiriusXM®
*
: You can select Scan, Tag Song, Save Preset, Channel Up,
Channel Down, Category Up, or Category Down.
• CD or USB flash drive: You can select Scan Folders, Scan Tracks, Repeat
Folder, Repeat Track, Random in Folder, or Random All Tracks.
• iPod: You can select Play/Pause, Repeat Song, Shuffle Albums, or Shuffle All
Songs.
• Bluetooth® Audio: You can select Pause or Play.
• Pandora®
*
: You can select Like, Dislike, Bookmark, or Play/Pause.
To choose options for the navigation system while it is in operation, press MENU,
select Navi Menu, and then SOURCE.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
To choose options for HFL, press MENU, select Phone Menu, and then SOURCE.
You can select Speed Dial, Call History, or Redial.
To choose options for the display setting, press MENU, select Display Setting, and
then SOURCE.
You can select Brightness, Contrast, or Black Level.
1Audio Remote Controls
The MENU button is available only when the audio
mode is FM, AM, SiriusXM®
*
, CD, USB, iPod,
Pandora®
*
, or Bluetooth® Audio.
Models with two displays
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 191 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
192
Features
Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or
ON
(w
*1
.
Use the selector knob or MENU button to
access some audio functions.
Press to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.
Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set
your selection.
MENU button: Press to select any mode.
The available mode includes Change Source,
Station List, Save Preset, Radio Text,
Music Search, and play modes. Play modes
can be also selected from Scan, Random/
Repeat, and so on.
BACK button: Press to go back to the
previous display.
button: Press to change the audio/
information screen brightness.
Press once and make an adjustment.
u Each time you press , the mode
switches between the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and OFF mode.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Models with one display
1Audio System Basic Operation
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
Audio Menu Items
2 Station List P. 200
2 Radio text P. 200
2 Music Search P. 202, 205, 211
2 Scan P. 200, 203, 212
2 Random/Repeat P. 203, 206, 212
This product includes software codes licensed under
the conditions stated by the copyright holder.
For license conditions and the copy of the
corresponding source code, visit: http://
www.hondaopensource1.com/002
Button Selector Knob
MENU ButtonBACK Button
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 192 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
193
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Continued
Features
Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various
setup options.
Press the (display) button to change the display.
■
Switching the Display
(Display) Button
Audio
Trip Computer
(Current Drive)
Clock/Wallpaper
Trip Computer
(History of Trip A)
Audio/Information Screen
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 193 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
194
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
■ Audio
Shows the current audio information.
■ Trip computer (Current Drive)
Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well
as the average fuel economy from your last trip.
■ Trip computer (History of Trip A)
Shows the range, average fuel economy and distance traveled for the current trip,
as well as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three
driving cycles.
Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The
history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.
■ Clock/Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 194 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
195
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.
2 USB Port(s
*
) P. 187
2. Press the SETTINGS button.
3. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock,
Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper.
4. Rotate to select Add New Wallpaper,
then press .
u The preview of the imported data is
displayed.
5. Rotate to select a desired picture.
u The preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen.
6. Press to save the data.
u The confirmation message will appear.
Then the display will return to the
wallpaper list.
■
Wallpaper Setup
1Wallpaper Setup
• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.
• The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
• The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
• The individual file size limit is 2 MB.
• The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 420 × 234 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
• Up to 255 files can be selected.
• If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.
xxx001.jpg
Add new wallpaper
xxx002.jpg
xxx003.jpg
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 195 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
196
Features
■ Select wallpaper
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock, Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
3. Rotate to select a desired wallpaper, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Rotate to select Set, then press .
■ Delete wallpaper
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock, Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
3. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Rotate to select Delete, then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
5. Rotate to select OK, then press to delete completely.
1Wallpaper Setup
From the pop-up menu, rotate to select Preview
and press to see a preview at full-size screen.
To go back to the previous screen, press to select
OK, or press the BACK button.
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 196 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
197
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Features
Adjusting the Sound
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select Audio Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Sound, then press .
Rotate to scroll through the following
choices:
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.
Selector Knob
SETTINGS Button
Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation
Bass
Treble
Fader
Balance
SVC
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 197 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
198
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Features
Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Display.
3. Rotate to select Brightness, then press
.
4. Rotate to adjust the setting, then press
.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Other.
3. Rotate to select Background Color,
then press .
4. Rotate to select the setting you want,
then press .
■
Changing the Screen Brightness
1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.
■
Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 198 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
199
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Continued
Features
Playing AM/FM Radio
Audio/Information Screen
FM/AM Button
Press to select a band.
Preset Buttons (1-6)
To store a station:
Tune to the selected station.
Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.
Seek/Skip Buttons
Press and to search up and
down the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to tune the radio frequency.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
VOL/ (Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the
previous display or cancel a
setting.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 199 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
200
Features
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate to select the station, then press .
■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Press while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate to select Refresh, then press .
■ Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Radio Text, then press .
■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Scan, then press .
To turn off scan, press to select Stop, or press the BACK button.
■
Radio Data System (RDS)
1Playing AM/FM Radio
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 190
You can also switch the mode by pressing the MENU
button and selecting Change Source on the MENU
screen.
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset memory.
1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 200 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
201
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Continued
Features
Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or
AAC
*1
format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Audio/Information Screen
CD Button
Press to play a CD.
Seek/Skip Buttons
Press or to change tracks
(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Press and hold to move rapidly
within a track/file.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to change tracks/folders.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
VOL/ (Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the
previous display or cancel a
setting.
CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.
(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 201 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
202
Features
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a folder.
4. Press to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
5. Rotate to select a file, then press .
■
How to Select a File from the Music Search List
(MP3/WMA/AAC)
1Playing a CD
NOTICE
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
• When you select a new folder, file, or track.
• When you change the audio mode to CD.
• When you insert a CD.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.
File Selection
Folder Selection
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 202 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
203
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Features
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second
sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,
WMA, or AAC).
Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in
the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files
in the current folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.
Random/Repeat
is selected.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 203 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
204
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB Port, then press the AUX
button.
2 USB Port(s
*
) P. 187
Audio/Information Screen
AUX Button
Press to select iPod (if connected).
Seek/Skip Buttons
Press or to change songs.
Press and hold to move rapidly
within a song.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to change songs.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
VOL/ (Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the
previous display or cancel a
setting.
Album Art
USB Indicator
Appears when an iPod is connected.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 204 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
205
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a menu.
4. Press to display the items on that menu.
5. Rotate to select an item, then press .
■
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1Playing an iPod
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 287
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 205 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
206
Features
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Shuffle/Repeat, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Repeat Song: Repeats the current file.
Shuffle Album: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 206 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
207
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
Features
Playing Internet Radio
Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth®.
You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port.
Press the AUX button to select Pandora mode.
U.S. models
Compatible phones only
1Playing Internet Radio
Pandora
®
, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora
®
,
the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media,
Inc. Used with permission. Pandora
®
is only available in
certain countries. Please visit
http://www.pandora.com/legal
for more information.
To find out if your phone is compatible with this
feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your phone. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.
Pandora® is free personalized radio that offers
effortless and endless music and comedy. Just start
with the name of one of your favorite artists, songs,
genres, composers, or comedians and it will do the
rest.
If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio
system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®
Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio
system is selected.
Changing Stations
To change stations, activate the Pandora® menu,
select Station List, and then select a new station.
iPhone
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 207 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
208
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
Features
Audio/Information Screen
AUX Button
Press to select Pandora®.
Skip Button
Press to skip a song.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to switch to another station.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
USB Indicator
Appears when a phone is
connected.
Rating Icon
Preset Button (1)
Press to switch the mode between
pause and resume.
Preset Button (2)
Press to select Dislike.
Preset Button (3)
Press to select Like.
Preset Button (4)
Press to select Bookmark Track.
Preset Button (5)
Press to select Bookmark Artist.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 208 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
209
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
Features
You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio
system. The available items are:
• Like (Thumbs-up)
• Dislike (Thumbs-down)
• Station List
• Change Source
• Bookmark Track
• Bookmark Artist
• Play/Pause
■ Operating a menu item
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select an item, then press .
■
Pandora® Menu
1Pandora® Menu
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora® P. 288
Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed
on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit
has been reached, your feedback will be saved but
the current track will continue to play.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 209 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
210
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA or AAC
*1
format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the AUX button.
2 USB Port(s
*
) P. 187
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Audio/Information Screen
AUX Button
Press to select USB flash drive
(if connected).
Seek/Skip Buttons
Press or to change files.
Press and hold to move rapidly
within a file.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to change folders.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
VOL/ (Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the
previous display.
USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive is
connected.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 210 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
211
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a folder.
4. Press to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
5. Rotate to select a file, then press .
■
How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 291
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 287
File Selection
Folder Selection
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 211 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
212
Features
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files
in the current folder.
Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder
in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.
Random/Repeat
is selected.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 212 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
213
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Continued
Features
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 350
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
MENU Button
Press to display
the menu items.
AUX Button
Press to select
Bluetooth® Audio.
Skip Buttons
Press or
to change files.
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected
to HFL.
VOL/
(Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the
audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the
volume.
Audio/
Information
Screen
Preset Button (1)
Press to resume
playing a file.
Preset Button (2)
Press to pause a
playing file.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 213 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
214
Features
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to HFL.
2. Press the AUX button.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-
compatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.
■ To pause or resume a file
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Play or Pause, then press .
■
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input
jack, you may need to press the AUX button
repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 214 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
215
Features
Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or
ON
(w
*1
.
: Select to go to the home screen.
2 Switching the Display P. 218
: Select to display any mode.
The available modes include Sound, View
Radio Text, Music Search, and play modes.
: Select to go back to the previous display
when it is displayed.
Button: Press to change the audio/
information touch screen brightness.
Press once and select (- or (+ to make
an adjustment.
u Each time you press , the mode
switches among the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and off mode.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Models with two displays
1Audio System Basic Operation
Audio Menu Items
2 Station List P. 240, 242
2 Music Search P. 253, 256, 266, 269
2 Scan P. 241, 251, 254, 267
2 Play Mode P. 254, 257, 267
Button (HOME) Icon
(MENU) Icon (BACK) Icon
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 215 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
216
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status, trip computer, compass
*
, Turn by Turn, and clock/
wallpaper.
Press the (display) button to change the display.
■
Switching the Display
(Display)
Button
Audio
Compass
*
/Trip
Computer/Audio
Clock
Turn by Turn/Trip
Computer/Audio
Audio/Information
Screen
Wallpaper
Trip Computer/
Audio
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 216 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
217
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
■ Turn by Turn
Displays the Turn by Turn screen.
■ Trip computer
Displays the range and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well as the
average fuel economy from your last trip.
■ Audio
Displays the current audio information.
■ Clock/Wallpaper
Displays a clock screen.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 217 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
218
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Features
Audio/Information Touch Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various
setup options.
Select to go to the home screen.
Select Phone, Info, Audio, Settings, Navigation
*
, HondaLink, Aha,
Smartphone connection, or App List.
■ Phone
Displays the HFL information.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 374
■
Switching the Display
Home Screen
Models without
navigation system
Models with
navigation system
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 218 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
219
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Continued
Features
■ Info
Displays Trip Computer. To see all available information, Trip Computer, Voice
Info, or System/Device Information, select on the Info Menu screen.
Trip Computer:
• Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information.
• History of Trip A tab: Displays information for the three previous drives. The
information is stored every time you reset Trip A.
To delete the history manually, select Delete History on the History of Trip A
tab. The confirmation message appears on the screen, then select Yes.
Voice Info: Displays the all commands list.
System/Device Information:
• System Info: Displays the software version of the audio system.
• USB Info: Displays the memory usage of the USB device.
■ Audio
Displays the current audio information.
■ Settings
Enters the customizing menu screen.
2 Customized Features P. 316
■ Navigation
*
Displays the navigation screen.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 219 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
220
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Features
■ HondaLink
Connects with your smartphone
*1
to play personalized music, information, and
social media streams.
2 HondaLink® P. 270
■ Aha
Displays the Aha
TM
screen.
2 Playing Aha
TM
P. 264
■ Smartphone connection
Displays the Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.
2 Apple CarPlay P. 277
2 Android Auto P. 281
■ App List
Adds or removes App or Widget on the home screen.
2 Home Screen P. 224
*1: Available on specific phones only. Check handsfreelink.honda.com for U.S. and
www.handsfreelink.ca for Canada for compatible phones and hondalink.com for U.S. and
honda.ca/hondalink for Canada for feature details.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 220 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
221
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Continued
Features
1. Select .
2. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
3. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be.
4. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
■
Changing the Home Screen Icon Layout
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 221 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
222
Features
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information touch
screen.
■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to five images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.
2 USB Port(s
*
) P. 187
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Clock/Info.
4. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open
the Wallpaper tab.
5. Select Add New.
u The picture name is displayed on the list.
6. Select a desired picture.
u The preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen.
7. Select Start Import to save the data.
u The display will return to the wallpaper
list.
■
Wallpaper Setup
1Wallpaper Setup
• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.
• The file name must be fewer than 256 characters.
• The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
• The individual file size limit is 5 MB.
• The maximum image size is 4,096 × 4,096 pixels. If
the image size is less than 800 × 480 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
• If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 222 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
223
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Features
■ Select wallpaper
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Clock/Info.
3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open the Wallpaper tab.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Select a desired wallpaper.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Set.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.
■ To view wallpaper once it is set
Press the (display) button to change the audio/information screen until the
wallpaper is displayed.
2 Switching the Display P. 216
■ Delete wallpaper
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Clock/Info.
3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open the Wallpaper tab.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Select a wallpaper that you want to delete.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Delete.
u A confirmation message appears on the screen.
6. Select Yes to delete completely.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.
1Wallpaper Setup
From the pop-up menu, select Preview to see a
preview at full-size screen.
To go back to the previous screen, select OK, or
select .
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.
To delete all wallpapers you add, select Delete All,
then Yes.
Audio/information touch screen
Audio/information screen
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 223 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
224
Features
■ To change to a next screen
Selecting or , or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.
■
Home Screen
1Home Screen
The home screen has 5 pages (fixed). You cannot add
any more pages.
Swipe
Icon
Icon Current page position
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 224 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
225
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Features
■ To use apps or widgets
1. Select .
2. Select .
3. Select App List.
u The APPS screen appears.
4. Select the app or widget you want to use.
Preinstall app list:
• Browser: Displays the web browser utilized
by smartphone and Wi-Fi connection.
• Calculator: Displays Calculator.
• Downloads: Displays the data downloaded
from the web browser and so on.
• Install USB: Installs and updates apps
stored in the USB flash drive.
• Settings: Displays the Android setting
screen.
1To use apps or widgets
Select and hold a selected app or widget to add that
app’s or widget’s shortcut on the home screen.
Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this
occurs, you need to reset the system.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 339
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all
the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 339
In case those apps still do not startup normally even
after Factory Data Reset, contact your dealer.
There is a possibility that a browser is shut down in
the situation of the use. In that situation, the screen
will return to before the browser startup.
You can delete user installed apps by the following
procedure.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Others tab.
5. Select Detail Information.
6. Select an App that you want to delete.
7. Select Delete.
Pre-installed apps cannot be deleted.
App List
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 225 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
226
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Features
■ To add app or widget icons on the home screen
App or widget icons can be added on the home screen.
1. Select .
2. Select .
3. Select and hold empty space on the home
screen.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Add App or Add Widget.
u The APPS screen appears.
Select and hold.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 226 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
227
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Continued
Features
5. Select and hold an app or widget icon you
want to add.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
6. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be.
7. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
Select and hold.
Drag and drop.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 227 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
228
Features
■ To move icons on the home screen
You can change location on the home screen.
1. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
2. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be.
3. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
1To move icons on the home screen
You can also move the Phone, Info, Audio,
Settings, Navigation
*
, HondaLink, aha,
Smartphone connection, and App List icons in the
same manner.
Select and hold.
Drag and drop.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 228 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
229
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Features
■ To remove icons on the home screen
You can delete the icons on the home screen.
1. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
2. Drag and drop the icon you want to remove
to the trash icon.
u The icon is removed from the home
screen.
3. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
1To remove icons on the home screen
You cannot delete the Phone, Info, Audio,
Settings, Navigation
*
, HondaLink, aha,
Smartphone connection, and App List icons.
Apps or widgets will not be deleted by deleting the
icon on the home screen.
Select and hold.
Drag and drop to
trash icon.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 229 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
230
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Features
1. Swipe the upper area of the screen.
u The status area appears.
2. Select an item to see the details.
3. Select or swipe up the icon to close
the area.
■
Status Area
Swipe
Status Area Icon
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 230 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
231
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen
Features
You can close specific apps running in the background on the system.
1. Select and hold .
2. Select an app you want to close.
3. Select Stop.
u The display will return to the app list.
■
Closing Apps
1Closing Apps
If you leave the apps used open in the background,
some apps may stop operating properly next time
using them.
If this happens close unused apps.
To close all apps on the system, select Stop All, then
Yes.
You cannot close the HondaLink®, Aha
TM
and
Garmin
*
apps.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 231 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
232
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Features
Adjusting the Sound
1. Select .
2. Select Audio.
3. Select .
4. Select Sound.
Select a tab from the following choices:
BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE,
Subwoofer
*
, Speed Volume
Compensation (SVC).
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.
You can also adjust the sound the following
procedure.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Audio.
4. Select Sound.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 232 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
233
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Continued
Features
Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information touch
screen.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Display tab.
5. Select Display Settings.
6. Select the setting you want.
7. Select OK.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Display tab.
5. Select Background Color.
6. Select the setting you want.
7. Select OK.
■
Changing the Screen Brightness
1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.
■
Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 233 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
234
Features
Select the current source icon, then select an icon on the source list to switch the
audio source.
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
■
Selecting an Audio Source
1Selecting an Audio Source
If you startup preinstalled audio apps, is
displayed on the upper portion of the screen.
These preinstalled apps cannot be displayed on the
source select screen.
You can startup those audio apps from .
When you are using the Aha
TM
screen and you want
to select another source, select SOURCE on the
upper left of the screen. The source select screen will
appear. Select the source you want.
■
Limitations for Manual Operation
Select the source icon.
Source Select Screen
Source List Icons
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 234 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
235
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Continued
Features
Voice Control Operation
Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation.
The voice control system uses the (Talk) and (hang-up/back) buttons on the
steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.
To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system:
• Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are
using.
• Close the windows and moonroof
*
.
• Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone
on the ceiling.
• Speak clearly in a natural speaking voice without pausing between words.
• Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your
command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.
■
Voice Recognition
1Voice Control Operation
When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks
what you would like to do. Press and release the
button again to bypass this prompt and give a
command.
1Voice Recognition
The voice control system can only be used from the
driver’s seat because the microphone unit removes
noises from the front passenger’s side.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 235 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
236
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features
When the (Talk) button is pressed,
available voice commands appear on the
screen.
For a complete list of commands, say “Voice
Help” after the beep or select Voice Help.
You can also see the list of commands by
selecting Info, , and Voice Info.
*1: Models with navigation system
■
Voice Portal Screen
■ Phone Call
This can be only used when the phone is
connected. When the system recognizes the
Phone call command, the screen will
change to the voice recognition screen for
the phone commands.
• Dial by number
• Call history
• Redial
• Call <Your Contact Name>
• Call <Phone Number>
Phone Call commands are not available if
using Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.
■ Music Search
*1
This can be only used when the iPod or USB
device is connected.
■ Audio
*1
When the system recognizes the Audio
command, the screen will change to the
audio voice recognition screen.
• Audio On
• Audio Off
• Radio FM
• Radio AM
• Radio SXM
• DISC
• Pandora
*
• iPod
• USB
• Other Sources
Pandora®
*
cannot be used with Android
Auto.
■ Navigation
*1
The screen changes to the navigation voice
recognition screen.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
■ Voice Settings
The screen changes to the Voice Recog tab
on the System settings screen.
■ Trip Computer
The screen changes to the trip computer
screen.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 236 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
237
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Continued
Features
■ Voice Help
You can see a list of the available
commands on the screen.
• Useful Commands
• Phone Commands
• Audio Commands
• On Screen Commands
• Music Search Commands
• General Commands
• Climate Control Commands
• All Commands
• Voice Settings
• Getting Started
The system accepts these commands on the
voice portal top screen.
• Call <Phone Number>
• Call <Your Contact Name>
• What time is it?
• What is today’s date?
*1: Models with navigation system
■
Useful Commands
The system accepts these commands on the
dedicated screen for the voice recognition
of the phone.
• Call by Number
• Call by Name
• Call <Phone Number>
• Call <Your Contact Name>
The system accepts these commands on the
dedicated screen for the voice recognition
of the audio.
■ Radio FM Commands
• Radio tune to <87.7-107.9> FM
• Radio tune to <87.7 -107.9> HD <1-8>
FM
• Radio FM preset <1-12>
■ Radio AM Commands
• Radio tune to <530-1710> AM
• Radio AM preset <1-6>
■ Radio SXM Commands
• SXM channel <1-999>
• SXM channel <station name>
■
Phone Commands
■
Audio Commands
*1
• Radio SXM preset <1-12>
■ DISC Commands
• DISC play
• DISC play track <1-30>
■ Pandora Commands
*
• Pandora play
■ iPod Commands
• iPod play
• iPod play track <1-30>
• Music Search
• What album is this?
• What am I listening to?
■ USB Commands
• USB play
• USB play track <1-30>
• Music Search
• What album is this?
• What am I listening to?
■ Bluetooth® audio Commands
• Bluetooth® audio play
NOTE:
Bluetooth® Audio commands may not work
on some phones or Bluetooth® Audio
devices.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 237 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
238
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features
When On Screen Commands is selected,
the explanation screen is displayed.
The system accepts these commands on the
Music Search screen.
■ Using Song By Voice
Song By Voice
TM
is a feature that allows you
to select music from your iPod or USB device
using Voice Commands. To activate this
mode, you must push the talk switch and
say: “Music search”.
■ Song By Voice Commands
• What am I listening to?
• Who am I listening to?
• Who is this?
• What’s playing?
• Who’s playing?
• What album is this?
*1: Models with navigation system
■
On Screen Commands
■
Music Search Commands
*1
■ Play Commands
• Play artist <Name>
• Play track/song <Name>
• Play album <Name>
• Play genre/category <Name>
• Play playlist <Name>
• Play composer <Name>
■ List Commands
• List artist <Name>
• List album <Name>
• List genre/category <Name>
• List playlist <Name>
• List composer <Name>
• What time is it?
• What is today’s date?
■
General Commands
• Climate Control on
• Climate Control off
• Fan Speed <1-7>
• Temperature max heat
• Temperature max cool
• Temperature <57-87> degrees
• Defrost on
• Defrost off
• Air conditioner on
• Air conditioner off
• More
• Climate control automatic
• Vent
• Dash and floor
• Fan speed up
• Fan speed down
• Floor vents
• Floor and defrost
• Temperature up
• Temperature down
■
Climate Control Commands
*1
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 238 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
239
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Continued
Features
Playing AM/FM Radio
*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
Seek Icons
Select or to search up
and down the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Open/Close Icon
*1
Displays/hides the detailed
information.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the menu items.
TAG Icon
Select to tag the song if it is played
on an HD Radio
TM
station. The iPod/
iPhone should be connected to the
audio system to store the tagged
song information on your device.
Models with HD Radio
TM
Tune Icons
Select or to tune the radio
frequency.
Audio/Information Touch Screen
Scan Icon
Select to scan each station with a strong
signal.
Preset Icons
Tune the radio frequency for preset memory.
Select and hold the preset icon to store that
station. Select to display preset 7 onwards.
Audio/Information Screen
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 239 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
240
Features
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
You can also store a preset station by the following procedure.
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Select the open/close icon to display a list.
3. Select the Preset tab.
4. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Lists the strongest stations on the selected band.
1. Select the open/close icon to display a list.
2. Select the Station List tab.
3. Select the station.
■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Select the open/close icon to display a list.
2. Select the Station List tab.
3. Select Refresh.
■
Preset Memory
■
Station List
1Playing AM/FM Radio
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel or
select SOURCE on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 190
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
preset memory.
If the audio system has the memory capacity, the
tagged song information can be stored in it.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license
from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign
Patents. HD Radio
TM
and the HD, HD Radio, and
“Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity
Digital Corp.
Models with HD Radio
TM
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 240 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
241
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Continued
Features
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn
off scan, select Cancel or .
If your iPod/iPhone is connected to the USB port, you can store the TAG information.
If the iPod/iPhone is not connected to the audio system, the information is stored in
the audio system temporarily, then once the device is connected to the system, data
is transferred to the iPod/iPhone.
To store the TAG information to the iPod/iPhone or the audio system, select TAG.
Displays the TAG information saved to the audio system.
1. Select .
2. Select Song Tag List.
■
Scan
■
Tag Song to Device
■
Tagged Song List
Models with HD Radio
TM
Models with HD Radio
TM
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 241 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
242
Features
Displays the subchannel list when an HD Radio
TM
station is selected while listening to
an FM station.
1. Select .
2. Select HD Radio Subchannel.
3. Select the channel number.
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station.
2. Select the Station List tab.
3. Select the station.
■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station.
2. Select the Station List tab.
3. Select Refresh.
■
HD Subchannel
■
Radio Data System (RDS)
Models with HD Radio
TM
1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 242 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
243
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features
■ Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Select .
2. Select View Radio Text.
■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
To turn off scan, select Cancel or .
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 243 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
244
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
Features
Playing SiriusXM® Radio
*
*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
Channel Icons
Select or to the previous
or next channel.
Select and hold to rapidly skip 10
channels at a time.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Open/Close Icon
*1
Displays/hides the detailed
information.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the menu items.
TAG Icon
Select to tag a song played at a
SiriusXM® Radio channel. The iPod/
iPhone should be connected to the
audio system to store the tagged
song information on your device.
Category Icons
Select or to display and select a
SiriusXM® Radio category.
Audio/Information Touch Screen
Scan Icon
Select to scan each channel.
Preset Icons
Tune the radio frequency for preset
memory. Select and hold the preset
icon to store that station. Select
to display preset 7 onwards.
Skip Icons
Select or to change
section in the channel.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within the section.
Audio/Information Screen
Album Art
Station Art
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 244 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
245
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
Features
1. Select .
2. Select Tune Mode.
3. Select Channel Mode or Category Mode.
■
To Change the Tune Mode
1Playing SiriusXM® Radio
*
In the channel mode, all available channels are
selectable. In the category mode, you can select a
channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
There may be instances when SiriusXM® Radio does
not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title).
This does not indicate a problem with your audio
system.
SiriusXM® Radio stations load in ascending order,
which can take about a minute. Once they have
loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make
your selections.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel or
select SOURCE on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 190
Tune Start:
When you change to a preset channel, a song being
played on that channel restarts from the beginning
with this function. This can be turned on or off from
the Audio settings screen.
2 Customized Features P. 316
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 245 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
246
Features
To store a channel:
1. Tune to the selected channel.
2. Select to hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
3. Select Replace.
You can also store a channel by the following procedure.
1. Tune to the selected channel.
2. Select the open/close icon to display a list.
3. Select the Preset tab.
4. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
■ Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)
You can store up to four of your preferred music channels per preset.
1. Tune a station.
2. Select the open/close icon to display a list.
3. Select the Preset tab.
4. Select and hold the preset number you
want to add a music channel.
u A message appears if there are no
available presets.
5. Select Combine.
■
Preset Memory
1Playing SiriusXM® Radio
*
You can store 12 SiriusXM® channels into the preset
memory.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 246 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
247
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
Features
Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM® can be displayed and selected.
1. Select the open/close icon to display a channel list.
2. Select the Channel List tab.
3. Select the featured channel list title you want to listen to.
u The selected channel list of the title is displayed.
4. Select the channel.
■
Listening to Featured Channels
1Listening to Featured Channels
Up to three featured channels by SiriusXM® can be
displayed.
Featured channel lists are at the top of the channel
list.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 247 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
248
Features
The system can record up to the last 60 minutes broadcast of your currently tuned
channel as well as the last 30 minutes broadcast of preset channels, starting from
the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to preset channel, the system
records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You can
rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast.
1. Select .
2. Select Playback Position.
3. Move the gauge to the position you want to replay.
To play or pause on playback mode:
1. Select .
2. Select Play/Pause.
■ Returning to real-time broadcast
1. Select .
2. Select Play Live Broadcast.
■
Replay Function
1Replay Function
The system starts storing broadcast in memory when
the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY
(q or
ON
(w
*1
. You can go back to the program from that
point.
You can no longer replay any program once the
ignition switch is turned to LOCK
(0
*1
as it erases
memory.
You can check how long the program has been
stored in memory from the audio/information touch
screen.
After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will
automatically start deleting the oldest data.
(A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is
behind the real-time broadcast
(B): Replayed segment
(C): Length stored in memory
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an
ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition
switch.
Audio/Information Touch Screen
(C)
(B)
(A)
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 248 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
249
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
Features
While listening to SiriusXM® Radio, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from
your favorite teams.
■ To set up a favorite team
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Audio.
4. Select the SXM tab.
5. Select SportFlash Setup (Favorite Team).
6. Select a team.
■ To set up an alert message
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Audio.
4. Select the SXM tab.
5. Select SportFlash Setup(Interrupt).
6. Select On(one time) or On(continue).
■
Live Sports Alert
1Live Sports Alert
The sports alert function at SiriusXM® mode only.
1To set up a favorite team
Sports alerts cut in only when SiriusXM® mode is on.
Selecting On(one time) from the customize settings
disables the alert feature next time you turn the
ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
.
2 Customized Features P. 316
You can also set up a favorite team by the following
procedure.
1. Select Audio.
2. Select .
3. Select Setting.
4. Select the SXM tab.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an
ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition
switch.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 249 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
250
Features
■ To set up an alert beep
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Audio.
4. Select the SXM tab.
5. Select SportFlash Setup(Interrupt Beep).
6. Select On.
■ Traffic and Weather Information
You can receive traffic and weather information.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Audio.
4. Select the SXM tab.
5. Select Traffic & Weather Setup.
6. Select the region.
u When you do not want to receive the information, select Unset.
1To set up an alert beep
You can also set up an alert beep by the following
procedure.
1. Select Audio.
2. Select .
3. Select Setting.
4. Select the SXM tab.
1Traffic and Weather Information
The traffic and weather information function at
SiriusXM® mode only.
You can also set up the traffic and weather
information by the following procedure.
1. Select Audio.
2. Select .
3. Select Setting.
4. Select the SXM tab.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 250 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
251
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
*
Features
Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds.
1. Select Scan.
2. Select Scan Channels.
u To only scan preset stations, select Scan Songs in Presets.
To turn off scan, select Cancel Scan.
If your iPhone/iPod is connected to the USB port, you can store the TAG information.
If the iPod/iPhone is not connected to the audio system, the information is stored in
the audio system temporarily. Once the device is connected to the system, data is
transferred to the iPod/iPhone.
To store the TAG information to the iPod/iPhone, or the audio system, select TAG.
Displays the TAG information saved to the audio system.
1. Select .
2. Select Tagged Song List.
■
Scan
■
Tag Song to Device
■
Tagged Song List
1Scan
The “Scan Songs in Presets” function is based on
TuneScan
TM
technology of SiriusXM®.
The “Featured Channels” function is based on
Featured Favorites
TM
technology of SiriusXM®.
TuneScan
TM
and Featured Favorites
TM
are registered
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 251 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
252
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Features
Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA,
or AAC
*1
format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
*2:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
Track Icons
Select or to change tracks
(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a track.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Open/Close Icon
*2
Displays/hides the detailed
information.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the menu items.
(Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
Audio/Information Touch Screen
Folder Icons
Select to skip to the next folder, and to skip to the
beginning of the previous folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC.
Audio/Information Screen
CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 252 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
253
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Features
1. Select and select Music Search.
2. Select a folder.
3. Select a track.
■
How to Select a File from the Music Search List (MP3/WMA/
AAC)
1Playing a CD
NOTICE
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
• When you select a new folder, file, or track.
• When you change the audio mode to CD.
• When you insert a CD.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.
Folder Selection
Track Selection
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 253 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
254
Features
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.
■ Scan
1. Select .
2. Select Scan.
3. Select a play mode.
■ Random/Repeat
Select a play mode.
■ To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second
sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,
WMA, or AAC).
Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in
the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files
in the current folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 254 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
255
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Continued
Features
Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB port, then select the iPod
mode.
2 USB Port(s
*
) P. 187
*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
Song Icons
Select or to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a song.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Open/Close Icon
*1
Displays/hides the detailed
information.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the menu items.
Cover Art
Audio/Information Touch Screen
Play/Pause Icon
Audio/Information Screen
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 255 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
256
Features
1. Select and select Music Search.
2. Select the items on that menu.
■
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1Playing an iPod
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information touch screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 287
If you operate the music app on your iPhone/iPod
while the phone is connected to the audio system,
you may no longer be able to operate the same app
on the audio/information touch screen.
Reconnect the device if necessary.
If an iPhone is connected via Apple CarPlay, the iPod/
USB source is unavailable and audio files on the
phone can only be played within Apple CarPlay.
Category Selection
Item Selection
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 256 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
257
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file.
Select a play mode.
■ To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs,
podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in
random order.
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs,
podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in
random order.
Repeat Song: Repeats the current track.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 257 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
258
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By Voice
TM
(SBV)
Features
Song By Voice
TM
(SBV)
Use SBV to search for and play music from your USB flash drive or iPod using voice
commands.
■ To enable SBV
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog tab.
5. Select Song by Voice.
6. Select On or Off.
Models with navigation system
1Song By Voice
TM
(SBV)
Setting options:
• On (factory default): Song By Voice
TM
commands
are available.
• Off: Disable the feature.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 258 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
259
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By Voice
TM
(SBV)
Features
■ Searching for music using SBV
1. Set the Song by Voice setting to On.
2. Press the (Talk) button and say “Music
Search” to activate the SBV feature for the
USB flash drive and iPod.
3. Press the button and say a command.
u Example 1: Say “(List) ‘Artist A’“ to view a
list of songs by that artist. Select the
desired song to start playing.
u Example 2: Say “Play ‘Artist A’“ to start
playing songs by that artist.
4. To cancel SBV, press the (hang-up/back)
button on the steering wheel. The selected
song continues playing.
Once you have canceled this mode, you need
to press the button and say “Music Search”
again to re-activate this mode.
1Searching for music using SBV
Song By Voice
TM
Commands List
2 Song By Voice Commands P. 238
NOTE:
Song By Voice
TM
commands are available for tracks
stored on the USB flash drive or iPod.
You can add phonetic modifications of difficult
words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists,
songs, albums, and composers in voice commands.
2 Phonetic Modification P. 260
SBV is not available when using Apple CarPlay. Use
Siri Eyes Free instead.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 259 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By Voice
TM
(SBV)
260
Features
Add phonetic modifications of difficult or foreign words so that it is easier for SBV
to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands when
searching for music on the USB flash drive or iPod.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog tab.
5. Select Song by Voice Phonetic
Modification.
6. Select New Modification.
7. Select USB or iPod.
■
Phonetic Modification
1Phonetic Modification
Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By
Voice is set to Off.
You can store up to 2,000 phonetic modification
items.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 260 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
261
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By Voice
TM
(SBV)
Features
8. Select the item to modify (e.g., Artist).
u The list of the selected item appears on
the screen.
9. Select an entry to modify.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
u The listen to the current phonetic
modification, select Play.
u To delete the current phonetic
modification, select Delete.
10.Select Modify.
11.Select the phonetic spelling you want to
use (e.g., ”Artist A”) when prompted.
12.Select OK.
u The artist “No Name” is phonetically
modified to “Artist A.” When in the SBV
mode, you can press the (Talk) button
and use the voice command “Play ‘Artist
A’” to play songs by the artist “No
Name.”
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 261 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
262
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®
*
Features
Playing Pandora®
*
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from the Pandora® app on a
compatible smartphone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system, or with an iPhone, you can connect using
your USB cable to the USB port.
2 Phone Setup P. 383
2 USB Port(s
*
) P. 187
U.S. models
1Playing Pandora®
*
Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora
is currently available exclusively in the United States.
To find out if your phone is compatible with this
feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your phone. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.
Pandora® is free, personalized radio that plays music
and comedy you’ll love. Just start with the name of
one of your favorite artists, songs, comedians or
composers and Pandora® will create a custom station
that plays similar tracks. Pandora® also features
hundreds of genre stations ranging from Dubstep to
Smooth Jazz to Power Workout.
If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio
system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®
Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio
system is selected.
If your phone is connected to Android Auto or Apple
CarPlay, Pandora® is unavailable.
Visit www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ to check Pandora®
compatibility in Apple CarPlay, or www.android.com/
intl/en_us/auto/ for Android Auto.
Audio/Information Touch Screen
Cover Art
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the
volume.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the
previous display.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the
menu items.
Play/Pause Icon
Select to resume or play a song.
Station Up/Down Icons
Select to change a station.
Skip Icon
Select to skip a song.
Like/Dislike Icons
Select to evaluate a song.
Audio/Information Screen
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 262 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
263
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®
*
Features
You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio
system. The available items are:
• Bookmark
• Station List
• New Station
• Sound
• Setting
■ Operating a menu item
1. Select .
2. Select an item.
■
Pandora® Menu
1Pandora® Menu
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information touch screen.
2 Pandora® P. 288
Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed
on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit
has been reached, your feedback will be saved but
the current track will continue to play.
To change stations, activate the Pandora® menu,
select Station List, and then select a new station. It
also changes stations on the main Pandora® screen.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 263 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
264
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Aha
TM
Features
Playing Aha
TM
Aha
TM
can be displayed and operated on the audio/information touch screen when
your smartphone is connected to the audio system by Wi-Fi or through Bluetooth®
with the HondaLink® app downloaded to your smartphone.
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 275
2 HondaLink® P. 270
1Playing Aha
TM
Aha
TM
by Harman is a cloud-based service that
organizes your favorite web content into live radio
stations. You can access podcasts, internet radio,
location-based services, and audio updates from
social media sites.
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
The menu items vary depending on the station you
selected.
You must have a previously set up Aha
TM
account
prior to using the service in your vehicle. Visit
www.aharadio.com for more information.
You want to select another source, select AUDIO on
the upper left of the screen. The source select screen
will appear. Select the source you want.
If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or
Android Auto, Aha
TM
can only be accessed when the
phone is connected through Wi-Fi.
Audio/Information Touch Screen
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the
volume.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the
previous display.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
Audio/Information Screen
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 264 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
265
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Continued
Features
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA, or AAC
*1
format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Port(s
*
) P. 187
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
*2:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
Track Icons
Select or to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a track.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Open/Close Icon
*2
Displays/hides the detailed
information.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the menu items.
Folder Icons
Select to skip to the next folder, and to skip
to the beginning of the previous folder.
Audio/Information Touch Screen
Audio/Information Screen
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 265 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
266
Features
1. Select and select Music Search.
2. Select Music.
3. Select a folder.
4. Select a track.
■
How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 291
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information touch screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 287
Select Switch USB Device in the Audio menu
screen to switch to another USB device.
Folder Selection
Track Selection
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 266 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
267
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
■ Scan
1. Select .
2. Select Scan.
3. Select a play mode.
■ Random/Repeat
Select a play mode.
■ To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files
in the current folder.
Random/Repeat
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current
folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.
Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 267 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
268
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 383
*1:Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the lists may not
be displayed.
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible.
To check if your phone is compatible, visit
http://www.handsfreelink.com/Honda/.
It may be illegal to perform some data device
functions while driving.
Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time.
When there are more than two paired phones in the
vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is
automatically connected.
The connected phone for Bluetooth ® Audio can be
different.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there may be a delay before the system begins to
play.
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track
may not appear correctly.
Some functions may not be available on some
devices.
If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or
Android Auto, Bluetooth® Audio from that phone is
unavailable. However, a second previously paired
phone can stream Bluetooth® Audio by selecting
Connect from Bluetooth Device List.
2 Phone Setup P. 383
Audio/Information
Touch Screen
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the
volume.
Group Icons
Select or to
change group.
Pause Icon
Play Icon
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected
to HFL.
Track Icons
Select or
to change tracks.
Open/Close Icon
*1
Displays/hides the
detailed
information.
Audio/Information
Screen
(Power) Button
Press to turn the
audio system on and
off.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the
menu items.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to
the previous display.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 268 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
269
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to the system.
2 Phone Setup P. 383
2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-
compatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.
■ To pause or resume a file
Select the play icon or pause icon.
1. Select .
2. Select Music Search.
3. Select a search category (e.g., Albums).
4. Select an item.
u The selection begins playing.
■
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating
instructions.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
You can change the connected phone in the
Bluetooth® settings on the Audio menu screen by
the following procedure.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
■
Searching for Music
1Searching for Music
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 269 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
270
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Features
HondaLink®
HondaLink® connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect
your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®.
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 275
2 Phone Setup P. 383
■ Places
*
Displays restaurants, gas stations, Honda dealer, and so on. You can also navigate to
the found locations via the navigation.
■ Vehicle
Displays instruction messages when the vehicle needs service.
■ Help & Support
Displays tips for vehicle usage, and get support via road side or customer service
center.
■
HondaLink® Menu
1HondaLink®
The HondaLink® connect app is compatible with most
iPhone and Android phones.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and
smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data
subscription package.
If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or
Android Auto, HondaLink® can only be connected
through Wi-Fi.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 270 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
271
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Continued
Features
■ Messages from Honda
Displays helpful and important information from Honda.
■ Weather
Displays a weekly five-day weather forecast for any location you want. You can
change the ZIP Code at any time.
Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink® service.
■ To enable to the HondaLink® service
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Clock/Info.
4. Select the HondaLink tab.
5. Select Diagnostic & Location Data.
6. Select On.
You need to allow the consent of the location
service to enable the HondaLink® service.
Enable Once: Allows only one time. (Prompt
shows again next time.)
Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt
does not show again.)
Cancel: Does not allow this consent.
■
To Set Up to Connect HondaLink® Service
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 271 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
272
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Features
■ To link with HondaLink®
You can see the Connection Guide screen
after launching HondaLink®. If you do not
need this guide, select check-box and select
OK.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 272 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
273
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Continued
Features
You can check the messages that are received quickly in the shortcut operation.
1. A message appears and notifies you of a
new message on the header area.
u When the message is received, a
notification ring can be heard.
2. A message icon is continuously displayed in
the header area until the new message is
read.
■
Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips
Message
Icon
(yellow)
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 273 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
274
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Features
3. From the top of the screen, swipe down to
see the messages.
4. Select a new message to open.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 274 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
275
uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection
Continued
Features
Wi-Fi Connection
You can connect the display audio to the Internet using Wi-Fi and browse websites
or use online services on the audio/information touch screen. If your phone has cell
hotspot capabilities, the system can be tethered to the phone. Use the following
steps to setup.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth/Wi-Fi.
4. Select the Wi-Fi tab.
5. Select Wi-Fi On/Off Status, then On.
6. Select Wi-Fi Network List.
u Make sure your phone’s Wi-Fi setting is
in access point (tethering) mode.
u Select the phone you want to connect to
the system.
u If you do not find the phone you want to
connect in the list, select Scan.
7. Select Connect.
u Enter a password for your phone, and
select OK.
u When the connection is successful, the
icon is displayed on the list.
8. Select to go back to the home screen.
■
Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)
1Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)
You cannot go through the setting procedure while a
vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to setup the
Wi-Fi connection.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and
smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data
subscription package.
Check your phone manual to find out if the phone
has Wi-Fi connectivity.
You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or
off with the icon on Wi-Fi Network List.
Transmission speed and others will not be displayed
on this screen.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 275 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection
276
Features
Make sure your phone's Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode.
■
Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)
1Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)
You may need to go through an initial setup for Wi-
Fi connection again after you boot your phone.
iPhone users
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 276 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
277
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Continued
Features
Apple CarPlay
If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via USB, you can
use the audio/information touch screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a
phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages.
2 USB Port(s
*
) P. 187
1Apple CarPlay
Only iPhone5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later
are compatible with Apple CarPlay.
Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to
Apple CarPlay and when launching any compatible
apps.
To use Apple CarPlay, connect the USB cable to the
front USB port. The USB port located in the center
console storage will not enable Apple CarPlay
operation.
2 USB Port(s
*
) P. 187
To directly access the Apple CarPlay phone function,
select Phone on the home screen. While connected
to Apple CarPlay, calls are only made through Apple
CarPlay. If you want to make a call with Bluetooth®
HandsFreeLink®, turn Apple CarPlay OFF or detach
the USB cable from your iPhone.
2 Setting Up Apple CarPlay P. 279
When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlay, it is
not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio or
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other
previously paired phones can stream audio via
Bluetooth® while Apple CarPlay is connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 383
For details on countries and regions where Apple
CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining
to function, refer to the Apple homepage.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 277 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
278
Features
■ Phone
Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voice mail.
■ Messages
Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.
■ Music
Play music stored on your iPhone.
■ Maps
Display Apple CarPlay map and use the navigation function just as you would on
your iPhone.
Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlay map) can give
directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior
destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are
currently using will direct you to your destination.
■
Apple CarPlay Menu
1Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements &
Limitations
Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an
active cellular connection and data plan. Your
carrier’s rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,
and other technology integral to providing Apple
CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised
governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or
cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services.
Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or
guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or
functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are
compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the Apple
homepage for information on compatible apps.
Home Screen Apple CarPlay Menu
Go back to
the home
screen.
Apple CarPlay Icon Go back to the Apple CarPlay menu screen.
Models with navigation system
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 278 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
279
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Features
After you have connected your iPhone to the system via USB, use the following
procedure to set up Apple CarPlay. Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the
transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed,
and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will need
to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/information touch screen.
■ Enabling Apple CarPlay
• Enable Once: Allows only once. (Prompt
shows again next time.)
• Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt
does not show again.)
• Cancel: Does not allow this consent.
You may change the consent settings under
the Smartphone settings menu.
■
Setting Up Apple CarPlay
1Setting Up Apple CarPlay
You can also use the method below to set up Apple
CarPlay:
Select HOME Settings Smartphone Apple
CarPlay
Use of user and vehicle information
The use and handling of user and vehicle information
transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is
governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and
Apple’s Privacy Policy.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 279 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
280
Features
Press and hold the talk button to activate Siri Eyes Free.
■
Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri Eyes Free
1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri Eyes Free
Below are examples of questions and commands for
Siri Eyes Free:
• What movies are playing today?
• Call dad at work.
• What song is this?
• How’s the weather tomorrow?
• Read my latest email.
• Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.
For more information, please visit
www.apple.com/ios/siri.
(Talk) button:
Press and hold to activate Siri Eyes Free.
Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.
(Hang-up/back) button:
Press to deactivate Siri Eyes Free.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 280 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
281
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Continued
Features
Android Auto
When you connect an Android phone to the Display Audio system via USB, Android
Auto is automatically initiated. When connected via Android Auto, you can use the
audio/information touch screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation),
Google Play Music, and Google Now functions. When you first use Android Auto, a
tutorial will appear on the screen. We recommend that you complete this tutorial
while safely parked before using Android Auto.
2 USB Port(s
*
) P. 187
2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 283
1Android Auto
To use Android Auto, you need to download the
Android Auto app from Google Play to your
smartphone.
Only Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or later versions are
compatible with Android Auto. Bluetooth A2DP
cannot be used with Android Auto phone.
Park in a safe place before connecting your Android
phone to Android Auto and when launching any
compatible apps.
To use Android Auto, connect the USB cable to the
front USB port. The USB port in the center console
storage will not enable Android Auto operation.
2 USB Port(s
*
) P. 187
To directly access the Android Auto phone function,
select Phone on the home screen. While connected
to Android Auto, calls are only made through
Android Auto. If you want to make a call with
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®, turn Android Auto OFF
or detach the USB cable from your Android phone.
2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 283
When your Android phone is connected to Android
Auto, it is not possible to use Bluetooth® Audio or
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other
previously paired phones can stream audio via
Bluetooth® while Android Auto is connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 383
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 281 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
282
Features
a Maps (Navigation)
Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your
Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard
entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other
inputs.
b Phone (Communication)
Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail.
c Google Now (Home screen)
Display useful information organized by Android Auto into simple cards that appear
just when they’re needed.
d Music and audio
Play Google Play Music and music apps that are compatible with Android Auto. To
switch between music apps, press this icon.
e Go back to the Home screen
f Voice
Operate Android Auto with your voice.
■
Android Auto Menu
1Android Auto
For details on countries and regions where Android
Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to
function, refer to the Android Auto homepage.
Android Auto Operating Requirements &
Limitations
Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone
with an active cellular connection and data plan.
Your carrier’s rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,
and other technology integral to providing Android
Auto functionality, as well as new or revised
governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or
cessation of Android Auto functionality and services.
Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or
guarantee of future Android Auto performance or
functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are
compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android
Auto homepage for information on compatible apps.
Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation
or Android Auto) can give directions at a time. When
you are using one system, directions to any prior
destination set on the other system will be canceled,
and the system you are currently using will direct you
to your destination.
The audio/Information screen shows you turn-by-turn
driving directions to your destination.
Models with navigation system
: Go back to
the home screen.
Android Auto Icon
6
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 282 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
283
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Features
When you connect an Android phone to the unit via USB, Android Auto is
automatically initiated.
■ Enabling Android Auto
• Enable Once: Allows only once. (Prompt
shows again next time.)
• Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt
does not show again.)
• Cancel: Does not allow this consent.
You may change the consent settings under
the Smartphone settings menu.
■
Auto Pairing Connection
1Enabling Android Auto
Only initialize Android Auto when you are safely
parked. When Android Auto first detects your phone,
you will need to set up your phone so that auto
pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual
that came with your phone.
You can use the method below to change Android
Auto settings after you have completed the initial
setup:
Select HOME Settings Smartphone Android
Auto
Use of user and vehicle information
The use and handling of user and vehicle information
transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is
governed by Google’s Privacy Policy.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 283 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
284
Features
Press and hold the talk button to operate Android Auto with your voice.
■
Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
1Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
Below are examples of commands you can give with
voice recognition:
• Reply to text.
• Call my wife.
• Navigate to Honda.
• Play my music.
• Send a text message to my wife.
• Call flower shop.
For more information, please refer to the Android
Auto homepage.
You can also activate the voice recognition function
by pressing the icon in the upper-right corner of
the screen.
(Talk) button:
Press and hold to operate Android Auto with your voice.
Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.
(Hang-up/back) button:
Press to deactivate voice recognition.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 284 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
285
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri Eyes Free
Features
Siri Eyes Free
You can talk to Siri using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your
iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 383
■
Using Siri Eyes Free
1Siri Eyes Free
Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Check Apple Inc. website for features available for
Siri.
We recommend against using Siri other than in Siri
Eyes Free while operating a vehicle.
1Using Siri Eyes Free
Some commands work only on specific phone
features or apps.
(Talk) Button
Press and hold until the display
changes as shown.
(Hang-up/back) Button
Press to deactivate Siri Eyes Free.
While in Siri Eyes Free:
The display remains the same. No
feedback or commands appear.
Appears
when Siri is
activated in
Siri Eyes Free
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 285 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
286
Features
Audio Error Messages
CD Player
If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.
*1:Models with one display
*2:Models with two displays
Error Message Cause Solution
Unplayable File Track/file format not supported
●
Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file
plays automatically.
Bad Disc
Please Check Owner’s
Manual
Push Eject
*1
Bad Disc
Please check Owner’s
Manual
Please push eject button
*2
Mechanical error
●
Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the
error message is cleared.
●
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the
disc again.
2 Protecting CDs P. 293
●
If the error message reappears, press the button, and pull out
the disc.
●
Insert a different disc.
If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc.
●
If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed,
contact a dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Mecha Error
Bad Disc
Please Check Owner’s
Manual
Servo error
Check Disc Disc error
●
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.
2 Protecting CDs P. 293
Heat Error High temperature
●
Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
the error message is cleared.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 286 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
287
uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive
Features
iPod/USB Flash Drive
If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
*1:Models with one display
*2:Models with two displays
Error Message Solution
USB Error
Appears when there is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Check if the device is compatible with the
USB adapter unit.
Incompatible USB Device
Please Check Owner’s
Manual
*1
The connected USB device
has a problem.
See Owner’s Manual
*2
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system
off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Unsupported Version
Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod is connected,
update the iPod software to the newer version.
Connect Retry Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
Unplayable File
Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message
appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.
No Data
Appears when the iPod is empty.
Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
drive.
Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported
Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is connected,
reconnect the device.
iPod
USB flash drive
iPod and USB flash drive
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 287 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
288
uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®
Features
Pandora®
If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message Solution
Incompatible USB Device
Please Check Owner’s Manual
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the
audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
There is no station list in the device.
Please add the station list to your device.
Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device to create a
station.
Music licenses force us to limit the number of
tracks you may skip each hour.
Appears when you try to skip a song or select Dislike over the predetermined
number of times in an hour.
Unable to save rating.
Unable to save bookmark
or
Unable to skip
Appears when the commanded operation is failed. Try again later.
No data
Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated. Reboot the app and
reconnect the device.
PANDORA ver unsupport
Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update Pandora® to the latest
version.
PANDORA system maintenance Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again later.
Cannot connect to PANDORA when stopped.
Check your mobile phone
Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check your device.
Unable to play PANDORA. Please try again
later.
●
Appears when data transfer has failed 10 times. Try again later.
●
Appears when condition for transferring data is unstable. Try again later.
Unable to play PANDORA. Music Licensing
restricts play in this area.
Appears when Pandora® service is not available in the current area.
U.S. models
Models with one display
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 288 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
289
uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®
Features
Error Message Solution
To begin listening, select a station from the
Stations list.
Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device to create a
station.
Unable to rate track. Please try again.
Skip limit reached.
Appears when you try to skip a song or select Like/Dislike over the predetermined
number of times in an hour.
Unable to play Pandora. Please try again later.
Unable to retrieve a track explanation. Please
try again later.
Unable to create bookmark. Please try again
later.
Appears when the commanded operation has failed. Try again later.
No Data
Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated. Reboot the app and
reconnect the device.
Pandora App version is not supported
Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update Pandora® to the latest
version.
Unable to complete the operation. Please try
again later.
Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again later.
Unable to connect Pandora. When stopped,
check your mobile phone
Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check your device.
Unable to connect Pandora. When stopped,
check your mobile phone
Appears when Pandora® app is not installed on your device. Install Pandora® app to
the your device.
Models with two displays
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 289 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
290
uuAudio Error MessagesuAndroid/Apps
Features
Android/Apps
If an error occurs while using the audio system or apps, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
*1:****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an error
occurs.
Error Message
*1
Solution
Unfortunately, **** has
stopped.
Error has occurred within app, select OK on the screen to close the app.
**** is not responding.
Would you like to close it?
App is not responding.
Select Wait if you can wait for a response from app a little longer. If it does not respond even if you keep
waiting, select OK to close the app and start it up. If the error message continues, perform Factory Data
Reset.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 339
Models with two displays
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 290 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
291
Features
General Information on the Audio System
SiriusXM® Radio Service
*
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in
the screen, select Channel 0.
2. Have your radio ID ready, and either call or visit the SiriusXM® website to
subscribe.
Switch to the SiriusXM® mode by using the SOURCE button on the steering wheel,
or through the audio/information touch screen, and stay in this mode for about 30
minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with
good reception.
Channel Not Subscribed:
You are not subscribed to the channel selected.
Subscription Updated:
SiriusXM® radio is receiving information update from the network.
Channel Not Available:
No such channel exists, or the artist or title information is unavailable.
No Signal:
The signal is too weak in the current location.
Antenna Disconnected:
The SiriusXM® antenna is disconnected. Contact a dealer.
■
Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
■
Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
■
SiriusXM® Radio Display Messages
1Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
Contact Information for SiriusXM® Radio:
• US: SiriusXM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com or 1-
800-852-9696
• Canada: SiriusXM® Canada at www.xmradio.ca, or
1-877-209-0079
1Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
The SiriusXM® satellites are in orbit over the equator;
therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause
satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are
more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you travel from the
equator.
You may experience reception problems under the
following circumstances:
• In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle.
• In tunnels
• On the lower level of a multi-tiered road
• Large items carried on the roof rack
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 291 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
292
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs
Features
Recommended CDs
• Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use.
• Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed.
• Play only standard round-shaped CDs.
• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
• Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
1Recommended CDs
A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded
under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not
play either.
■
CDs with MP3, WMA, or AAC files
The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 292 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
293
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uRecommended CDs
Features
■ Protecting CDs
Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs:
• Store a CD in its case when it is not being played.
• When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge.
• Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface.
• Never insert foreign objects into the CD player.
• Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.
• Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
• Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.
1Protecting CDs
NOTICE
Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside
and damage the audio unit.
Examples:
●
Damaged CDs
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
With Label/
Sticker
Using
Printer Label
Kit
Sealed With Plastic Ring
●
Poor quality
CDs
Chipped/
Cracked
Warped Burrs
●
Small CDs
3-inch
(8-cm)
CD
●
Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and
excessively thick CDs
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 293 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
294
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
Features
Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
*1:Models with one display
*2:Models with two displays
• A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended.
• Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
• Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
• Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
■
iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
Model
iPod (5th generation)
iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007)
iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008)
iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009)
iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) launch in 2012
*1
iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) launch in 2010
*2
iPod touch (1st to 5th generation) launch in 2012
*1
iPod touch (1st to 4th generation) launch in 2010
*2
iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4S/iPhone 5
*1
iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4s/iPhone 5/iPhone 5c/iPhone 5s
*2
■
USB Flash Drives
1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions
of these devices.
1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored
order. This order may be different from the order
displayed on your PC or device.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 294 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
295
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Continued
Features
Models with two displays
Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE
APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE
SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER
LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND
VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS
ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE'S PRIVACY POLICY FOR
DETAILS REGARDING APPLE'S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY.
USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN
THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE
DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED,
STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING,
FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS
SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE
POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF
DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO.
■
OWNER'S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 295 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
296
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Features
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO (“THE APPLICATIONS”) IS AT YOUR
SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS
PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE,” WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS,
EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-
INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED
REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED
TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR
AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST
AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE
PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE,
SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC.,
SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY
TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.
TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR
LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY
OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY
(CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND
JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY
NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED
BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING
LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
■
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 296 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
297
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuAbout Open Source Licenses
Features
About Open Source Licenses
To see the open source license information, follow these steps.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System, then open the Others tab.
4. Select Detail Information.
5. Select About device.
6. Select Legal information.
7. Select Open source licenses.
Models with two displays
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 297 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
298
Features
Customized Features
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.
■ How to customize
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the ignition switch in ON (w
*1
, press the
SETTINGS button, rotate to select a setting item, and press .
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Customized Features
When you customize settings:
• Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
• Shift to (P.
• Set the parking brake.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Manual transmission models
Models with one display
1How to customize
To customize other features, rotate , and press .
2 List of customizable options P. 304
SETTINGS Button
Audio/Information Screen
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 298 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
299
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
■ Customization flow
Clock Format
Background Color
Header Clock Display
Factory Data Reset
Clock Adjustment
Press the SETTINGS button.
Language
Default
Edit Pairing Code
Bluetooth On/Off
Bluetooth Device List
Voice Prompt
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Beep
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type
Clock Type
Wallpaper
System
Settings
Voice
Recog
Bluetooth
Display
Clock
Others
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 299 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
300
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
“Trip A” Reset Timing
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Memory Position Link
Keyless Start Guidance Screens
*
Vehicle
Settings
Meter
Setup
TPMS Calibration
Driving Position Setup
*
Remote Start System ON/OFF
*
Driver
Assist
System
Setup
*
ACC Display Speed Unit
*
Forward Collision Warning Distance
*
ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep
*
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
*
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep
*
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 300 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
301
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Keyless Access Light Flash
Auto Light Sensitivity
Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Door Unlock Mode
Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Maintenance Reset
Default
Keyless
Access
Setup
*
Lighting
Setup
Door
Setup
Maintenance Info.
Keyless Access Beep
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 301 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
302
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Wallpaper
Source Select Popup
Clock Type
Sound
Default
Cover Art
*1
Connect Audio
*1
Bluetooth Device List
*1
Default
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Audio
Settings
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type
Info
Settings
*1: May change depending on your currently selected source.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 302 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
303
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Add Bluetooth Device
Disconnect
Edit Speed Dial
Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone Sync
Default
Enable Text Message
Message Auto Reading
New Text Message Alert
Phone
Settings
Connect
Phone
Text
Messages
Bluetooth
Device
List
Phone
Default
Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline
Camera
Settings
Rear
Camera
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 303 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
304
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■ List of customizable options
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
Settings
Display
Brightness
Changes the brightness of the audio/information
screen.
—
Contrast
Changes the contrast of the audio/information
screen.
—
Black Level
Changes the black level of the audio/information
screen.
—
Beep
Selects whether a beeper sounds when you
operate the selector knob.
On
*1
/Off
Blue-
tooth
Bluetooth On/Off Turns the Bluetooth® on and off. On
*1
/Off
Bluetooth Device List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a
paired phone, and create a security PIN.
2 Phone Setup P. 350
—
Edit Pairing Code
Changes a pairing code.
2 To change the pairing code setting P. 352
Random/Fixed
*1
Voice
Recog
Voice Prompt Turns the voice prompt on and off. Beginner
*1
/Expert
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 304 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
305
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
Settings
Clock
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type
Clock Type Changes the clock display type.
Analog/Digital
*1
/
Small Digital/Off
Wallpaper
●
Changes the wallpaper type.
●
Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
●
Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 195
Blank/Galaxy
*1
/
Metallic/Add New
Clock Adjustment
Adjusts Clock.
2 Clock P. 114
—
Clock Format Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H
*1
/24H
Others
Language Changes the display language.
English
*1
/French/
Spanish
Background Color
Changes the background color of the audio/
information screen.
Blue
*1
/Amber/Red/
Green
Header Clock Display Selects whether the clock display comes on. On
*1
/Off
Factory Data Reset
Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 315
Yes/No
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
System Settings group as default.
Yes/No
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 305 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
306
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Settings
TPMS Calibration Cancels/Calibrates the TPMS. Cancel
*1
/Calibrate
Driver
Assist
System
Setup
*
Forward Collision Warning
Distance
*
Changes at which distance the CMBS
TM
alerts. Long/Normal
*1
/Short
ACC Forward Vehicle
Detect Beep
*
Causes the system to beep when the system
detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of
the ACC range.
On/Off
*1
ACC Display Speed Unit
*
Changes the speed unit for ACC on the multi-
information display.
mph
*1
/km/h
(U.S.)
mph/km/h
*1
(Canada)
Road Departure Mitigation
Setting
*
Changes the setting for the road departure
mitigation system.
Normal
*1
/Wide/
Warning Only
Lane Keeping Assist
Suspend Beep
*
Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is
suspended.
On/Off
*1
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 306 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
307
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Settings
Meter
Setup
Adjust Outside Temp.
Display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few
degrees.
-5°F ~ ±0°F
*1
~ +5°F
(U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C
*1
~ +3°C
(Canada)
“Trip A” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A
and average fuel economy A.
With Refuel/IGN Off/
Manually Reset
*1
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B
and average fuel economy B.
With Refuel/IGN Off/
Manually Reset
*1
Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. On
*1
/Off
Keyless Start Guidance
Screens
*
Displays the push button start guidance when
conditions are met to change power mode.
On
*1
/Off
Remote Start System ON/
OFF
*
Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. On
*1
/Off
Driving
Position
Setup
*
Memory Position Link
Changes the driver’s seat position to a stored
setting.
On
*1
/Off
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 307 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
308
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Settings
Keyless
Access
Setup
*
Door Unlock Mode
Changes which doors unlock when you grab the
driver’s door handle.
Driver Door Only
*1
/
All Doors
Keyless Access Light Flash
Causes some exterior lights to blink when you
unlock/lock the doors.
On
*1
/Off
Keyless Access Beep
Sets the beeper sound or not when you grab
either front door handle.
On
*1
/Off
Lighting
Setup
Interior Light Dimming
Time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay
on after you close the doors.
60seconds/
30seconds
*1
/
15seconds
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Changes the length of time the exterior lights
stay on after you close the driver's door.
60seconds/
30seconds/
15seconds
*1
/
0seconds
Auto Light Sensitivity
Changes the timing for the headlights to come
on.
Max/High/Mid
*1
/
Low/Min
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 308 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
309
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
*2:Automatic transmission/CVT models
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Settings
Door
Setup
Auto Door Lock
Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically lock.
With Vehicle Speed
*1
/
Shift from P
*2
/Off
Auto Door Unlock
Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically unlock.
All Doors When
Driver’s Door Opens
*1
/
All Doors When
Shifted to Park
*2
/All
Doors When Ignition
Switched Off/Off
Key And Remote Unlock
Mode
Sets up either the driver's door or all doors to
unlock on the first push of the remote.
Driver Door
*1
/All
Doors
Keyless Lock Answer Back
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
On
*1
/Off
Security Relock Timer
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock
and the security system to set after you unlock
the vehicle without opening any door.
90seconds/
60seconds/
30seconds
*1
Mainte-
nance
Info.
Maintenance Reset
Resets the engine oil life display when you have
performed the maintenance service.
—
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Vehicle Settings group as default.
Yes/No
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 309 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
310
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Audio
Settings
Sound
Adjusts the settings of the audio speaker’s sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 197
-6 ~ C
*1
~ +6 (Bass,
Treble and SUBW
*
), -9
~ C
*1
~ +9 (Fader and
Balance), Off/Low/
Mid
*1
/High (SVC)
Source Select Popup
Selects whether the list of selectable audio
sources comes on when the AUDIO button is
pressed.
On/Off
*1
Cover Art
Turns on and off the cover art display. On
*1
/Off
Connect Audio
Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®
Audio device to HFL.
—
Bluetooth Device List
Edits or deletes a Bluetooth® Audio device paired
to HFL.
—
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio
Settings group as default.
Yes/No
iPod, USB, or Pandora®
*
mode
Bluetooth® Audio or Pandora®
*
mode
Bluetooth® Audio or Pandora®
*
mode
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 310 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
311
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Info
Settings
Clock/
Wall-
paper
type
Clock Type
See System Settings on P. 304 to P. 305
Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info
Settings group as default.
Yes/No
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 311 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
312
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Phone
Settings
Connect Phone
Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or
disconnects a paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 350
—
Bluetooth Device List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a
paired phone, or creates a security PIN.
2 Phone Setup P. 350
—
Phone
Edit Speed Dial
Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.
2 Speed Dial P. 361
—
Auto Transfer
Sets calls to automatically transfer from your
phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
On
*1
/Off
Auto Answer
Sets whether to automatically answer an
incoming call after about four seconds.
On/Off
*1
Ring Tone Selects the ring tone.
Fixed/Mobile
Phone
*1
/Off
Automatic Phone Sync
Sets a phonebook data to be automatically
imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
On
*1
/Off
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 312 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
313
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Phone
Settings
Text
Messages
Enable Text Message Turns the text message function on and off. On
*1
/Off
New Text Message Alert
Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the
screen when HFL receives a new text message.
On/Off
*1
Message Auto Reading
Sets the system to automatically read an
incoming text message.
●
On- A text message is always read aloud.
●
Off- A text message is not read aloud.
●
Auto- A text message is read aloud only when
driving.
On/Off/Auto
*1
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone
Settings group as default.
Yes/No
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 313 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
314
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Camera
Settings
Rear
Camera
Fixed Guideline
Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the
rear camera monitor.
On
*1
/Off
Dynamic Guideline
Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on
the rear camera monitor.
On
*1
/Off
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Camera Settings group as default.
Yes/No
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 314 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
315
uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings
Features
Defaulting All the Settings
Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Other,
then Factory Data Reset.
u The confirmation message will appear.
3. Rotate to select Yes, then press to
reset the settings.
4. Rotate to select Yes, then press
again to reset the settings.
u The confirmation message will appear.
Press to select OK.
1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.
The following settings will be reset:
• Audio preset settings
• Phonebook entries
• Other display and each item settings.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 315 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
316
Features
Customized Features
Use the audio/information touch screen to customize certain features.
■ How to customize
With the ignition switch in ON (w
*1
, select Settings, then select a setting item.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Customized Features
When you customize settings:
• Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
• Shift to (P.
• Set the parking brake.
To customize other features, select Settings.
2 List of customizable options P. 325
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Manual transmission models
Models with two displays
Audio/Information
Touch Screen
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 316 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
317
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
■ Customization flow
Select Settings.
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Sound/Beep
System
Display
Display Settings
Background Color
Guidance Volume
Text Message Volume
Select .
Voice Recog Voice Prompt
Blue
Amber
Red
Violet
Voice Recog. Volume
Beep Volume
Voice Recog. Volume
Song by Voice
*
Song by Voice Phonetic Modification
*
Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Automatic Phone Sync
One Press Voice Operation
Verbal Reminder
*
Blue Green
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 317 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
318
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Language
Default
System
Others
Clock/Wallpaper Type
Clock Adjustment
*
Clock Clock
Wallpaper
Manual Time Zone
*
Auto Daylight
Clock Display
Touch Panel Sensitivity
Clock Format
Auto Time Zone
*
Detail Information
Factory Data Reset
Clock Reset
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 318 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
319
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Vehicle
Driver Assist
System Setup
*
Forward Collision Warning Distance
*
ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep
*
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
*
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep
*
Meter Setup Language Selection
Adjust Outside Temp Display
“Trip A” Reset Timing
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Keyless Start Guidance Screens
*
Driving Position
Setup
*
Memory Position Link
TPMS Calibration
ACC Display Speed Unit
*
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 319 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
320
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Door Setup Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Key and Remote Unlock Mode
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Maintenance
Info
Maintenance Reset
Default
Lighting Setup Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Auto Light Sensitivity
Keyless Access
Setup
*
Door Unlock Mode
Keyless Access Light Flash
Keyless Access Beep
Remote Start System On/Off
*
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 320 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
321
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Sound
Audio
Common
Audio Source Pop-Up
Cover Art
HD Radio Mode
*
FM/AM
RDS INFO
SXM
*
Tune Start
SportsFlash Setup(Interrupt)
SportsFlash Setup(Interrupt Beep)
SportsFlash Setup(Favorite Team)
Traffic & Weather Setup
Bluetooth Device List
Default
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 321 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
322
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Clock/Wallpaper Type Clock
Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
*
Clock Format
Auto Time Zone
*
Manual Time Zone
*
Auto Daylight
Clock Display
Clock Reset
Other Info Screen Preference
Default
Clock/Info
HondaLink Diagnostic & Location Data
Clock
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 322 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
323
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Bluetooth Device List
Default
Phone
Phone
Edit Speed Dial
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone Sync
HondaLink Assist
Text/Email Enable Text/Email
Select Account
New Message Notification
Camera
Show with Turn Signal
LaneWatch
*
Display Time after Turn Signal Off
Reference Line
Default
Rear Camera Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline
Default
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 323 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
324
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Bluetooth On/Off Status
Default
Bluetooth/Wi-Fi
Bluetooth
Bluetooth Device List
Edit Pairing Code
Wi-Fi Wi-Fi On/Off Status
Wi-Fi Network List
Wi-Fi Information
Smartphone
Apple CarPlay/
Android Auto
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 324 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
325
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
■ List of customizable options
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
Display
Display
Settings
Brightness
Changes the brightness of the audio/information
touch screen.
—
Contrast
Changes the contrast of the audio/information touch
screen.
—
Black Level
Changes the black level of the audio/information
touch screen.
—
Background Color
Changes the background color of the audio/
information touch screen.
Blue Green/Blue
*1
/
Amber/Red/Violet
Sound/
Beep
Guidance Volume
Changes the sound volume.
Adjusts the guidance volume of the navigation system.
1~6
*1
~11
Text Message Volume Changes the text/e-mail message reading volume. 1~6
*1
~11
Voice Recog. Volume Changes the volume of the voice prompt. 1~6
*1
~11
Verbal Reminder
*
Turns the verbal reminders on and off. On
*1
/Off
Beep Volume Changes the beep volume. Off/1/2
*1
/3
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 325 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
326
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
Voice
Recog
Voice Prompt Turns the voice prompt on and off. On
*1
/Off
Voice Recog. Volume Changes the volume of the voice prompt. 1~6
*1
~11
Song by Voice
*
Turns the Song By Voice
TM
on and off. On
*1
/Off
Song by Voice Phonetic
Modification
*
Modifies a voice command for music stored in the
system or an iPod/iPhone.
2 Phonetic Modification P. 260
—
Phonebook Phonetic
Modification
Modifies a voice command for the phonebook.
2 Phonebook Phonetic Modification P. 392
—
Automatic Phone Sync
Sets phonebook and call history data to be
automatically imported when a phone is paired to
HFL.
On/Off
One Press Voice Operation
Changes the setting of the touch screen operation
when using the voice operation.
On/Off
*1
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 326 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
327
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System Clock
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type
Clock Changes the clock display type.
Analog/Digital/
Small Digital
*1
/Off
Wallpaper
●
Changes the wallpaper type.
●
Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
●
Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.
Galaxy
*1
/Metallic/
Blank
Clock Adjustment
*
Adjusts clock. —
Clock Format Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H
*1
/24H
Auto Time Zone
*
Automatically adjusts the clock when driving through
different time zones.
On
*1
/Off
Manual Time Zone
*
Changes the time zone manually. —
Auto Daylight
Select On to have the GPS automatically adjust the
clock to daylight savings time. Select Off to cancel this
function.
On
*1
/Off
Clock Display Selects whether the clock display comes on. On
*1
/Off
Clock Reset Resets the clock settings to the factory default. Yes/No
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 327 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
328
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
Others
Language Changes the display language.
English
*1
/French/
Spanish
Touch Panel Sensitivity Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen. High/Low
*1
Detail Information Displays the Android setting items. —
Factory Data Reset
Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 339
Yes/No
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the System
settings group as default.
Yes/No
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 328 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
329
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Settings
TPMS Calibration Cancels/Calibrates the TPMS. Cancel
*1
/Calibrate
Driver
Assist
System
Setup
*
Forward Collision
Warning Distance
*
Changes distance the CMBS
TM
alerts.
Long/Normal
*1
/
Short
ACC Forward Vehicle
Detect Beep
*
Causes the system to beep when the system detects a
vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of the ACC
range.
On/Off
*1
ACC Display Speed Unit
*
Changes the speed unit for ACC on the multi-
information display.
mph
*1
/km/h
(U.S.)
mph/km/h
*1
(Canada)
Road Departure
Mitigation Setting
*
Changes the setting for the road departure mitigation
system.
Normal
*1
/Wide/
Warning Only
Lane Keeping Assist
Suspend Beep
*
Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is
suspended.
On/Off
*1
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 329 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
330
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Meter
Setup
Language Selection
Changes the displayed language on the multi-
information display.
English
*1
/French/
Spanish
Adjust Outside Temp.
Display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
-5°F ~ ±0°F
*1
~ +5°F
(U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C
*1
~ +3°C
(Canada)
“Trip A” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A and
average fuel economy A.
With Refuel/IGN
Off/Manually
Reset
*1
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B and
average fuel economy B.
With Refuel/IGN
Off/Manually
Reset
*1
Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. On
*1
/Off
Keyless Start Guidance
Screens
*
Displays the push button start guidance when
conditions are met to change power mode.
On
*1
/Off
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 330 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
331
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Driving
Position
Setup
*
Memory Position Link Turns the driving position memory system on and off. On
*1
/Off
Keyless
Access
Setup
*
Door Unlock Mode
Changes which doors unlock when you grab the
driver’s door handle.
Driver Door Only
*1
/
All Doors
Keyless Access Light
Flash
Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/
lock the doors.
On
*1
/Off
Keyless Access Beep
Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the
doors.
On
*1
/Off
Remote Start System On/
Off
*
Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. On
*1
/Off
Lighting
Setup
Interior Light Dimming
Time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on
after you close the doors.
60 sec/30 sec
*1
/
15 sec
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on
after you close the driver’s door.
60 sec/30 sec/
15 sec
*1
/0 sec
Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.
Max/High/Mid
*1
/
Low/Min
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 331 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
332
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
*2:Automatic transmission/CVT models
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Door
Setup
Auto Door Lock
Changes the setting for when the doors automatically
lock.
With Vehicle
Speed
*1
/Shift from
P
*2
/Off
Auto Door Unlock
Changes the setting for when the doors automatically
unlock.
All Doors When
Driver’s Door
Opens
*1
/All Doors
When Shift to P
*2
/
All Doors with IGN
Off/Off
Key And Remote Unlock
Mode
Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to unlock
on the first push of the remote or built-in key.
Driver Door
*1
/All
Doors
Keyless Lock Answer Back
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
On
*1
/Off
Security Relock Timer
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and
the security system to set after you unlock the vehicle
without opening any door.
90 sec/60 sec/30
sec
*1
Mainte-
nance
Info.
Maintenance Reset
Resets the engine oil life display when you have
performed the maintenance service.
—
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Vehicle
group as default.
Yes/No
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 332 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
333
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Audio
Common
Sound
Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers’ sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 232
-6 ~ 0
*1
~ +6 (BASS
and TREBLE),
RR9~0
*1
~FR9
(FADER), L9~
*1
0~R9
(BALANCE), -6 ~ 0
*1
~ +6 (Subwoofer)
*
,
Off/Low/Mid
*1
/
High (Speed
Volume
Compensation)
Audio Source Pop-
Up
Selects whether the list of selectable audio source
comes on when Audio is selected on the home
screen.
On/Off
*1
[Your selected media]
Cover Art
Turns the cover art display on and off. On
*1
/Off
Bluetooth Device
List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a paired
phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 383
—
FM/AM
HD Radio Mode
*
Selects whether the audio system automatically
switches to the digital radio waves or receives the
analogue waves only.
Auto
*1
/Analog
RDS INFO Turns on and off the RDS information. On
*1
/Off
iPod or USB mode
FM/AM mode
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 333 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
334
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Audio
SXM
*
Tune Start
Turns on and off, starts the song from the beginning as
you change preset stations.
On
*1
/Off
SportsFlash
Setup(Interrupt)
Turns on and off the sports alert function.
Off
*1
/
On(one time)/
On(continue)
SportsFlash
Setup(Interrupt
Beep)
Causes the system to beep when the sports alert is
notified.
On
*1
/Off
SportsFlash
Setup(Favorite
Team)
Selects your favorite sports teams.
2 Live Sports Alert P. 249
—
Traffic & Weather
Setup
Selects the region you want to receive the information. —
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio
settings group as default.
Yes/No
SiriusXM
®
mode
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 334 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
335
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Clock/
Info
Clock
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type
Clock
See System on P. 325
Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
*
Clock Format
Auto Time Zone
*
Manual Time Zone
*
Auto Daylight
Clock Display
Clock Reset
HondaLink
Diagnostic & Location
Data
Turns HondaLink® on and off. On/Off
Other
Info Screen
Preference
Changes the information screen type.
Info Top/Info
Menu/Off
*1
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Clock/Info
settings group as default.
Yes/No
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 335 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
336
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Phone
Phone
Bluetooth Device
List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or disconnects a
paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 383
—
Edit Speed Dial
Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.
2 Speed Dial P. 389
—
Ring Tone Selects the ring tone.
Fixed/Mobile
Phone
*1
Automatic Phone
Sync
Sets phonebook and call history data to be
automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
On
*1
/Off
HondaLink Assist Turns HondaLink Assist on and off. On/Off
*1
Text/Email
Enable Text/Email Turns the text/e-mail message function on and off. On
*1
/Off
Select Account Selects a text or e-mail message account. —
New Message
Notification
Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen
when HFL receives a new text/e-mail messages.
On
*1
/Off
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone
settings group as default.
Yes/No
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 336 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
337
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Camera
Rear Camera
Fixed Guideline
Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the rear
camera monitor.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 496
On
*1
/Off
Dynamic Guideline
Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on the
rear camera monitor.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 496
On
*1
/Off
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear
Camera setting group as default.
Yes/No
LaneWatch
*
Show with Turn
Signal
Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes on
when you move the turn signal lever to indicate a
right turn.
On
*1
/Off
Display Time after
Turn Signal Off
Changes the length of time the LaneWatch display
stays on after the turn signal lever returns to the
center.
0 second
*1
/
2 seconds
Reference Line
Selects whether the reference lines come on the
LaneWatch monitor.
On
*1
/Off
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
LaneWatch group as default.
Yes/No
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 337 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
338
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Bluetooth/
Wi-Fi
Bluetooth
Bluetooth On/Off
Status
Selects to change the Bluetooth® status. On
*1
/Off
Bluetooth Device
List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a paired
phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 383
—
Edit Pairing Code
Edits a pairing code.
2 To change the pairing code setting P. 384
Random/Fixed
*1
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi On/Off Status Changes the Wi-Fi mode. On/Off
*1
Wi-Fi Network List
Connects, disconnects, or deletes the Wi-Fi
device.
—
Wi-Fi Information Shows the Wi-Fi information of the device. —
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Bluetooth/Wi-Fi group as default.
Yes/No
Smartphone Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Sets up the Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
connection.
Enable Once/
Always Enable/
Cancel
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 338 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
339
uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings
Features
Defaulting All the Settings
Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Others tab.
5. Select Factory Data Reset.
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen.
6. Select Yes.
7. Select Yes again to reset the settings.
u After selecting Yes, the system will
reboot.
1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the
preinstalled apps to their factory default.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use
HondaLink® because it becomes inactive and you will
have to reconnect.
2 HondaLink® P. 270
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 339 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
340
Features
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
*
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three
remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or
home security systems.
Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that
the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety
information, contact the manufacturer.
Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the
way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.
When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s path.
■
Important Safety Precautions
1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
*
Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage
door opener, confirm that the opener has an external
entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic
eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it
does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 340 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
341
uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver
*
uTraining HomeLink
Continued
Features
Training HomeLink
If it is necessary to erase a previously entered
learned code:
• Press and hold the two outside buttons for
about 20 seconds, until the red indicator
blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to
step 1.
• If you are training the second or third
button, go directly to step 1.
The instructions on the next page should work for most gate or garage openers, but
may not work for all. For detailed instructions about your specific remote opener,
visit http://www.homelink.com or call (800)355-3515.
Red Indicator
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 341 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver
*
uTraining HomeLink
342
Features
■
Training a Button
1Training HomeLink
Retraining a Button
If you want to retrain a programmed button for a
new device, you do not have to erase all button
memory. You can replace the existing memory code
using this procedure:
1.
Press and hold the desired HomeLink button
until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink.
2.
Quickly release the HomeLink button and follow
steps 1 - 3 under “Training a Button.” You do not
need to press and release the HomeLink button
again in step 2.
Indicator remains on
for about 25 secs.
Standard transmitter
Indicator remains on for
about 25 secs.
Rolling code transmitter
Erasing Codes
To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside
buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink
(about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes
before selling the vehicle.
If you have any problems, see the device’s
instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call
HomeLink at (800) 355-3515.
HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
4.
3.
2.
5.
A.
B.
1.
Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the
HomeLink button you want to program.
Press and release the desired HomeLink button. Hold the button on the remote
transmitter. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly blinking to
constantly on or rapidly blinking? The process should take less than 60 seconds.
Press and hold the
programmed HomeLink
button for about a sec.
Does the device (garage
door opener) work?
Press and release the HomeLink button. Press
and release the button on the remote every 2
secs.
Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from
slowly blinking to constantly on or rapidly
blinking? The process should take less than 60
seconds.
Training
Complete
Press and hold the HomeLink button again.
Press and hold the HomeLink
button again.
The remote-controlled device
should operate.
Training Complete
The remote has a rolling code. Press the
“learn” button on the remote-controlled
device (e.g. garage door opener).
Within 30 secs, press and hold the
programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.
HomeLink indicator rapidly blinks.
HomeLink LED is
constantly on.
YES
NO
YES
YES
NO
NO
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 342 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
343
Continued
Features
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
(Pick-up) button: Press to answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag, a phonebook
name, or a number.
PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.
Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .
■
HFL Buttons
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528 -7876.
To use HFL, the Bluetooth On/Off setting must be On.
2 Customized Features P. 298
Voice control tips
• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
• Press and release the button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag, a
phonebook name, or a number. Speak clearly and
naturally after a beep.
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
• To change the volume level, use the audio system’s
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the
steering wheel.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
If you receive a call while using the audio system, the
system resumes its operation after ending the call.
Models with one display
Talk Button
Volume up
Microphone
Hang-up/Back Button
Pick-up
Button
Volume down
Selector
Knob
PHONE
Button
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 343 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
344
Features
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Certain manual functions are disabled or
inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until
the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries with
voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers
can be called using voice commands while the
vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 361
■
HFL Status Display
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
Place your phone where you can get good reception.
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language to English,
French, or Spanish.
2 Customized Features P. 298
■
Limitations for Manual Operation
Bluetooth Indicator
Comes on when your
phone is connected to HFL.
Signal Strength
HFL Mode
Battery Level
Status
Roam Status
Caller’s Name
Caller’s Number
Disabled Option
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 344 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
345
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
HFL Menus
The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w
*1
to use HFL.
■ Phone Settings screen
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press .
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-
compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving. A message
appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.
Pair a phone to the system.
Replace a previously paired phone with a
new phone.
Connect
Phone
*2
Bluetooth
Device List
Add Bluetooth Device
Edit PIN
(Existing entry list)
Disconnect
Connect a phone to the system.
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
(Existing
entry list)
Replace This
Device
Delete This
Device
Delete a previously paired phone.
Create a security PIN for a paired phone.
Add
Bluetooth
Device
Pair a phone to the system.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.
*2: Appears when a phone has already been paired to HFL.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 345 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
346
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
Select a phone number from the call
history to store as a speed dial number.
Manual Input
New Entry
Import from
Call History
Import from
Phonebook
Enter a phone number to store as a
speed dial number.
Delete all of the previously stored speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the
phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
Edit
Edit a previously stored speed dial number.
●
Change a number.
●
Create or delete a voice tag.
Delete
Delete a previously stored speed dial
number.
(Existing
entry list)
Delete All
Edit Speed
Dial
*1
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the
vehicle.
Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Set whether to automatically answer an incoming call after about four
seconds.
Select the ring tone.
Automatic Phone Sync
*1
Set phonebook data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to
HFL.
Phone
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 346 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
347
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Turn the text message function on and off.
New Text Message Alert
Message Auto Reading
Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL
receives a new text message.
Set the system to automatically read an incoming text message.
Text Messages
*1
Default
Enable Text Message
Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 347 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
348
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ Phone menu screen
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
Phone menu
Speed Dial
Redial
Call History Text messages
Dial
Phonebook
Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
Select a phone number from the call history to store as a
speed dial number.
Call
History
*1
Speed Dial
*1
All
Manual Input
Dialed
Received
Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
Display the last 20 incoming calls.
New Entry
Import from
Call History
Import from
Phonebook
Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a
speed dial number.
Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.
More Speed Dials
Display another paired phone’s speed dial list.
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Missed
Display the last 20 missed calls.
Dial
*1
Redial
*1
Enter a phone number to dial.
Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.
(Existing entry list)
Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 348 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
349
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
See the previous message.
Text Messages
*1
Read/Stop
Previous Message
Next Message
See the next message.
System reads received message aloud, or
stop message from being read.
Phonebook
*1
Display the paired phone’s phonebook.
Message is read
aloud.
Reply
Call
Reply to a received message using one of
six fixed phrases.
Make a call to the sender.
Select a message
and press .
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 349 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
350
Features
■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone Not Found and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
■
Phone Setup
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
• Up to six phones can be paired.
• Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL.
• If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and returns to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
When pairing is completed, an Automatic Phone
Sync prompt appears. Select On if you want your call
history and phonebook automatically imported to
HFL.
2 Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
setting P. 360
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 350 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
351
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ To pair a cell phone (when a phone has
already been paired to the system)
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 345
2. Rotate to select Connect Phone, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Add
Bluetooth Device.
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone Not Found and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 351 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
352
Features
■ To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Bluetooth, then Edit Pairing Code.
3. Rotate to select Fixed or Random,
then press .
1To change the pairing code setting
The pairing code may be six or four digits depending
on your phone.
The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the
setting.
To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the
current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you
pair a phone, select Random.
Edit Pairing Code
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 352 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
353
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To replace an already-paired phone
with a new phone
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 345
2. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
3. Rotate to select a paired phone you
want to replace, then press .
4. Rotate to select Replace This Device,
then press .
5. HFL enters the pairing process and searches
a new phone.
u Follow the prompts to pair a new phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
1To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone
The replaced phone will keep the same speed dial
entries, call history, and security PIN information from
the previously paired phone.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 353 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
354
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To delete a paired phone
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 345
2. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
3. Rotate to select a phone you want to
delete, then press .
4. Rotate to select Delete This Device,
then press .
5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if it is successful.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 354 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
355
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ To turn on or off the text message
function
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 345
2. Rotate to select Text Messages, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Enable
Text Message.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Rotate to select On or Off, then press
.
■
To Set Up Text Message Options
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 355 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
356
Features
■ To turn on or off the text message
notice
1. On the Text Messages screen, rotate
to select New Text Message Alert, then
press .
2. Rotate to select On or Off, then press
.
■ To set up the auto reading option
1. On the Text Messages screen, rotate
to select Message Auto Reading, then
press .
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
2. Rotate to select On, Off or Auto then
press .
1To turn on or off the text message notice
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new message.
Off: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.
1To set up the auto reading option
On: A text message is always read aloud.
Off: A text message is not read aloud.
Auto: A text message is read aloud only when
driving.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 356 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
357
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 345
2. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
3. Rotate to select a phone you want to
add a security PIN to, then press .
4. Rotate to select Edit PIN, then press .
5. Enter a new four-digit number.
u Rotate to select, then press .
Press to delete. Press OK to enter the
security PIN.
6. Re-enter the four-digit number.
u The screen returns to the screen in step
4.
■
To Create a Security PIN
1To Create a Security PIN
If the phone is already security PIN protected, you
need to enter the current security PIN before clearing
the PIN or creating a new one.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 357 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
358
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically
transferred to HFL.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 345
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Transfer.
3. Rotate to select On, then press .
You can set HFL to automatically answer an incoming call in four seconds.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 345
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Answer.
3. Rotate to select On, then press .
■
Automatic Transferring
■
Auto Answer
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 358 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
359
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 345
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Ring
Tone.
3. Rotate to select Fixed, Mobile Phone
or Off, then press .
■
Ring Tone
1Ring Tone
Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker.
Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the
connected cell phone sounds from the speaker.
Off: No ring tones sound from the speaker.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 359 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
360
Features
■ When Automatic Phone Sync is set to
On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook and call history are automatically
imported to HFL.
■ Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
setting
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 345
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Automatic Phone Sync.
3. Rotate to select On or Off, then press
.
■
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Pref
Home
Mobile
Work Pager
Fax
Car
Other
Voice
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 360 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
361
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 348
2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
u Repeat the procedure to select New
Entry.
3. Rotate to select a place to choose a
number from, then press .
From Import from Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
From Manual Input:
u Input the number manually.
From Import from Phonebook:
u Select a number from the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
4. When the speed dial is successfully stored
from Import from Call History or Import
from Phonebook, you are asked to create
a voice tag for the number. Rotate to
select Yes or No, then press .
5. Using the button, follow the prompts to
store a voice tag for the speed dial entry.
■
Speed Dial
1Speed Dial
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to
call the number using the voice tag. Say “Call” and
the voice tag name.
Mr.AAA
111AAA####
555EEE####
444DDD####
333CCC####
222BBB####
Mr.EEE
Mr.DDD
Mr.CCC
Mr.BBB
Select a method to store
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 361 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
362
Features
■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed
dial number
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 345
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Edit, then press .
4. Rotate to select Voice Tag, then press
.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Record, then press .
5. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For
example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 362 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
363
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ To delete a voice tag
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 345
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Edit, then press .
4. Rotate to select Voice Tag, then press
.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Clear, then press .
5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .
■ To delete a speed dial
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 345
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Delete, then press .
4. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 363 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
364
Features
You can make calls by inputting any phone
number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or
redial.
■
Making a Call
1Making a Call
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name,
or number can be dialed by voice from most screens.
Press the button and say “Call” and the
phonebook name, phone number, or stored voice
tag.
The maximum range between your phone and
vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
Phone menu
Speed Dial
Redial
Call History Text messages
Dial
Phonebook
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 364 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
365
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To make a call using the imported
phonebook
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 348
2. Rotate to select Phonebook, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a name, then press .
u You can also search by letter. Rotate
to select Alphabet Search, then press
.
4. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the imported phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number, phonebook name, or number using
voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 344
2 Speed Dial P. 361
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 365 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
366
Features
■ To make a call using a phone number
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 348
2. Rotate to select Dial, then press .
3. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
4. Rotate to select , then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using redial
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 348
2. Rotate to select Redial, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using a phone number
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number, phonebook name, or number using
voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 344
2 Speed Dial P. 361
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 366 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
367
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To make a call using the call history
Call history is stored by All, Dialed,
Received, and Missed.
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 348
2. Rotate to select Call History, then
press .
3. Rotate to select All, Dialed, Received,
or Missed, then press .
4. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using a speed dial entry
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 348
2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
3. Rotate to select a number, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the call history
The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or
missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)
1To make a call using a speed dial entry
Select More Speed Dials to view another paired
phone’s speed dial list. You can make a call from that
list using the currently connected phone.
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to
call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 361
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name,
or number can be dialed by voice from any screen.
Press the button and follow the prompts.
To call stored speed dial entries 1-6, press the
corresponding preset buttons from the Phone
screen.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 367 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
368
Features
When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
Incoming Call screen appears.
Press the button to answer the call.
Press the button to decline or end the call.
■
Receiving a Call
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting
Press the button to put the current call on hold to
answer the incoming call.
Press the button again to return to the current
call.
Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer
it.
Press the button if you want to hang up the
current call.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 368 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
369
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
The following options are available during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-
driven phone system.
Press the MENU button to display the options.
Rotate to select the mute option, then
press .
u The mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
■
Options During a Call
1Options During a Call
Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
Mute Icon
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 369 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
370
Features
HFL can display newly received text messages as well as 20 of the most recently
received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud
and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text message.
2. Rotate to select Read to listen to the
message, then press .
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, press
.
■
Receiving a Text Message
1Receiving a Text Message
The system does not display any received messages
while you are driving. You can only hear them read
aloud.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to
20 most recent text messages.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text
message feature. Only use the text message feature
when conditions allow you to do so safely.
When you receive a text message for the first time
after the phone is paired to HFL, you are asked to
turn the New Text Message Alert setting to On.
2 To turn on or off the text message notice
P. 356
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 370 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
371
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate to select Text Messages, then
press .
4. Rotate to select a message, then press
.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.
■
Displaying Text Messages
1Displaying Text Messages
The icon appears next to an unread message.
If you delete a message on the phone, the message is
also deleted in the system. If you send a message
from the system, the message goes to your phone’s
outbox.
To see the previous or next message, press on the
text message screen. From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Previous Message or Next Message,
then press .
Message List
Text Message
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 371 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
372
Features
■ Using the Stop or Read option
1. Go to the text message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Text Messages P. 371
2. Press to have the pop-up menu appear
on the screen.
3. Rotate to select Stop or Read, then
press .
■ Reply to a message
1. Go to the text message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Text Messages P. 371
2. Press to have the pop-up menu appear
on the screen.
3. Rotate to select Reply, then press .
4. Rotate to select the reply message, then
press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Send to send the message.
u Complete appears on the screen when
the reply message was successfully sent.
1Using the Stop or Read option
This option changes to:
• Stop while the text message is read out. Select this
option to discontinue the message read out.
• Read when the system has finished reading out the
text message, or after you selected Stop.
Select this option to hear the system read out the
selected message.
1Reply to a message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
• Talk to you later, I’m driving.
• I’m on my way.
• I’m running late.
• OK
• Yes
• No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 372 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
373
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ Making a call to a sender
1. Go to the text message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Text Messages P. 371
2. Press to have the pop-up menu appear
on the screen.
3. Rotate to select Call, then press .
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 373 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
374
Features
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
■
HFL Buttons
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities, ask a
dealer or your local Honda.
To use the system, the Bluetooth On/Off Status
setting must be On. If there is an active connection to
Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, HFL is unavailable.
2 How to customize P. 316
Voice control tips
• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphones.
• Press the button when you want to call a
number using a stored voice tag. Speak clearly and
naturally after a beep.
• If the microphones pick up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
• To change the volume level, select the audio
system's VOL (Volume) or use the remote audio
controls on the steering wheel.
Up to five speed dial entries can be displayed among
a total of 20 that can be entered. If there is no entry
in the system, Speed Dial is disabled.
2 Speed Dial P. 389
Up to five call histories can be displayed among a
total of 20 that can be entered. If there is no call
history, Call History is disabled.
Models with two displays
(Talk) Button
Volume up
Microphone
(Hang-up/Back) Button
(Pick-up) Button
Volume down MENU Button
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 374 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
375
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
Features
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen, or to answer an
incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call, go back to the previous
command, or cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag.
MENU button: Press to display Speed Dial, Call History, or Redial on the phone
screen.
To go to the Phone menu screen:
1. Select .
2. Select Phone to switch the display to the phone screen.
3. Select .
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
Place your phone where you can get good reception.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 375 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
376
Features
The audio/information screen and audio/information touch screen notify you when
there is an incoming call.
■
HFL Status Display
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/
information screen and audio/information touch
screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language.
2 How to customize P. 316
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
Signal Strength
HFL Mode
Battery Level Status
Caller’s Name
Caller’s Number
Roaming Status
Audio/information touch screen
Caller’s Name
Caller’s Number
Audio/information screen
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
Signal Strength
Battery Level Status
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 376 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
377
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
Features
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries with voice tags, phonebook names, or
numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 389
■
Limitations for Manual Operation
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 377 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
378
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
HFL Menus
The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w
*1
to use the system.
■ Phone settings screen
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Phone.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-
compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving.
Disconnect a paired phone
from the system.
Bluetooth Device List
(Existing entry list)
Disconnect
Delete
Delete a paired phone.
Add Bluetooth Device
Pair a new phone to the system.
Phone
Connect a paired device to
the system.
Connect
Connect
Connect
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 378 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
379
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
Manual Input
New Entry
Import from Call History
Import from Phonebook
Edit
Delete
(Existing entry list)
Edit Speed Dial
Delete All
Enter a phone number to store as a speed
dial number.
Select a phone number from the call history
to store as a speed dial number.
Delete all of the previously stored speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the phonebook
to store as a speed dial number.
Edit a previously stored speed dial number.
●
Change a name.
●
Change a number.
●
Create or delete a voice tag.
Delete a previously stored speed dial number.
Ring Tone
Select the ring tone.
Automatic Phone Sync
Set phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
Turn HondaLink Assist on and off.
HondaLink Assist
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 379 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
380
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
Select Account
Enable Text/Email
Text/Email
New Message Notification
Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL
receives a new text/e-mail message.
Turn the text/e-mail message function on and off.
Select a mail or text message account.
Default
Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone settings group as default.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 380 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
381
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ Phone menu screen
1. Select .
2. Select Phone.
3. Select .
Display the last outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
Select a phone number from the call history to
store as a speed dial number.
Call History
Speed Dial
All
Manual Input
Dialed
Received
Display the last outgoing calls.
Display the last incoming calls.
New Entry
Import from Call History
Import from Phonebook
Select a phone number from the phonebook
to store as a speed dial number.
Enter a phone number to store as a speed
dial number.
Missed
Display the last missed calls.
Dial
Redial
Enter a phone number to dial.
Redial the last number dialed.
(Existing entry list) Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.
Phonebook
Display the paired phone’s phonebook.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 381 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
382
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
See the previous message.
Text/Email
Read/Stop
(Existing a message list)
See the next message.
System reads received message aloud, or
stop message from being read.
Select Account
Select a mail or text message account.
Reply to a received message using one of six
fixed phrases.
Call
Make a call to the sender.
Reply
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 382 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
383
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system)
1. Select Phone.
2. Select Yes.
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then select Continue.
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device.
4. Select your phone when it appears on the
list.
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone Not Found and search for
Bluetooth® devices using your phone.
From your phone, search for
HandsFreeLink.
5. The system gives you a pairing code on the
audio/information touch screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
■
Phone Setup
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
the system before you can make and receive hands-
free calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
• Up to six phones can be paired.
• Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to the system.
• If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and return to idle.
If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or
Android Auto, pairing of additional Bluetooth-
compatible devices is unavailable and Add
Bluetooth Device is grayed out from the Bluetooth
Device List screen.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 383 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
384
Features
■ To change the currently paired phone
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 378
2. Select Bluetooth Device List.
3. Select a phone to connect.
u HFL disconnects the connected phone
and starts searching for another paired
phone.
4. Select Connect , Connect , or
Connect .
■ To change the pairing code setting
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth/Wi-Fi.
4. Select the Bluetooth tab.
5. Select Edit Pairing Code.
6. Select Random or Fixed.
1To change the currently paired phone
If no other phones are found or paired when trying to
switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the
original phone is connected again.
To pair other phones, select Add Bluetooth Device
from the Bluetooth device list screen.
1To change the pairing code setting
The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the
setting.
To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the
current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you
pair a phone, select Random.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 384 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
385
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ To delete a paired phone
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 378
2. Select Bluetooth Device List.
3. Select a phone you want to delete.
4. Select Delete.
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 385 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
386
Features
■ To turn on or off the text/e-mail
function
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 378
2. Select the Text/Email tab, then Enable
Text/Email.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.
■ To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 378
2. Select the Text/Email tab, then New
Message Notification.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.
■
To Set Up Text Message/E-mail Options
1To Set Up Text Message/E-mail Options
To use the text message/e-mail function, it may be
necessary to set up on your phone.
1To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new message.
Off: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 386 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
387
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 378
2. Select Ring Tone.
3. Select Fixed or Mobile Phone.
■
Ring Tone
1Ring Tone
Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers.
Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the
connected cell phone sounds from the speakers.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 387 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
388
Features
■ When Automatic Phone Sync is set to
On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook and call history are automatically
imported to the system.
■ Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
setting
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 378
2. Select Automatic Phone Sync.
3. Select On or Off.
■
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a name from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to the system.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Home
Mobile
Work
Pager
Fax
Car
Other
Voice
Pref
Blank
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 388 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
389
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 381
2. Select Speed Dial.
3. Select New Entry.
From Import from Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
From Manual Input:
u Input the number manually.
From Import from Phonebook:
u Select a number from the connected cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
4. When the speed dial is successfully stored,
you are asked to create a voice tag for the
number. Select Yes or No.
5. Select Record to store a voice tag for the
speed dial entry.
u Using the button, follow the prompts
to store a voice tag for the speed dial
entry.
■
Speed Dial
1Speed Dial
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to
call the number using the voice tag. Say the voice tag
name.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 389 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
390
Features
■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed
dial number
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 378
2. Select Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
4. Select Voice Tag.
u From the pop-up menu, select Record.
5. Select Record, or use the button and
follow the prompts to complete the voice
tag.
■ To delete a voice tag
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 378
2. Select Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
4. Select Voice Tag.
u From the pop-up menu, select Clear.
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for the system to recognize a longer name.
For example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 390 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
391
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ To edit a speed dial
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 378
2. Select Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
4. Select a setting you want.
■ To delete a speed dial
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 378
2. Select Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Delete.
4. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 391 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
392
Features
Add phonetic modifications or a new voice tag to the phone’s contact name so that
it is easier for HFL to recognize voice commands.
■ To add a new voice tag
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog tab.
5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification.
6. Select the phone you want to add
phonetic modification to.
■
Phonebook Phonetic Modification
1Phonebook Phonetic Modification
You can store up to 20 phonetic modification items.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 392 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
393
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
7. Select New Voice Tag.
8. Select a contact name you want to add to.
u The pop-up menu appears on the
screen.
9. Select Modify.
10. Using Record or the button, follow the
prompts to complete the voice tag.
11. You will receive a confirmation message
on the screen, then select OK.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 393 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
394
Features
■ To modify a voice tag
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog tab.
5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification.
6. Select the phone you want to modify
phonetic modification.
7. Select a contact name you want to
modify.
u The pop-up menu appears on the
screen.
8. Select Modify.
9. Using Record or the button, follow the
prompts to complete the voice tag.
10. You will receive a confirmation message
on the screen, then select OK.
1Phonebook Phonetic Modification
You can only modify or delete contact names for the
currently connected phone.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 394 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
395
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ To delete a modified voice tag
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog tab.
5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification.
6. Select the phone you want to delete
phonetic modification.
7. Select a contact name you want to delete.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
8. Select Delete.
u The selected contact name has been
selected.
9. Select OK.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 395 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
396
Features
■ To delete all modified voice tags
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog tab.
5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification.
6. Select the phone you want to delete
phonetic modification.
u The contact name list appears.
7. Select Delete All.
8. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen, then select Yes.
You can make calls by inputting any phone
number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or
redial.
■
Making a Call
1Making a Call
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from most screens.
Press the button and say the voice tag name.
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
While there is an active connection with Apple
CarPlay or Android Auto, phone calls cannot be
made with Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® and are only
made from Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 396 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
397
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ To make a call using the imported
phonebook
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 381
2. Select Phonebook.
3. Select a name.
u You can also search by letter. Select
Search.
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering name, if multiple numbers exist
select a number.
4. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using a phone number
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 381
2. Select Dial.
3. Select a number.
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering numbers.
4. Select Dial.
u Dialing starts automatically.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 397 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
398
Features
■ To make a call using redial
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 381
2. Select Redial.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using the Call History
Call history is stored by All, Dialed,
Received, and Missed.
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 381
2. Select Call History.
3. Select All, Dialed, Received, or Missed.
4. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using a Speed Dial entry
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 381
2. Select Speed Dial.
3. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using redial
Press and hold the button to redial the last
number dialed.
1To make a call using the Call History
The call history displays the last 20 all, dialed,
received, or missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the
system.)
1To make a call using a Speed Dial entry
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to
call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 389
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from any screen.
Press the button and follow the prompts.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 398 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
399
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
incoming call screen appears.
Press the button to answer the call.
Press the button to decline or end the call.
■
Receiving a Call
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting
Press the button to put the current call on hold to
answer the incoming call.
Press the button again to return to the current
call.
Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do
not want to answer it.
Press the button if you want to hang up the
current call.
You can select the icons on the audio/information
touch screen instead of the and buttons.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 399 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
400
Features
The following options are available during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer: Transfer a call from the system to your phone.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-
driven phone system.
The available options are shown on the lower
half of the audio/information touch screen.
Select the option.
u The mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
■
Options During a Call
1Options During a Call
Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
You can select the icons on the audio/information
touch screen.
Audio/information screen
Mute Icon
Mute Icon
Audio/information touch screen
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 400 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
401
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
HFL can display newly received text or e-mail messages as well as 20 of the most
recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be
read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text message or e-mail.
2. Select Read to listen to the message.
u The text message or e-mail is displayed.
The system automatically starts reading
out the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, select
Stop.
■
Receiving a Text Message/E-mail
1Receiving a Text Message/E-mail
The system does not display any received messages
while you are driving. You can only hear them read
aloud.
The system can only receive massages that are sent a
text (SMS) messages. The message sent using the
data services will not be displayed in the list.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to
20 most recent text messages and e-mails.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text
message/e-mail feature. Only use the text message/e-mail
feature when conditions allow you to do so safely.
When you receive a text message or e-mail for the
first time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are
asked to turn the New Message Notification
setting to On.
2 To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
P. 386
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 401 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
402
Features
If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to
be active and receive notifications.
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 378
2. Select the Text/Email tab, then Select
Account.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select Text Message or an e-mail account
you want.
■
Selecting a Mail Account
1Selecting a Mail Account
You can also select a mail account from the folder list
screen or the message list screen.
You can only receive notifications from one text
message or mail account at a time.
Select
Account
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 402 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
403
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ Displaying text messages
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 381
2. Select Text/Email.
u Select account if necessary.
3. Select a message.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.
■
Displaying Messages
1Displaying Messages
The icon appears next to an unread message.
If you delete a message on the phone, the message is
also deleted in the system. If you send a message
from the system, the message goes to your phone’s
outbox.
To see the previous or next message, select or
on the message screen.
Message List
Text Message
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 403 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
404
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ Displaying e-mails
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 381
2. Select Text/Email.
u Select Select Account if necessary.
3. Select a folder.
4. Select a message.
u The e-mail is displayed. The system
automatically starts reading the message
aloud.
Folder List
Message List
E-mail
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 404 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
405
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ Read or Stop reading a message
1. Go to the text or e-mail message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 403
2. Select Stop to stop reading.
Select Read again to start reading the
message from the beginning.
■ Reply to a message
1. Go to the text or e-mail message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 403
2. Select Reply.
3. Select the reply message.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Send to send the message.
u Complete appears on the screen when
the reply message was successfully sent.
1Reply to a message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
• Talk to you later, I’m driving.
• I’m on my way.
• I’m running late.
• OK
• Yes
• No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 405 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
406
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ Making a call to a sender
1. Go to the text message screen.
2. Select Call.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 406 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
407
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ Automatic collision notification
If your vehicle’s airbags deploy or if the unit
detects that the vehicle is severely impacted,
your vehicle automatically will attempt to
connect to the HondaLink operator. If
connected, information about your vehicle, its
location, and its condition will be sent to the
operator; you also can speak to the operator
when connected.
IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink Assist, owner activation
constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed
to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/
TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink Assist will attempt to notify emergency
services but NEITHER Honda-PRO NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT
SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.
Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink Assist services at any time or for
any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in,
or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental
regulation.
■
In Case of Emergency
1In Case of Emergency
Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the
operator if the battery level is low, the line is
disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular
coverage.
You cannot use this emergency services when:
• You travel outside the HondaLink service coverage
areas.
• There is a problem with the connecting devices,
such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit
itself.
You cannot operate other phone-related functions
using the screen while talking to the operator.
Select Hang Up to terminate the connection to your
vehicle.
1Automatic collision notification
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it
repeatedly tries until it succeeds.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 407 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
408
Features
■ To enable notification
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 378
2. Select the Phone tab, then HondaLink
Assist.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.
1To enable notification
Setting options:
• On: Notification is available.
• Off: Disable the feature.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 408 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
409
Features
Compass
*
When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w
*1
, the compass self-calibrates, and the
compass display appears.
Compass Calibration
If the compass indicates the wrong direction, or the CAL indicator blinks, you need
to manually calibrate the system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
.
2. On the top screen of any audio source,
press and hold for five seconds.
u The display switches to the Compass
settings screen.
3. Select Calibration.
4. Select Calibration Start.
5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two circles.
u The compass starts to show a direction
after the calibration. The CAL indicator
goes off.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Compass
*
Compass operation can be affected under the
following conditions:
• Driving near power lines or stations
• Crossing a bridge
• Passing a large vehicle, or driving near a large
object that can cause a magnetic disturbance
• When accessories such as antennas and roof racks
are mounted by magnets
1Compass Calibration
Calibrate the compass in an open area.
While setting the compass, select to cancel the
setting mode and return to the previous screen.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 409 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
410
uuCompass
*
uCompass Zone Selection
Features
Compass Zone Selection
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w
*1
.
2. On the top screen of any audio source,
press and hold for five seconds.
u The display switches to the Compass
settings screen.
3. Select Zone Adjust.
u The display shows the current zone
number the system is set to.
4. Select the zone number of your area (See
Zone Map).
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Compass Zone Selection
The zone selection is done to compensate the
variation between magnetic north and true north.
If the calibration starts while the audio system is in
use, the display returns to normal after the calibration
is completed.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Zone Map
Guam Island: Zone 8
Puerto Rico: Zone 11
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 410 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
411
Driving
This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.
Before Driving
Driving Preparation .......................... 412
Maximum Load Limit........................ 415
Towing a Trailer
Towing Preparation.......................... 417
Driving Safely with a Trailer .............. 419
Towing Your Vehicle........................ 420
When Driving
Starting the Engine .................. 421, 423
Precautions While Driving................. 428
Automatic Transmission/CVT
*
.......... 429
Shifting.................... 430, 432, 436, 438
ECON Button ................................... 441
Cruise Control ................................. 442
Front Sensor Camera
*
..................... 445
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
....... 447
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
*
...... 460
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
*
.... 464
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA
®
), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System........... 471
LaneWatch
TM
*
.................................. 473
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)... 475
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) -
Required Federal Explanation ......... 477
Braking
Brake System ................................... 479
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 481
Brake Assist System ......................... 482
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
*
..................................... 483
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped ................................ 491
Parking Sensor System
*
................... 492
Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 496
Refueling
Fuel Information .............................. 497
How to Refuel ................................. 498
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy.................. 499
Accessories and Modifications ........ 500
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 411 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
412
Driving
Before Driving
Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.
• Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior
lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice.
u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.
u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components.
• Make sure the hood is securely closed.
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
• Make sure the tires are in good condition.
u Check air pressure, check for damage and excessive wear.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 539
• Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.
u There are blind spots from the inside.
■
Exterior Checks
1Exterior Checks
NOTICE
When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around
the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force
them open, as this can damage the rubber trim
around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid
further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.
You will be unable to insert the key if the water
freezes in the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite
flammable materials left under the hood, causing a
fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended
period, inspect and remove any debris that may have
collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have
fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a
small animal.
Also check under the hood for leftover flammable
materials after you or someone else has performed
maintenance on your vehicle.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 412 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
413
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
Driving
• Store or secure all items on board properly.
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle's
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 415
• Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking.
• Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving.
• If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
• Securely close and lock all doors and the trunk.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 124
• Adjust your seating position properly.
u Adjust the head restraint, too.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 160
2 Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer Head Restraint Positions P. 163
• Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving.
u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 158
2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 157
■
Interior Checks
1Interior Checks
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk or tow a trailer, have the
aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified
technician.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 413 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
414
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
Driving
• Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the
seats.
u They can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
• Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 35
• Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the
vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 68
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 414 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
415
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Continued
Driving
Maximum Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg). See the
Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
1Maximum Load Limit
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue
load.
2 Specifications P. 584, 586
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 584, 586
3
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading
can affect handling and stability
and cause a crash in which you
can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.
Label Example
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 415 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
416
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Driving
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Load Limits Example
Example1
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight
550 lbs
(249 kg)
Example2
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight
100 lbs
(45 kg)
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 416 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
417
Continued
Driving
Towing a Trailer
Towing Preparation
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.
■ Total trailer weight
Maximum allowable weight of the trailer,
cargo, and everything in or on it must not
exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towing loads in
excess of this can seriously affect vehicle
handling and performance and can damage
the engine and drivetrain.
■ Tongue load
The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded
trailer on the hitch should be approximately
10% of the total trailer weight.
• Excessive tongue load reduces front tire
traction and steering control. Too little
tongue load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway.
• To achieve a proper tongue load, start by
loading 60% of the load toward the front
of the trailer and 40% toward the rear.
Readjust the load as needed.
■
Towing Load Limits
1Towing Load Limits
Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale.
If a public scale is not available, add the estimated
weight of your cargo load to the weight of your
trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and the
tongue load.
Break-in Period
Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle's first 600
miles (1,000 km).
Never exceed the gross weight ratings.
Gross weight information
2 Vehicle Specifications P. 584, 586
3
WARNING
Exceeding any load limit or improperly
loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a
crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Check the loading of your vehicle and
trailer carefully before starting to drive.
Total Load
Tongue Load
Tongue Load
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 417 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
418
Driving
Towing equipment varies by the size of your trailer, how much load you are towing,
and where you are towing.
■ Hitches
The hitch must be of an approved type and properly bolted to the underbody.
■ Safety chains
Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the
trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
■ Trailer brakes
There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are
common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet. If you choose electric brakes,
be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to
your vehicle's hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a
potential hazard.
■ Additional towing equipment
Many states and provinces/territories require special outside mirrors when towing a
trailer. Even if mirrors are not required in your locale, you should install special
mirrors if visibility is restricted in any way.
■ Trailer light
Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and
local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the
requirements in the area where you plan to tow.
■
Towing Equipment and Accessories
1Towing Equipment and Accessories
Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and
maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/
territory, and local regulations.
Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other
items are recommended or required for your towing
situation.
The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type
and brand. If a connector is required, it should only
be installed by a qualified technician.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 418 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
419
uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer
Continued
Driving
Driving Safely with a Trailer
• Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition.
• Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits.
2 Towing Load Limits P. 417
• Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer.
• Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while
driving.
• Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly.
• Check the pressures of the trailer tires, including the spare.
• Drive slower than normal.
• Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
• Use the
(D position when towing a trailer on level roads.
• Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal.
• Allow more time and distance for braking.
• Do not brake or turn suddenly.
■
Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer
■
Towing Speeds and Gears
■
Turning and Braking
1Driving Safely with a Trailer
Parking
In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel
chocks at each of the trailer's tires.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 419 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
420
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle
Driving
• Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (Hot) mark, turn off the
climate control system and reduce speed. Pull to the side of the road safely to cool
down the engine if necessary.
• Shift to the
(S position if the transmission shifts frequently.
Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs
to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 582
■
Driving in Hilly Terrain
Automatic transmission models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 420 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
421
Continued
Driving
When Driving
Starting the Engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Check that the shift lever is in
(P, then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in
(N, it is safer to start it in (P.
2. Check that the shift lever is in
(N. Then
depress the brake pedal with your right
foot, and the clutch pedal with your left
foot.
u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed
to start the engine.
Models without smart entry system
1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, climate
control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce
battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently
below -22°F (-30°C) are expected, the coolant
mixture should be changed to a higher concentration
to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
Brake Pedal
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models
Brake Pedal
Clutch Pedal
Manual transmission models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 421 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
422
Driving
3. Turn the ignition switch to START (e
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that
the parking brake indicator has gone off.
2 Parking Brake P. 479
2. Put the shift lever in (D. Select (R when reversing.
3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.
■ Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to one of the forward gears when facing uphill,
or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever to
(D, (S, or (L
*
when facing uphill, or (R when facing
downhill, then release the brake pedal.
1Starting the Engine
Do not hold the key in START
(e for more than 10
seconds.
• If the engine does not start right away, wait for at
least 30 seconds before trying again.
• If the engine starts, but then immediately stops,
wait at least 30 seconds before repeating step 3
while gently depressing the accelerator pedal.
Release the accelerator pedal once the engine
starts.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is
used, the engine's fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 132
■
Starting to Drive
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models
Manual transmission models
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models
1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 422 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
423
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Continued
Driving
Starting the Engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Check that the shift lever is in
(P, then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in
(N, it is safer to start it in (P.
2. Check that the shift lever is in
(N. Then
depress the brake pedal with your right
foot, and the clutch pedal with your left
foot.
u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed
to start the engine.
Models with smart entry system
1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, climate
control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce
battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently
below -22°F (-30°C) are expected, the coolant
mixture should be changed to a higher concentration
to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft.
If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s
fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 132
Brake Pedal
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Brake Pedal
Clutch Pedal
Manual transmission models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 423 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
424
Driving
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.
1. Shift to
(P.
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
• If the shift lever is in
(N, press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
• If the shift lever is in any gear other than
(N, depress the clutch pedal, then press
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
1Starting the Engine
Bring the smart entry remote close to the ENGINE
START/STOP button if the battery in the smart entry
remote is weak.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 566
The engine may not start if the smart entry remote is
subjected to strong radio waves.
Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to
start the engine.
If the engine does not start, wait at least 30 seconds
before trying again.
All models
■
Stopping the Engine
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Manual transmission models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 424 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
425
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving
You can remotely start the engine using the smart entry remote.
■ To start the engine
The engine runs for up to 10 minutes without you starting the vehicle.
To extend the run time for another 10 minutes during the first run, press the
button, then press and hold the button.
u The turn signal lights come back on three times, twice, if a 10-minute
extension request was transmitted successfully.
■
Remote Engine Start
*
1Remote Engine Start
*
If there are buildings and obstacles between your
vehicle and the remote, the range will be reduced.
While the vehicle is moving, the range may be
reduced.
This distance may vary by external electrical
interference.
The engine may not start by the remote engine start if:
• You have disabled a remote engine start setting
using the multi-information display
*
or audio/
information touch screen
*
.
• The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
• The shift lever is in a position other than (P.
• The hood is open, or any door or the trunk is
unlocked.
• You have already used the remote twice to start
the engine.
• Another registered smart entry remote is in the
vehicle.
3
WARNING
Engine exhaust contains toxic carbon
monoxide.
Breathing carbon monoxide can kill you or
cause unconsciousness.
Never use the remote engine starter when
the vehicle is parked in a garage or other
area with limited ventilation.
With the doors locked, press the button,
then press and hold the button.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 425 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
426
Driving
■ To stop the engine
1Remote Engine Start
*
• There is any antenna failure.
• Door is unlocked with the built-in key.
• The engine oil pressure is low.
• The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
• The security system alarm is not set.
The engine may stop while it is running if:
• You do not start the vehicle within 10 minutes of
starting the engine with the button on the
smart entry remote.
• The engine is stopped by using the smart entry
remote.
• Door is unlocked with the built-in key.
• The hood is open.
• The shift lever is in a position other than (P.
• The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
• The engine oil pressure is low.
• The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) comes on if
there is a problem with the emissions control
systems.
While the engine is running, the vehicle will
automatically precondition inside the vehicle.
When it is warm outside:
• The climate control system is activated in
recirculation mode.
When it is cold outside:
• The defroster is activated at a moderately warm
temperature.
• The rear defogger and door mirror heaters
*
are
activated.
Press and hold the button
for one second.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 426 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
427
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving
1. While depressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that
the parking brake indicator has gone off.
2 Parking Brake P. 479
3. Put the shift lever in (D. Select (R when reversing.
4. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.
■ Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to one of the forward gears when facing uphill,
or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever to
(D, (S, or (L when facing uphill, or (R when facing
downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever to
(D or (S when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill,
then release the brake pedal.
■
Starting to Drive
Automatic transmission/CVT models
1Starting to Drive
The engine stops when the shift lever is moved out of
(P before the ENGINE START/STOP button is
pressed. Follow the step 1 when starting to drive.
When the engine was started using the button
*
on
the smart entry remote
When the engine was started using the button
*
on the smart entry remote
When the engine was started in any case
1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.
Manual transmission models
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models
Automatic transmission models
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 427 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
428
uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving
Driving
Precautions While Driving
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or
driveline, or cause electrical component failure.
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
In Rain
■
Other Precautions
1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE
Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the
accelerator pedal. You could damage the
transmission.
If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY
(q
*1
while driving, the engine will shut down and all
steering and brake power assist functions will stop,
making it difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not put the shift lever in
(N, as you will lose
engine braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,
avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so
as to not damage the engine or powertrain.
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).
You should also follow this when the brake pads are
replaced.
NOTICE
If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel on
the full left or right position for a while, the electric
power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system
goes into a protective mode, and limits its
performance. The steering wheel becomes harder
and harder to operate. Once the system cools down,
the EPS system is restored.
Repeated operation under these conditions can
eventually damage the system.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 428 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
429
uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission/CVT
*
Driving
Automatic Transmission/CVT
*
The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases.
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the
transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress
the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.
■
Creeping
■
Kickdown
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 429 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
430
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
■ Shift lever positions
*1:
Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models without paddle shifters
1Shifting
You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0
*1
and remove the key unless the shift lever is in
(P.
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
When shifting positions in extremely low
temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short
delay before the shift position is displayed. Always
confirm you are in the correct shift position before
driving.
Reverse
Used when reversing
Drive
Used for normal driving
Park
Used when parking or starting the engine
Neutral
Used when idling
Release Button
Drive (S)
Used:
●
For better acceleration
●
To increase engine braking
●
When going up or down hills
Low
●
Used to further increase engine braking
●
Used when going up or down hills
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 430 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
431
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
■
Shift Lever Operation
1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE
When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.
If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in
any shift position, there is a problem with the
transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer's red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release
button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.
Press the shift lever release button and shift.
Tachometer’s red zone
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Tachometer’s red zone
Models with multi-information display
Models with information display
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 431 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
432
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
■ Shift lever positions
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models with paddle shifters
1Shifting
You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0
*1
and remove the key unless the shift lever is in
(P.
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
When shifting positions in extremely low
temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short
delay before the shift position is displayed. Always
confirm you are in the correct shift position before
driving.
Reverse
Used when reversing
Drive
Used:
●
For normal driving
●
When temporarily driving in the 7-speed
manual shift mode
Park
Used when parking or starting the engine
Neutral
Used when idling
Release Button
Drive (S)
Used:
●
For better acceleration
●
To increase engine braking
●
When going up or down hills
●
When driving in the 7-speed manual
shift mode
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 432 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
433
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
■
Shift Lever Operation
1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE
When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.
If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in
any shift position, there is a problem with the
transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer's red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release
button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.
Press the shift lever release button and shift.
Tachometer’s red zone
M (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode)
Indicator/Shift Indicator
Models with multi-information display
Models with information display
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Tachometer’s red zone
M (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode)
Indicator/Shift Indicator
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 433 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
434
Driving
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 7th speeds without removing
your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission switches to the 7-speed
manual shift mode when you pull a paddle shifter while driving. This mode is useful
when engine braking is needed.
■ When the shift lever is in (D:
The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode temporarily, and the
number is displayed in the shift indicator.
The 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled automatically if you drive at constant
speed or accelerate, and the number in the shift indicator goes off.
You can cancel this mode by pulling the
(+ paddle shifter for a few seconds.
The 7-speed manual shift mode is especially useful when reducing the vehicle speed
temporarily before making a turn.
■ When the shift lever is in (S:
The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode. The M indicator and the
speed number are displayed in the shift indicator. As the vehicle speed slows down,
the transmission automatically shifts down accordingly. When the vehicle comes to
a stop, it automatically shifts down into 1st.
If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometer’s
red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up.
You can only pull away in 1st speed.
When canceling the 7-speed manual shift mode, move the shift lever from
(S to
(D. When the 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and shift
indicator go off.
■
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode
17-Speed Manual Shift Mode
To improve fuel economy, the transmission may shift
up to a higher speed than the seventh under certain
circumstances. In this case, the number in the shift
indicator remains as 7.
In the 7-speed manual shift mode, the transmission
shifts up or down by operating either paddle shifter
under the following conditions:
Shift Up: The engine speed reaches the lowest
threshold of the higher speed position.
Shift Down: The engine speed reaches the highest
threshold of the lower speed position.
When the engine speed reaches near the
tachometer’s red zone, the transmission shifts up
automatically.
When the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold
of the selected speed position, the transmission shifts
down automatically.
Operating the paddle shifters on slippery surfaces
may cause the tires to lock up. In this case, the 7-
speed manual shift mode is canceled and goes back
to the normal D driving mode.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 434 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
435
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
■
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation
17-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation
Each paddle shift operation makes a single speed
change.
To change continuously, release the paddle shifter
before pulling it again for the next speed.
Recommended Shift Points
Use this table as a guideline for efficient fuel
economy and effective emission control.
The shift indicator blinks when you cannot shift up or
down. It indicates that your vehicle speed is not in its
allowable shifting range.
Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift
down while the indicator is blinking.
Shift Up Normal Acceleration
1 to 2 15 mph (24 km/h)
2 to 3 25 mph (40 km/h)
3 to 4 40 mph (64 km/h)
4 to 5 45 mph (72 km/h)
5 to 6 50 mph (80 km/h)
6 to 7 55 mph (89 km/h)
(- Paddle Shifter
(Shift down)
(+ Paddle Shifter
(Shift up)
Downshifting when pulling
the
(- paddle shifter
(Changes to lower speed
number)
Upshifting when pulling
the (+ paddle shifter
(Changes to higher speed
number)
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 435 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
436
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
■ Shift lever positions
Automatic transmission models
1Shifting
You cannot change the power mode from ON to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) unless the shift lever is in
(P.
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
When shifting gears in extremely low temperatures
(-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short delay before the
shift is indicated in the display. Always confirm you
are in the correct gear before driving.
Reverse
Used when reversing
Drive
Used for normal driving (gears change
between 1st and 6th automatically)
Park
Used when parking or starting the engine
Neutral
Used when idling
Release Button
Drive (S)
●
Automatically changing gears between
1st and 5th (5th gear is used only at
high speed)
●
Used when towing a trailer in hilly
terrain
●
Used to increase engine braking
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 436 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
437
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
■
Shift Lever Operation
1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE
When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.
If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in
any shift position, there is a problem with the
transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.
Tachometer's red zone
Shift Lever Position
Indicator
Models with information display
Models with multi-information display
Depress the brake pedal and press the
shift lever release button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever
release button.
Press the shift lever release button
and shift.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 437 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
438
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
Shifting
Fully depress the clutch pedal to operate the shift lever and change gears, then
slowly release the pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal, and pause for a few seconds before shifting into
(R, or
shift into one of the forward gears for a moment. This stops the gears so they do not
“grind.”
■
Shift Lever Operation
Manual transmission models
1Shifting
NOTICE
Do not shift to (R before the vehicle comes to a
complete stop.
Shifting to
(R before stopping can damage the
transmission.
NOTICE
Before downshifting, make sure the engine will not
go into the tachometer's red zone. Should this occur,
it can severely damage your engine.
There is a metallic part on the shift lever. If you leave
the vehicle parked outside for a long time on a hot
day, be careful before moving the shift lever. Because
of heat, the shift lever may be extremely hot. If the
outside temperature is low, the shift lever may feel
cold.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 438 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
439
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
When you are not shifting, do not rest your
foot on the clutch pedal. This can cause your
clutch to wear out faster.
1Shifting
Recommended Shift Points
Driving in the highest gear that allows the engine to
run and accelerate smoothly helps to optimize fuel
economy and effective emissions control. The
following shift points are recommended:
If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you
are in, the engine speed will enter into the
tachometer’s red zone. When this happens, you may
experience a slight jolt.
Shift Up Normal Acceleration
1st to 2nd 17 mph (27 km/h)
2nd to 3rd 29 mph (46 km/h)
3rd to 4th 37 mph (60 km/h)
4th to 5th 43 mph (69 km/h)
5th to 6th 49 mph (79 km/h)
Shift Up Normal Acceleration
1st to 2nd 15 mph (24 km/h)
2nd to 3rd 25 mph (40 km/h)
3rd to 4th 40 mph (64 km/h)
4th to 5th 47 mph (76 km/h)
5th to 6th 52 mph (84 km/h)
LX models
Except LX models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 439 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
440
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
The manual transmission has a lockout mechanism that stops you from accidentally
shifting into (R from a forward gear while the vehicle is moving above a certain
speed.
If you cannot shift to
(R when the vehicle is stopped, do the following:
1. Depress the clutch pedal, move the shift
lever all the way to the left, and shift to (R.
2. If you still cannot shift into
(R, apply the
parking brake, and turn the ignition switch
to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0
*1
.
3. Depress the clutch pedal and shift into
(R.
4. Keep depressing the clutch pedal and start
the engine.
Have the vehicle checked by a dealer if you
have to go through this procedure repeatedly.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Reverse Lockout
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 440 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
441
uuWhen DrivinguECON Button
Driving
ECON Button
The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off.
The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the
performance of the engine, transmission, climate control system, and cruise control.
*
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 441 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
442
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
Driving
Cruise Control
Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the
accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a
constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.
1Cruise Control
It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed
when driving uphill or downhill.
When not using cruise control:
Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE
*
/
MAIN
*
button.
While in the ECON mode, it may take relatively more
time to accelerate to maintain the set speed.
When the engine speed slows down, try to
downshift.
You can maintain the set speed if you change gear
within five seconds.
3
WARNING
Improper use of the cruise control can lead
to a crash.
Use the cruise control only when traveling
on open highways in good weather.
Manual transmission models
When to use
■ Shift positions for cruise control:
In
(D or (S
Always keep sufficient distance
between you and the vehicle in
front of you.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
■ Vehicle speed for cruise control:
Desired speed in a range above
roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~
How to use
CRUISE MAIN
*
/CRUISE MODE
*
is on in the instrument panel.
Cruise control is ready to use.
■ Press the CRUISE
*
/
MAIN
*
button on
the steering wheel.
Models without
ACC
Models with ACC
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 442 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
443
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
Continued
Driving
Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired
speed.
The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control
begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.
During cruise control, Straight Driving Assist Function is activated. This control
function is an EPS function and it helps reduce the steering effort to keep the
steering angle on a straight road with cants.
■
To Set the Vehicle Speed
–/SET Button
On when cruise
control begins
Press and release
On
On
Models without
ACC
Models with ACC
Models without adaptive cruise control
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 443 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
444
Driving
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET buttons on the
steering wheel.
• Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you
release it. This speed is then set.
To cancel cruise control, do any of the
following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the CRUISE
*
/MAIN
*
button.
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Depress the clutch pedal for five seconds or
more.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
■
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
You can set the vehicle speed using the –/SET button
on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with
the accelerator and brake pedals.
■
To Cancel
To decrease speed
To increase speed
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed:
After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+
button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
• When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
• When the CRUISE
*
/MAIN
*
button is turned off
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control is canceled automatically.
CRUISE
*
/
MAIN
*
Button
CANCEL
Button
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 444 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
445
uuWhen DrivinguFront Sensor Camera
*
Continued
Driving
Front Sensor Camera
*
The camera, used in systems such as LKAS, RDM, ACC, and CMBS
TM
, is designed to
detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate its functions.
This camera is located behind the rearview
mirror.
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing
system to shut off, when parking, find a shady
area or face the front of the vehicle away from
the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do
not allow it to cover the camera housing.
Covering the camera can concentrate heat on
it.
■
Camera Location and Handling Tips
1Front Sensor Camera
*
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield, the hood, or the front grill that could
obstruct the camera’s field of vision and cause the
system to operate abnormally.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the camera’s field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making
even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision
or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the
camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.
Do not place an object on the top of the instrument
panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent
the system from detecting lane lines properly.
Front Sensor
Camera
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 445 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuWhen DrivinguFront Sensor Camera
*
446
Driving
1Front Sensor Camera
*
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot
Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message
appears:
• Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode
with the airflow directed towards the camera.
• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the camera.
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot
Operate: Clean Front Windshield message
appears:
• Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the
windshield. If the message does not disappear after
you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a
while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 446 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
447
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Continued
Driving
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the
accelerator.
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Important Reminder
As with any system, there are limits to ACC. Use the
brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a
safe distance between your vehicle and other
vehicles.
Be careful not to have the radar sensor cover strongly
impacted.
3
WARNING
Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash.
Use ACC only when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
3
WARNING
ACC has limited braking capability.
When your vehicle speed drops below
22 mph (35 km/h), ACC will
automatically cancel and no longer will
apply your vehicle’s brakes.
Always be prepared to apply the brake
pedal when conditions require.
When to use
■ Vehicle speed for adaptive cruise control: Desired speed in a range above
roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~
■ Shift position for ACC: In (D or (S.
The radar sensor is
at the lower part of
the front bumper.
The camera is
located behind
the rearview
mirror.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 447 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
448
Driving
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
When the MAIN button is pressed, ACC and Lane
Keeping Assist System (LKAS) are both turned on or
off.
ACC may not work properly under certain conditions.
2 ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 452
When not using ACC: Turn off adaptive cruise by
pressing the MAIN button. This also will turn off the
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).
Do not use ACC under the following conditions:
• On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in
continuous stop and go traffic.
• On roads with sharp turns.
• On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set
vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such
cases, ACC will not apply the brakes to maintain
the set speed.
• On roads with toll collection facilities or other
objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking
areas, or facilities with drive through access.
How to use
■Press the MAIN button on
the steering wheel.
ACC is on in the multi-
information display.
ACC is ready to use.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 448 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
449
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Driving
Take your foot off the pedal and press down the –/SET button when you reach the
desired speed. The moment you release the button, the set speed is fixed, and ACC
begins.
When ACC starts operating, the vehicle icon,
distance bars and set speed appear on the
multi-information display.
■
To Set the Vehicle Speed
1To Set the Vehicle Speed
You can switch the displayed set speed
measurements on the multi-information display
between mph and km/h.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 298, 316
On when ACC
begins
Press and release
−/SET Button
Set Vehicle Speed
Set Vehicle Distance
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 449 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
450
Driving
■ There is a vehicle ahead
ACC monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC range. If a vehicle is detected
doing so, the ACC system maintains or decelerates your vehicle’s set speed in order
to keep the vehicle’s set following-distance from the vehicle ahead.
2 To Set or Change Following-Distance P. 455
When a vehicle whose speed is slower than
your set speed comes in or cuts in front of you
and is detected by the radar, your vehicle
starts to slow down.
■
When in Operation
1When in Operation
If the vehicle detected ahead of you slows down
abruptly, or if another vehicle is detected cutting in
front of you, the beeper sounds and a message
appears on the multi-information display.
Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate
distance from the vehicle ahead.
Even if the distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC may start
accelerating your vehicle under the following
circumstances:
• The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the
same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
• A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster
than your vehicle, gradually increasing the distance
between the vehicles.
You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle
detected in front of you comes in and goes out of the
ACC detecting range. Change the ACC Forward
Vehicle Detect Beep setting.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 298, 316
Beep
ACC Range: 394 ft. (120 m)
A vehicle icon appears on the
multi-information display.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 450 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
451
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Driving
■ There is no vehicle ahead
Your vehicle maintains the set speed without
having to keep your foot on the brake or
accelerator pedal.
If there previously was a vehicle detected
ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at
the set speed, ACC accelerates your vehicle to
the set speed, and then maintains it.
■ When you depress the accelerator pedal
You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed.
ACC stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the
system resumes the set speed or a sufficient speed to keep the following-distance.
A vehicle icon with dotted-line
contour appears on the multi-
information display.
1When you depress the accelerator pedal
While the accelerator pedal is depressed, the system
does not apply the brakes to keep the following-
distance, as well as the BRAKE message on the multi-
information display does not appear.
2 When in Operation P. 450
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 451 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
452
Driving
The system may automatically shut off and the ACC indicator will come on under
certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other
conditions may reduce some of the ACC functions.
2 Front Sensor Camera
*
P. 445
■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
■ Vehicle conditions
• The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (Wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• The parking brake is applied.
• When the radar sensor cover is dirty.
• When the front of the vehicle tilts up due to heavy cargo in the trunk or rear seats.
• When tire chains are installed.
■
ACC Conditions and Limitations
1ACC Conditions and Limitations
The radar sensor for ACC is shared with the collision
mitigation braking system
TM
(CMBS
TM
).
2 Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
*
P. 483
Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or
replace the radar sensor cover.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any
unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning
message appears too frequently).
If the front of the vehicle is impacted in any of the
following situations, the radar sensor may not work
properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:
• The vehicle mounted onto a bump, curb, chock,
embankment, etc.
• You drive the vehicle where the water is deep.
• Your vehicle has a frontal collision.
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera
*
P. 445
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 452 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
453
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Continued
Driving
■ Detection limitations
• A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you.
• The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is
too short.
• A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
• When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you
at high speed.
• The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small
vehicle.
• When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
• When you drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult
for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you.
• The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of
you is significantly large.
• An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
• Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
• When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
• When the vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly.
• When the vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape.
• When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 453 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
454
Driving
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET buttons on the
steering wheel.
• Each time you press the switch up or down, the vehicle speed is increased or
decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
• If you keep the switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed increases or
decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
■
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower
than your increased set speed, ACC may not
accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set
following-distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead.
To increase speed
To decrease speed
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 454 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
455
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Continued
Driving
Press the (distance) button to change the
ACC following-distance.
Each time you press the button, the following-
distance (the interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of you) setting cycles through
extra long, long, middle, and short following-
distances.
Determine the most appropriate following-
distance setting based on your specific driving
conditions. Be sure to adhere to any
following-distance requirements set by local
regulation.
■
To Set or Change Following-Distance
Distance Button
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 455 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
456
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Driving
The higher your vehicle’s following-speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or
extra long following-distance becomes. See the following examples for your
reference.
Vehicle Distance
When the Set Speed is:
50 mph (80 km/h) 65 mph (104 km/h)
Short
84 feet
26 meters
1.1 sec
102 feet
31 meters
1.1 sec
Middle
111 feet
34 meters
1.5 sec
139 feet
43 meters
1.5 sec
Long
155 feet
48 meters
2.1 sec
202 feet
62 meters
2.1 sec
Extra
Long
215 feet
66 meters
3.0 sec
285 feet
87 meters
3.0 sec
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 456 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
457
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Driving
To cancel ACC, do any of the following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the MAIN button.
u The ACC indicator (white) goes off.
• Depress the brake pedal.
■
To Cancel
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed: After you have
canceled ACC, you can resume the prior set speed
while it is still displayed. Press the RES/+ button
when driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more.
The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC
has been turned off using the MAIN button. Press
the MAIN button to activate the system, then set the
desired speed.
CANCEL
Button
MAIN
Button
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 457 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
458
Driving
■ Automatic cancellation
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the multi-information display when
ACC is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC to
automatically cancel:
• Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
• When the radar sensor at the lower part of the front bumper gets dirty.
• The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.
• An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.
• Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods.
• Abrupt steering wheel movement.
• When the ABS, VSA® or CMBS
TM
is activated.
• When the ABS or VSA® system indicator comes on.
• When you manually apply the parking brake.
• When the detected vehicle within the ACC range is too close to your vehicle.
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
1Automatic cancellation
Even though ACC has been automatically canceled,
you can still resume the prior set speed. Wait until the
condition that caused ACC to cancel improves, then
press the RES/+ button.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 458 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
459
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Driving
Press and hold the (distance) button for one second.
Cruise Mode Selected appears on the multi-information display for two seconds,
and then the mode switches to Cruise.
To switch back to ACC, press and hold the button again for one second.
■
To Switch ACC to Cruise Control
1To Switch ACC to Cruise Control
Always be aware which mode you are in. When you
are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist
you to maintain a following-distance from a vehicle
ahead of you.
ACC ON
Cruise
Control ON
Distance Button
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 459 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
460
uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
*
Driving
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
*
Alerts and helps to assist you when the system determines a possibility of your
vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings.
The front camera behind the rearview mirror
monitors left and right lane markings (in white
or yellow). If your vehicle is getting too close
to detected lane markings without a turn
signal activated, the system, in addition to a
visual alert, applies steering torque and alerts
you with rapid vibrations on the steering
wheel, to help you remain within the detected
lane.
As a visual alert, the Lane Departure
message appears on the multi-information
display.
If the system determines that its steering input
is insufficient to keep your vehicle on the
roadway, it may apply braking.
u Braking is applied only when the lane
markings are solid continuous lines.
The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid
crossing over detected lane markings.
If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system
beeps to alert you.
■
How the System Works
1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
*
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, the RDM system has
limitations.
Over-reliance on the RDM system may result in a
collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the
vehicle within your driving lane.
The RDM system only alerts you when lane drift is
detected without a turn signal in use. The RDM
system may not detect all lane markings or lane or
roadway departures; accuracy will vary based on
weather, speed and lane marker condition. It is
always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera
*
P. 445
The RDM system may not work properly or may work
improperly under the certain conditions:
2 RDM Conditions and Limitations P. 462
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 460 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
461
uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
*
Driving
The system becomes ready to start searching for lane markings when all the
following conditions are met:
• The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
• The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.
• The wipers are not in continuous operation.
• The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating,
braking or steering.
Press the RDM button to turn the system on
and off.
u The indicator in the button comes on and
the message appears on the multi-
information display when the system is
on.
■
How the System Activates
■
RDM On and Off
1How the System Activates
The RDM system may automatically shut off and the
indicator comes and stays on.
2 Indicators P. 68
RDM system function can be impacted when the
vehicle is:
• Not driven within a traffic lane.
• Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of
a lane.
• Driven in a narrow lane.
1RDM On and Off
When you have selected Warning Only from the
customized options using the multi-information
display, the system does not operate the steering
wheel and braking.
RDM Button
Indicator
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 461 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
462
uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
*
Driving
The system may not properly detect lane markings and the position of your vehicle
under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.
■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
• There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
• Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
• Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.
• Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
■
RDM Conditions and Limitations
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 462 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
463
uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
*
Driving
■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings.
• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection
or crosswalk).
• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
• The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
lines (or yellow lines).
• Driving on roads with double lines.
■ Vehicle conditions
• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
• When tire chains are installed.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 463 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
464
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
*
Driving
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
*
Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and
provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
*
Important Safety Reminders
The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not a
substitute for your vehicle control. The system does
not work if you take your hands off the steering
wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.
2 Multi-Information Display Warning and
Information Messages
*
P. 93
Do not place objects on the instrument panel.
Objects may reflect on the windshield and prevent
correct detection of the traffic lanes.
The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected
without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect
all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will
vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker
condition.
It is always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.
The LKAS is convenient when it is used on freeways.
The LKAS may not work properly or may work
improperly under the certain conditions:
2 LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 469
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera
*
P. 445
When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and
resumes after the signals are off.
() If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS
alerts activate, and torque is applied to the steering.
■ LKAS camera
Monitors the lane
lines.
■Tactile and visual alerts
Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel
and a warning display alert you that the
vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.
■Steering input assist
The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left and
right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets closer to
either of the lane lines.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 464 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
465
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
*
Driving
Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle
nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become
stronger.
When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering
wheel vibration as well as a warning display.
■
Lane Keep Support Function
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
*
The LKAS may not function as designed on while
driving in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads
with sharp curves.
When it fails to detect lanes, the system will
temporarily be canceled. When lane is detected,
system will recover automatically.
■
Lane Departure Warning Function
Warning Area
Warning Area
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 465 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
*
466
Driving
The system can be used when the following conditions are met.
• The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and
your vehicle is in the center of the lane.
• The vehicle speed is between 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
• You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.
• The wipers are not in continuous operation.
■ How to activate the system
1. Press the MAIN button.
u The LKAS is on in the multi-information
display.
The system is ready to use.
2. Press the LKAS button.
u Lane outlines appear on the multi-
information display.
The system is activated.
■
When the System can be Used
1When the System can be Used
If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line
due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS
and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
MAIN Button
LKAS Button
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 466 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
467
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
*
Driving
3. Keep your vehicle near the center of the
lane while driving.
u The dotted outer lines change to solid
ones once the system starts operating
after detecting the left and right lane
markings.
To cancel the LKAS:
Press the MAIN or LKAS button.
The LKAS is turned off every time you stop the
engine, even if you turned it on the last time
you drove the vehicle.
■
To cancel
1When the System can be Used
The LKAS temporarily deactivates when it fails to
detect lane lines. When the system detects the lines
again, it comes back on automatically.
1To cancel
Pressing the MAIN button also turns ACC on and off.
MAIN Button
LKAS Button
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 467 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
468
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
*
Driving
■ The system operation is suspended if
you:
• Set the wipers to continuous operation.
u Turning the wipers off resumes the
LKAS.
• Set the wiper switch to AUTO and the
wipers operate continuously.
u The LKAS resumes when the wipers stop
or operate intermittently.
• Decrease the vehicle speed to about 40
mph (64 km/h) or less.
u Increasing the vehicle speed to about 45
mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the
LKAS.
• Depress the brake pedal.
u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting
the lane lines again once you release the
brake pedal.
■ The LKAS may automatically be suspended when:
• The system fails to detect lane lines.
• The steering wheel is quickly turned.
• You fail to steer the vehicle.
• The vehicle runs on a curved road over the speed limit.
• Driving through a sharp curve.
• Driving at a speed in excess of approximately 90 mph (145 km/h).
Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.
When the LKAS is suspended,
the lane lines on the multi-
information display change to
contour lines, and the beeper
sounds.
Models with automatic intermittent wipers
All models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 468 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
469
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
*
Continued
Driving
■ The LKAS may automatically be canceled when:
• The camera temperature gets extremely high or low.
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
• The ABS or VSA system engages.
The beeper sounds if the LKAS is automatically canceled.
The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in
the middle of a lane under certain conditions, including the following:
■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
• There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
• Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
• Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.
• Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
■
LKAS Conditions and Limitations
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 469 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
470
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
*
Driving
■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings.
• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection
or crosswalk).
• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
• The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
lines (or yellow lines).
• Driving on roads with double lines.
■ Vehicle conditions
• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 470 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
471
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Continued
Driving
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System
Helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than
what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does
so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the
engine does not respond to the accelerator.
You may also notice some noise from the
hydraulic system. You will also see the
indicator blink.
■
VSA® Operation
1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
VSA® may not function properly if tire type and size
are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type
of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA® indicator comes on and stays on
while driving, there may be a problem with the
system. While this may not interfere with normal
driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations
and does not control the entire braking system. You
still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate
for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA® system is generally
known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The
system also includes a traction control function.
VSA® System
Indicator
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 471 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
472
Driving
This button is on the driver side control panel.
To partially turn the VSA features on and off,
press and hold it until you hear a beep.
The traction control stops fully functioning,
allows the wheels to spin more freely at low
speed. The VSA® OFF indicator will also come
on.
To turn it on again, press the (VSA® OFF)
button until you hear a beep.
VSA® is turned on every time you start the
engine, even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.
■
VSA® OFF Button
1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
With the button pressed, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability, but VSA®
traction and stability enhancement becomes less
effective.
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets
stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.
When the button is pressed, the traction control
function becomes less effective. This allows for the
wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should
only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA® off if
you are not able to free it when the VSA® is on.
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA® system switched off.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.
VSA® OFF Indicator
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 472 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
473
uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatch
TM
*
Continued
Driving
LaneWatch
TM
*
Is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear areas
displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to the
passenger’s side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these areas
and allows you to check for vehicles, in addition to your visual check and use of the
passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience while
driving.
1LaneWatch
TM
*
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has
limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in
a collision.
The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather,
lighting (including headlights and low sun angle),
ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading.
The LaneWatch may not provide the intended display
of traffic to the side and rear under the following
conditions:
• Your vehicle’s suspension has been altered,
changing the height of the vehicle.
• Your tires are over or under inflated.
• Your tires or wheels are of varied size or construction.
3
WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
change lanes before doing so may result in
a crash and serious injury or death.
Do not rely only on LaneWatch while
driving.
Always look in your mirrors, to either side
of your vehicle, and behind you for other
vehicles before changing lanes.
1 2
Camera
Audio/Information Screen
Move the turn signal
lever to the passenger
side.
Press the LaneWatch
button.
Pull the turn signal
lever back.
Press the LaneWatch
button again.
The passenger side view
display appears on the
audio/information screen.
The system activates when you:
The system deactivates when you:
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 473 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatch
TM
*
474
Driving
■ Customizing the LaneWatch settings
You can customize the following items using the audio/information touch screen.
• Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when
you operate the turn signal light lever.
• Reference Lines: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the LaneWatch
monitor.
• Display Time after Turn Off: Changes the remaining LaneWatch display time
after you pull the turn signal lever back.
• Display: Adjusts display settings.
2 Customized Features P. 316
■ Reference Lines
Three lines that appear on the screen can give
an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on
the screen are from your vehicle, respectively.
If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates
that it is close to your vehicle whereas an
object near line 3 farther away.
1LaneWatch
TM
*
The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique
lens makes objects on the screen look slightly
different from what they are.
LaneWatch display does not come on when the shift
lever is in
(R.
For proper LaneWatch operation:
• The camera is located in the passenger side door
mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera
lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft,
moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.
• Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers
of any kind.
• Do not touch the camera lens.
2
3
1
1Reference Lines
The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close to
your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually confirm
the safety of a lane change before changing lanes.
The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and
3 on the screen vary depending on road conditions
and vehicle loading. For example, the reference lines
on the screen may seem to appear closer than the
actual distances when the rear of your vehicle is more
heavily loaded.
Consult a dealer if:
• The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is
severely impacted, resulting in changing the
camera angle.
• The LaneWatch display does not come on at all.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 474 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
475
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Continued
Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle
monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each
wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are
significantly under-inflated. This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to
come on and a message to appear on the multi-information display
*
.
You must start TPMS calibration every time you:
• Adjust the pressure in one or more tires.
• Rotate the tires.
• Replace one or more tires.
Before calibrating the TPMS:
• Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.
2 Checking Tires P. 539
Make sure:
• The vehicle is at a complete stop.
• The shift lever is in
(N.
• The shift lever is in
(P.
• The ignition switch is in ON
(w
*1
.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
TPMS Calibration
1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The system does not monitor the tires when driving
at low speed.
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and
altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can
trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
• Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
• Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather.
The low tire pressure indicator will not come on as a
result of over inflation.
The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 539
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
with a delay or may not come on at all when:
• You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the
steering wheel.
• You drive on snowy or slippery roads.
• Snow chains are used.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
under the following conditions:
• A compact spare tire is used.
• There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires,
such as when towing a trailer, than the condition at
calibration.
• Snow chains are used.
Manual transmission models
Automatic transmission/CVT models
All models
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 475 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
476
Driving
Press and hold the TPMS button until the low
tire pressure/TPMS indicator blinks twice,
indicating the calibration process has begun.
• If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator does
not blink, confirm the above conditions
then press and hold the TPMS button again.
• The calibration process finishes
automatically.
You can calibrate the system from the customized
features on the multi-information display.
1. Press the / button to select Vehicle
Settings, then press the SEL/RESET button.
u TPMS Calibration appears on the display.
2. Press the SEL/RESET button.
u The display switches to the
customization setup screen, where you
can select Cancel or Calibrate.
3. Press the / button and select
Calibrate, then press the SEL/RESET button.
u Calibration Started screen appears,
then the display returns to the
customization menu screen.
• If the Calibration Failed to Start message
appears, repeat steps 2-3.
• The calibration process finishes automatically.
1TPMS Calibration
• TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire is
installed.
• The calibration process requires approximately 30
minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between
30-60 mph (48-97 km/h).
• During this period, if the ignition is turned on and
the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you
may notice the low tire pressure indicator comes on
briefly. This is normal and indicates that the
calibration process is not yet complete.
You can calibrate the system using the audio/
information screen
*
or audio/information touch
screen
*
.
2 Customized Features P. 298, 316
If the snow chains are installed, remove them before
calibrating the TPMS.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even
when the properly inflated specified regular tires are
installed, have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
We recommend that the tires be replaced with the
same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a
dealer for details.
TPMS
Button
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
Models with information display
Models with multi-information display
4
4
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 476 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
477
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Continued
Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required
Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability.
U.S. models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 477 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
478
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Driving
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 478 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
479
Continued
Driving
Braking
Brake System
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking.
To apply:
Pull the lever fully up without pressing the
release button.
To release:
1. Pull the lever slightly, and press and hold
the release button.
2. Lower the lever down all the way, then
release the button.
■
Parking Brake
1Parking Brake
NOTICE
Release the parking brake fully before driving. The
rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive
with the parking brake applied.
If you start driving without fully releasing the parking
brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning, and Release
Parking Brake appears on the multi-information
display
*
.
Always apply the parking brake when parking.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 479 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBrakinguBrake System
480
Driving
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist
helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases
the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency
situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when
braking very hard.
2 Brake Assist System P. 482
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 481
■
Foot Brake
1Foot Brake
Check the brakes after driving through deep water,
or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If
necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the
pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when
applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear
indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates
that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an
occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply
the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by
high frequency vibration of the brake pads against
the rotating brake disc.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a
long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake
effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a
lower gear. With manual transmission use a lower
gear for greater engine braking.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause
them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad
life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 480 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
481
uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Driving
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by
pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
“stomp and steer.”
■ ABS operation
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the
pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very
hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately
if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.
■
ABS
1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
NOTICE
The ABS may not function correctly if you use an
incorrect tire type and size.
When the ABS indicator comes on while driving,
there may be a problem with the system.
While normal braking is not affected, there is a
possibility of the ABS not operating. Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes
to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control
during hard braking.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS:
• When driving on rough road surfaces, including
when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow.
• When snow chains are installed.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 481 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
482
uuBrakinguBrake Assist System
Driving
Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.
■ Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise
may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.
■
Brake Assist System
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 482 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
483
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
*
Continued
Driving
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
*
Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a
pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBS
TM
is designed to alert you when a
potential collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help
minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.
■ How the system works
1Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
*
Important Safety Reminder
The CMBS
TM
is designed to reduce the severity of an
unavoidable collision. It does not prevent collision nor
stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your
responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering
wheel appropriately according to the driving
conditions.
The CMBS
TM
may not activate or may not detect a
vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain
conditions:
2 CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations P. 487
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera
*
P. 445
Be careful not to have the radar sensor cover strongly
impacted.
1How the system works
Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel alert you
when your vehicle speed is between 19 and 62 mph
(30 and 100 km/h) with an oncoming vehicle
detected in front of you.
When the CMBS
TM
activates, it may automatically
apply the brake. It will be canceled when your vehicle
stops or a potential collision is not determined.
The radar sensor is
at the lower part of
the front bumper.
The camera is
located behind
the rearview
mirror.
The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about 3
mph (5 km/h) and there is a vehicle in front of you.
When to use
The CMBS
TM
activates when:
●
The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian detected
in front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a
collision.
●
Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and there is a chance of a
collision with an oncoming detected vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 483 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
*
484
Driving
■ When the system activates
At system’s earliest collision alert stage, you can change the distance (Long/
Normal/Short) between vehicles at which alerts will come on through multi-
information display setting options.
2 List of customizable options P. 106
■ Vibration alert on the steering wheel
When a potential collision to an oncoming detected vehicle is determined, the
system alerts you with rapid vibration on the steering wheel, in addition to visual and
audible alerts.
u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, operate the
steering wheel, etc.).
1When the system activates
The camera in the CMBS
TM
is also designed to detect
pedestrians.
However, this pedestrian detection feature may not
activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of
your vehicle under certain conditions.
Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection
limitations from the list.
2 CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations P. 487
The head-up warning uses a lens located at the front
end of the dashboard.
Do not cover the lens or spill any liquid on it.
Lens
The system provides visual, audible and tactile alerts of a possible collision, and
stops if the collision is avoided.
u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change
lanes, etc.)
Beep
Head-up
Warning
Lights
Visual Alerts
Audible Alert
Tactile Alert
1Vibration alert on the steering wheel
Vibration alert function is disabled when the electric
power steering (EPS) system indicator comes on.
2 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator P. 74
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 484 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
485
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
*
Continued
Driving
The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBS
TM
may not go through all of
the stages before initiating the last stage.
■
Collision Alert Stages
Distance between vehicles
CMBS
TM
The radar sensor
detects a vehicle
Audible & Visual WARNINGS Steering Wheel Braking
Stage
one
There is a risk of a
collision with the
vehicle ahead of you.
When in Long, visual and audible alerts
come on at a longer distance from a
vehicle ahead than in Normal setting,
and in Short, at a shorter distance than
in Normal.
In case of an
oncoming vehicle
detected, rapid
vibration is
provided.
—
Stage
two
The risk of a collision
has increased, time to
respond is reduced.
Visual and audible alerts. —
Lightly
applied
Stage
three
The CMBS
TM
determines that a
collision is
unavoidable.
Forcefully
applied
Your Vehicle
Vehicle
Ahead
Normal
ShortLong
Your
Vehicle
Vehicle
Ahead
Your
Vehicle
Vehicle
Ahead
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 485 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
*
486
Driving
Press this button until the beeper sounds to
switch the system on or off.
When the CMBS
TM
is off:
• The beeper sounds.
• The CMBS
TM
indicator in the instrument
panel comes on.
• A message on the multi-information display
reminds you that the system is off.
The CMBS
TM
is in the previously selected ON or
OFF setting each time you start the engine.
■
CMBS
TM
On and Off
1Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
*
The CMBS
TM
may automatically shut off, and the
CMBS
TM
indicator will come and stay on under certain
conditions:
2 CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations P. 487
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 486 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
487
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
*
Continued
Driving
The system may automatically shut off and the CMBS
TM
indicator will come on under
certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other
conditions may reduce some of the CMBS
TM
functions.
2 Front Sensor Camera
*
P. 445
■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
• There is little contrast between objects and the background.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
• Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians.
• Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
• Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads.
■
CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 487 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
488
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
*
Driving
■ Vehicle conditions
• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• When tire chains are installed.
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• Driving with the parking brake applied.
• When the radar sensor at the lower part of the front bumper gets dirty.
■ Detection limitations
• A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you.
• The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is
too short.
• A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
• When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you
at high speed.
• The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter or other small
vehicle.
• When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
• When you drive on a curved, winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for
the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.
• The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of
you is significantly large.
• An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
• Another vehicle suddenly comes in front of you at an intersection, etc.
• Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
• When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
• When the lead vehicle suddenly slows down.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 488 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
489
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
*
Continued
Driving
• When there is a group of people in front of your vehicle walking together side by
side.
• Surrounding conditions or belongings of the pedestrian alter the pedestrian’s
shape, preventing the system from recognizing that the person is a pedestrian.
• When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about
6.6 feet (2 meters) in height.
• When a pedestrian blends in with the background.
• When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, or when their hands are raised or
they are running.
• When several pedestrians are walking ahead in a group.
• When the camera cannot correctly identify that a pedestrian is present due to an
unusual shape (holding luggage, body position, size).
Limitations applicable to pedestrian detection only
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 489 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
*
490
Driving
The CMBS
TM
may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or
when there is no vehicle ahead. Some examples of this are:
■ When Passing
Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass.
■ At an intersection
Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right turn.
■ On a curve
When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming
vehicle is right in front of you.
■ Through a low bridge at high speed
You drive under a low or narrow bridge at high speed.
■ Speed bumps, road work sites, train tracks, roadside objects, etc.
You drive over speed bumps, steel road plates, etc., or your vehicle approaches train
tracks or roadside objects [such as a traffic sign and guard rail] on a curve or, when
parking, stationary vehicles and walls.
■
With Little Chance of a Collision
1Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
*
For the CMBS
TM
to work properly:
Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.
Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for
cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a
mild detergent.
Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or
replace the radar sensor cover.
If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or
removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly
impacted, turn off the system by pressing the
CMBS
TM
off button and take your vehicle to a dealer.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any
unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning
message appears too frequently).
If the front of the vehicle is impacted in any of the
following situations, the radar sensor may not work
properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:
• The vehicle mounted onto a bump, curb, chock,
embankment, etc.
• You drive the vehicle where the water is deep.
• Your vehicle has a frontal collision.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 490 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
491
Driving
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Move the shift lever from
(D to (P.
3. Move the shift lever to
(R or (1.
4. Turn off the engine.
Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline.
1Parking Your Vehicle
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, oil, or timber.
Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
1When Stopped
NOTICE
The following can damage the transmission:
• Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
• Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
• Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Manual transmission models
All models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 491 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
492
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
Driving
Parking Sensor System
*
The corner and center sensors monitor obstacles around your vehicle, and the
beeper and audio/information screen let you know the approximate distance
between your vehicle and the obstacle.
■ The sensor location and range
1Parking Sensor System
*
Even when the system is on, always confirm if there is
no obstacle near your vehicle before parking.
The system may not work properly when:
• The sensors are covered with snow, ice, mud or
dirt.
• The vehicle is on uneven surface, such as grass,
bumps, or a hill.
• The vehicle has been out in hot or cold weather.
• The system is affected by devices that emit
ultrasonic waves.
• Driving in bad weather.
The system may not sense:
• Thin or low objects.
• Sonic-absorptive materials, such as snow, cotton,
or sponge.
• Objects directly under the bumper.
Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors.
Within about 24 in (60 cm) or less
Front Corner Sensors
Rear Corner Sensors
Within about 43 in (110 cm) or less
Rear Center Sensors
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 492 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
493
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
Driving
■ Parking sensor system on and off
With the power mode in ON, press the
parking sensor system button to turn on or off
the system. The indicator in the button comes
on when the system is on.
The rear center and corner sensors start to
detect an obstacle when the shift lever is in
(R, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
The front corner sensors start to detect an
obstacle when the shift lever is in any position
other than
(P, and the vehicle speed is less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
1Parking Sensor System
*
When you set the power mode to ON, the system will
be in the previously selected condition.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 493 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
494
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
Driving
■ When the distance between your vehicle and obstacles behind becomes shorter
*1:At this stage, only the center sensors detect obstacles.
Length of the
intermittent beep
Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle
Indicator Audio/information screen
Corner Sensors Center Sensors
Moderate —
Rear: About 43-24 in
(110-60 cm)
Blinks in Yellow
*1
Short
About 24-18 in
(60-45 cm)
About 24-18 in
(60-45 cm)
Blinks in Amber
Very short
About 18-14 in
(45-35 cm)
About 18-14 in
(45-35 cm)
Continuous
About 14 in
(35 cm) or less
About 14 in
(35 cm) or less
Blinks in Red
Indicators light where the
sensor detects an obstacle.
Indicators light where the
sensor detects an obstacle.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 494 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
495
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
Driving
1. Make sure that the parking sensor system is not activated. Set the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
2. Press and hold the parking sensor system button, and set the power mode to ON.
3. Keep pressing the button for ten seconds. Release the button when the indicator
in the button blinks.
4. Press the button again. The indicator in the button goes off.
u The beeper sounds twice. The rear sensors are now turned off.
To turn the rear sensors on again, follow the above procedure. The beeper sounds
three times when the rear sensors come back on.
■
Turning off All Rear Sensors
1Turning off All Rear Sensors
When you shift to
(R, the indicator in the parking
sensor system button blinks as a reminder that the
rear sensors have been turned off.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 495 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
496
Driving
Multi-View Rear Camera
About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view. The display
automatically changes to the rear view when the shift lever is moved to (R.
You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display. Press the
selector knob or the interface dial to switch the angle.
If the last used viewing mode is Wide or Normal, the same mode is selected the next
time you shift into (R. If Top View was last used, Wide mode is selected. If you shift
out of
(R in Top View mode, then shift into (R again 10 seconds later, Wide mode
is selected.
■
Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do
not rely on the rearview display which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
your vehicle.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,
use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free
of debris.
You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic
Guideline settings.
2 Customized Features P. 298, 316
Fixed Guideline
On: Guidelines appear when you shift into
(R.
Off: Guidelines do not appear.
Dynamic Guideline
On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel
direction.
Off: Guidelines do not move.
Top Down View Mode
Normal View Mode
Wide View Mode
Guidelines
Bumper
Camera
Approx. 118 inches (3 m)
Approx. 79 inches (2 m)
Approx. 39 inches (1 m)
Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 496 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
497
Driving
Refueling
Fuel Information
■ Fuel recommendation
Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise
that can lead to engine damage.
■ Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help
maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive
manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on
gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit
www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top
tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
■ Fuel tank capacity: 17.2 US gal (65 liters)
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
1Fuel Information
NOTICE
We recommend quality gasoline containing
detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and
engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
good performance, fuel economy, and emissions
control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline
that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is
available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely
affect performance, and cause the malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.
If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such
as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on
oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try
another service station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 497 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
498
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
Driving
How to Refuel
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the
rear.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Push on the fuel fill door release handle at
the foot of the driver’s seat.
u The fuel fill door opens.
4. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a
release of air, wait until this stops, then turn
the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap.
5. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder.
6. Insert the filler nozzle fully.
u When the tank is full, the fuel nozzle will
click off automatically. This leaves space
in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands
with a change in the temperature.
7. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap, tightening
it until you hear it click at least once.
u Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
1How to Refuel
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in
the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result
of changes in air temperature.
If the fuel nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is
not full, there may be a problem with the pump's fuel
vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If
this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
Do not continue to add fuel after the nozzle has
automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed
the full tank capacity.
3
WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
• Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flame away.
• Handle fuel only outdoors.
• Wipe up spills immediately.
Push
Cap
Cap
Holder
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 498 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
499
Driving
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy
Fuel economy depends on several conditions, including driving conditions, your
driving habits, the condition of your vehicle, and loading. Depending on these and
other conditions, you may or may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the
information display
*
/multi-information display
*
.
• Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal.
• Maintain the specified tire pressure.
• Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
• Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.
■
Maintenance and Fuel Economy
1Improving Fuel Economy
Direct calculation is the recommended method to
determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are
established following a simulated test. For more
information on how this test is performed, please visit
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/
Miles driven
Gallons of
fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100 Liter
Kilometers L per 100 km
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 499 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
500
Driving
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following:
• Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions.
• Do not install accessories over areas marked SRS AIRBAG, on the sides or backs
of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows.
Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the
vehicle’s airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags
deploy.
• Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 578
• Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
Modifications
Do not modify your vehicle or use non-Honda components that can affect its
handling, stability, and reliability.
Overall vehicle performance can be affected. Always make sure all equipment is
properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province,
territory, and local regulations.
1Accessories and Modifications
Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to
ensure proper operation on your vehicle.
3
WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can
affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a crash in which
you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's
manual regarding accessories and
modifications.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 500 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
501
Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance ............ 502
Safety When Performing Maintenance..... 503
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance
Service ........................................... 504
Maintenance Minder
TM
..................... 505
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood..... 513
Opening the Hood ........................... 515
Recommended Engine Oil ................ 517
Oil Check......................................... 518
Adding Engine Oil............................ 520
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ..... 521
Engine Coolant................................ 523
Transmission Fluid............................ 525
Brake/Clutch Fluid............................ 527
Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 528
Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 529
Checking and Maintaining Wiper
Blades .......................................... 537
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires ................................. 539
Tire and Loading Information Label...... 540
Tire Labeling .................................... 540
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).......542
Wear Indicators................................ 544
Tire Service Life................................ 544
Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 545
Tire Rotation.................................... 546
Winter Tires ..................................... 547
Battery............................................... 548
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery ........... 549
Climate Control System Maintenance
....551
Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 552
Exterior Care.................................... 554
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 501 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
502
Maintenance
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle
in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient
brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in
effect.)
■ Daily inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when
refueling.
■ Periodic inspections
• Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Brake/Clutch Fluid P. 527
• Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 539
• Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 529
• Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 537
■
Types of Inspection and Maintenance
1Inspection and Maintenance
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and systems may be
done by any automotive repair establishment or
individuals using parts that are “certified” to
EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to
perform maintenance on the maintenance main
items marked with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all maintenance services should
be performed in accordance with the intervals
indicated by the information display
*
/multi-
information display
*
.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 507, 511
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks
that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a
subscription to the Service Express website at
www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 595
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make
sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.
After performing maintenance, update the records in
the separate maintenance booklet.
U.S. models
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 502 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
503
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance
Maintenance
Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here.
However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform
a given task.
• To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
• Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them causing a fire.
• To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not
gasoline.
• Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or
compressed air.
• Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.
u Operate the engine only when there is sufficient ventilation.
• The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the engine is off.
• Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before
touching vehicle parts.
• Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts.
■
Maintenance Safety
■
Vehicle Safety
1Safety When Performing Maintenance
3
WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or
failing to correct a problem before driving
can cause a crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and
maintenance recommendations according
to the schedules in this owner's manual.
3
WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance
instructions and precautions can cause you
to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and
precautions in this owner's manual.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 503 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
504
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
Maintenance
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the
same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 504 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
505
Continued
Maintenance
Maintenance Minder
TM
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages
appear on the information display
*
or the multi-information display
*
every time you
turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
. The messages notify you when to change the
engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance
services.
To Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the
engine oil, appear on the information display.
You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w
*1
.
2. Press the (Select/Reset) knob repeatedly
until the engine oil life appears on the
information display.
The Maintenance Minder indicator ( ) stays
on in the instrument panel after the engine oil
life becomes 0%. Have the indicated
maintenance done by a dealer immediately.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Models with information display
1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.
There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you
can view on the information display.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 507
Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 100 to 91
90 90 to 81
80 80 to 71
70 70 to 61
60 60 to 51
50 50 to 41
40 40 to 31
30 30 to 21
20 20 to 16
15 15 to 11
10 10 to 6
5 5 to 1
0 0
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 505 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
506
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance
To switch the display, press the (Select/Reset) knob.
■
Maintenance Minder Messages on the Information Display
Oil Life Display Explanation Information Maintenance Minder Indicator
The engine oil life indicator starts
to appear along with other due
soon maintenance item codes
when the remaining oil life
becomes 15 percent.
The engine oil is approaching the
end of its service life.
Starts to come on when the
remaining engine oil life becomes
15 percent.
It goes off when the display is
switched.
The SERVICE message also starts
to appear along with the engine oil
life indicator and the maintenance
item codes.
The engine oil has almost reached
the end of its service life, and the
maintenance items should be
inspected and serviced as soon as
possible.
The remaining engine oil life has
passed its service life, and a
negative distance appears after
driving over 10 miles (U.S. models)
or 10 km (Canadian models). The
negative distance on the display
blinks.
The engine oil life has passed.
The maintenance items must be
inspected and serviced
immediately.
Stays on as a reminder even when
the display is switched.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 506 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
507
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Continued
Maintenance
■
Maintenance Service Items
1Maintenance Service Items
• Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
• Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
km).
• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.
Maintenance Minder
Message
Maintenance
Minder Indicator
Sub ItemsMain Item
*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the
engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
CODE Maintenance Main Items
A
●
Replace engine oil
*1
B
●
Replace engine oil
*1
and oil filter
●
Inspect front and rear brakes/service as necessary
●
Check parking brake adjustment
●
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
●
Inspect suspension components
●
Inspect driveshaft boots
●
Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA)
●
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
●
Inspect exhaust system
#
●
Inspect fuel lines and connections
#
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4: Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models
*5: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher transmission
temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the
Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission
fluid changed every 25,000 miles (40,000 km).
*6: 6-cylinder models
*7: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110 °F, 43 °C), in very low temperatures (under -
20 °F, -29 °C), or tow a trailer, replace every 60,000 miles/100,000 km.
CODE Maintenance Sub Items
1
●
Rotate tires
2
●
Replace air cleaner element
*2
●
Replace dust and pollen filter
*3
●
Inspect drive belt
3
●
Replace transmission fluid
*4,*5
4
●
Replace spark plugs
●
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
*6,*7
●
Inspect valve clearance
5
●
Replace engine coolant
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 507 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
508
Maintenance
Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the
maintenance service.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w
*1
.
2. Display the engine oil life by repeatedly
pressing the (Select/Reset) knob.
3. Press and hold the knob for ten seconds
or more.
u The engine oil life indicator and the
maintenance item codes blink.
4. Press the knob for five seconds or more.
u The displayed maintenance items
disappear, and the engine oil life display
returns to 100%.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Resetting the Display
1Resetting the Display
NOTICE
Failure to reset the Maintenance Minder
TM
display
after a maintenance service results in the system
showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can
lead to serious mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the Maintenance Minder
TM
display after completing the required maintenance
service. If someone other than a dealer performs
maintenance service, reset the Maintenance
Minder
TM
display display yourself.
You can reset the Maintenance Minder
TM
display
display using the audio/information screen
*
or audio/
information touch screen
*
.
2 Customized Features P. 298, 316
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 508 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
509
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Continued
Maintenance
To Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the
engine oil, appear on the multi-information display.
You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
.
2. Press the (Information) button repeatedly until the engine oil life appears
on the multi-information display.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Models with multi-information display
1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.
There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you
can view on the information display.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 511
Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 100 to 91
90 90 to 81
80 80 to 71
70 70 to 61
60 60 to 51
50 50 to 41
40 40 to 31
30 30 to 21
20 20 to 16
15 15 to 11
10 10 to 6
5 5 to 1
0 0
Button
Maintenance
Item Codes
Remaining
Engine Oil
Life
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 509 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
510
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance
The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.
■
Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-Information
Display
Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information
Maintenance Due Soon 15 % The remaining engine oil life is 15 to
6 percent. Once you switch the
display by pressing the
(Information) button, this message
will go off.
The engine oil is approaching the end
of its service life, and the maintenance
items should be inspected and serviced
soon.
Maintenance Due Now 5 % The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1
percent. Press the button to
switch to another display.
The engine oil has almost reached the
end of its service life, and the
maintenance items should be inspected
and serviced as soon as possible.
Maintenance Past Due Negative Distance The remaining engine oil life has
passed its service life, and a negative
distance appears after driving over
10 miles (U.S. models) or 10 km
(Canadian models). Press the
button to switch to another
display.
The engine oil life has passed.
The maintenance items must be
inspected and serviced immediately.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 510 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
511
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Continued
Maintenance
■
Maintenance Service Items
1Maintenance Service Items
• Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
• Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
km).
• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.
Maintenance Minder
Message
System Message
Indicator
Sub ItemsMain Item
*1: If a message Service does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the
engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
CODE Maintenance Main Items
A
●
Replace engine oil
*1
B
●
Replace engine oil
*1
and oil filter
●
Inspect front and rear brakes/service as necessary
●
Check parking brake adjustment
●
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
●
Inspect suspension components
●
Inspect driveshaft boots
●
Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA)
●
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
●
Inspect exhaust system
#
●
Inspect fuel lines and connections
#
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4: Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models
*5: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher transmission
temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the
Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission
fluid changed every 25,000 miles (40,000 km).
*6: 6-cylinder models
*7: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110 °F, 43 °C), in very low temperatures (under -
20 °F, -29 °C), or tow a trailer, replace every 60,000 miles/100,000 km.
CODE Maintenance Sub Items
1
●
Rotate tires
2
●
Replace air cleaner element
*2
●
Replace dust and pollen filter
*3
●
Inspect drive belt
3
●
Replace transmission fluid
*4, *5
4
●
Replace spark plugs
●
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
*6, *7
●
Inspect valve clearance
5
●
Replace engine coolant
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 511 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
512
Maintenance
Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the
maintenance service.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
.
2. Press the button to select Vehicle Settings, then press the SEL/RESET
button.
3. Press the button until Maintenance Reset appears on the display.
4. Press the SEL/RESET button.
u The oil life reset mode is displayed on the multi-information display.
5. Select Reset with the button, then press the SEL/RESET button.
u The displayed maintenance items disappear, and the engine oil life display
returns to 100%.
To cancel the oil life reset mode, select Cancel, then press the SEL/RESET button.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Resetting the Display
1Resetting the Display
NOTICE
Failure to reset the Maintenance Minder
TM
display
after a maintenance service results in the system
showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can
lead to serious mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the Maintenance Minder
TM
display after completing the required maintenance
service. If someone other than a dealer performs
maintenance service, reset the Maintenance
Minder
TM
display yourself.
You can reset the Maintenance Minder
TM
display
using the audio/information screen
*
or audio/
information touch screen
*
.
2 Customized Features P. 298, 316
Engine Oil Life
SEL/RESET
Button
Maintenance Item Codes
(Information)
Button
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 512 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
513
Continued
Maintenance
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
4-cylinder models
Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)
Engine Coolant
Reserve Tank
Radiator Cap
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange)
Clutch Fluid
(Light Gray Cap)
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Battery
Manual transmission
models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 513 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
514
uuMaintenance Under the HooduMaintenance Items Under the Hood
Maintenance
6-cylinder models
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange)
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)
Engine Coolant
Reserve Tank
Radiator Cap
Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Battery
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 514 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
515
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
Continued
Maintenance
Opening the Hood
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set
the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
u The hood will pop up slightly.
3. Push up the hood latch lever in the center
of the hood to release the lock mechanism,
and open the hood.
4. Remove the support rod from the clamp
using the grip. Mount the support rod in
the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and
stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the
hood. Remove your hand at a height of
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the
hood close.
1Opening the Hood
NOTICE
Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are
raised.
The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage
either the hood or the wipers.
When closing the hood, check that the hood is
securely latched.
If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can
open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch
mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
Hood Release Handle
Pull
Lever
Support Rod
Grip
Clamp
4-cylinder models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 515 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
516
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
Maintenance
4. Lift the hood up most of the way.
u The hydraulic supports will lift it up the
rest of the way and hold it up.
When closing, lower it to approximately 12
inches (30 cm), then press down firmly with
your hands.
6-cylinder models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 516 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
517
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil
Maintenance
Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your engine's
performance and longevity. If you drive the
vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil,
the engine may fail or be damaged.
This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving
and that it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Use Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another
commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for
the ambient temperature as shown here.
■ Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.
• Genuine Honda Motor Oil
• Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the
container.
1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,
they may adversely affect the engine performance
and durability.
Ambient Temperature
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 517 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
518
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check
Maintenance
Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the
oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange).
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.
1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly
add oil being careful not to overfill.
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 518 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
519
uuMaintenance Under the Hood uOil Check
Maintenance
4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the
level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Upper Mark
Lower Mark
Upper Mark
Lower Mark
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 519 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
520
uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil
Maintenance
Adding Engine Oil
1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
2. Add oil slowly.
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.
1Adding Engine Oil
If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil
may damage the engine compartment components.
NOTICE
Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.
Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and
engine damage.
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Engine Oil Fill Cap
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 520 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
521
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Continued
Maintenance
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the
engine's lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the
information display
*
/multi-information display
*
.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
fill cap.
3. Remove the drain bolt and washer from
the bottom of the engine, and drain the
oil into a suitable container.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE
You may damage the environment if you do not
dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are
changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of
the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take
it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away
into a garbage can or onto the ground.
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Drain Bolt
Washer
Drain Bolt
Washer
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 521 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
522
Maintenance
4. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the
remaining oil.
5. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to
the engine contact surface.
u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
6. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the
contact surface of the engine block, and
install a new oil filter.
u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to
the oil gasket.
7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:
30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
29 lbf∙ft (39 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
8.
Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.4 US qt (4.2 L)
4.5 US qt (4.3 L)
9. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine.
10. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the
drain bolt or oil filter.
11. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes,
and then check the oil level on the dipstick.
u If necessary, add more engine oil.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil
filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the
instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The
low oil pressure indicator should go off within five
seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check
your work.
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Oil Filter
Oil Filter
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 522 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
523
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
Continued
Maintenance
Engine Coolant
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any
straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the
reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the
radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.
1. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve
tank.
2. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark,
add the specified coolant until it reaches
the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
■
Reserve Tank
1Engine Coolant
NOTICE
If temperatures consistently below −22°F (−30°C) are
expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to
a higher concentration. Consult a dealer for more
information.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may
use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result
in corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed
and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your
vehicle’s cooling system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the engine components.
Reserve
Tank
MAX
MIN
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 523 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
524
Maintenance
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise to
relieve any pressure in the cooling system.
Do not push the cap down when turning.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise to remove it.
4. The coolant level should be up to the base
of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it
fully.
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it
reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
■
Radiator
1Radiator
NOTICE
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.
3
WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
Radiator Cap
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 524 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
525
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
Continued
Maintenance
Transmission Fluid
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
■
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
Specified fluid: HCF-2
■
Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)
4-cylinder models with continuously variable transmission (CVT)
1Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
NOTICE
Do not mix HCF-2 with other transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than HCF-2 may
adversely affect the operation and durability of your
vehicle's transmission, and damage the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to HCF-2 is not covered by Honda's
new vehicle warranty.
4-cylinder models with manual transmission
1Manual Transmission Fluid
If Honda MTF is not available, you may use the API
certificated SAE 0 W-20 or 5 W-20 viscosity motor oil
as a temporary measure.
Replace with MTF as soon as possible. Motor oil does
not contain the proper additives for the transmission
and continued use can cause decreased shifting
performance and lead to transmission damage.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 525 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
526
Maintenance
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
■
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid)
6-cylinder models
1Automatic Transmission Fluid
NOTICE
Do not mix Honda ATF DW-1 with other
transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF
DW-1 may adversely affect the operation and
durability of your vehicle's transmission, and damage
the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to Honda ATF DW-1 is not covered
by Honda's new vehicle warranty.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 526 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
527
uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake/Clutch Fluid
Maintenance
Brake/Clutch Fluid
Use the same fluid for both the brakes and clutch.
The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.
The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
■
Checking the Brake Fluid
1Brake/Clutch Fluid
NOTICE
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your
vehicle's braking system and can cause extensive
damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should
use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed
container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion
and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the
brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn
brake pads as soon as possible.
Brake Reservoir
MIN
MAX
■
Checking the Clutch Fluid
Manual transmission models
1Checking the Clutch Fluid
If the clutch fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect for leaks or an excessively worn
clutch plate as soon as possible.
Clutch Reservoir
MIN
MAX
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 527 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
528
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid
Maintenance
Refilling Window Washer Fluid
Check the amount of window washer fluid by looking at the reservoir.
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
If the washer fluid is low, the washer level
indicator comes on.
If the washer fluid is low, a message appears
on the multi-information display.
Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.
1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water
solution in the windshield washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle's paint. A
vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield
washer pump.
Canadian models with information display
Canadian models with multi-information display
All models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 528 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
529
Continued
Maintenance
Replacing Light Bulbs
Headlight Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Unlock the holding clips, then remove the
upper part of the air intake duct and the air
intake tube.
1. Remove the reserve tank.
High beam headlight: LED type
*
High beam headlight: 60 W (HB3 for halogen bulb type)
*
Low beam headlight: LED type
*
Low beam headlight: 55 W (H11 for halogen bulb type)
*
1Headlight Bulbs
NOTICE
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.
Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause
the bulb to overheat and shatter.
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk or tow a trailer, have the
aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified
technician.
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base,
and protect the glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
Models with halogen headlights
All models
Models with halogen headlights
■
High Beam Headlights
1High Beam Headlights
High beam headlights are LED type. Have an
authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light
assembly.
Models with LED headlights
Models with halogen headlights
Tube
Holding Clip
Holding Clips
Driver side
6-cylinder models
Passenger side
All models
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 529 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs
530
Maintenance
2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
3. Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to
remove.
4. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it clockwise.
5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
1High Beam Headlights
Press down the center pin until it clicks to unlock it.
Push the center pin back to lock the clip. Then, insert
the clip into the hole and press on the center pin until
it is flat.
Holding clip
Center pin
Push until
the pin is
flat.
Tab
Coupler
Bulb
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 530 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
531
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Lights
*
Maintenance
1. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
2. Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to
remove.
3. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it clockwise.
4. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
Fog Lights
*
Fog lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the
light assembly.
Parking/Daytime Running Lights
Parking/daytime running lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer
inspect and replace the light assembly.
Front Turn Signal Lights
Front turn signal lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.
■
Low Beam Headlights
1Low Beam Headlights
Low beam headlights are LED type. Have an
authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light
assembly.
Models with LED headlights
Models with halogen headlights
Tab Coupler
Bulb
Models with LED type parking/daytime running lights
Models with LED headlights
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 531 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
532
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Side Marker Light Bulbs
Maintenance
Front Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the
opposite side from the light being replaced.
Passenger side: Turn the steering wheel
to the left.
Driver side: Turn the steering wheel to the
right.
2. Remove the holding clips and screw, and
pull the inner fender back.
3. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it.
4. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Front Side Marker Light: 3 CP
Models with LED headlights
1Front Side Marker Light Bulbs
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center
pin to remove the clip.
Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push
until it is flat.
Center pin
Push until the
pin is flat.
Screw
Holding Clip
Bulb Socket
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 532 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
533
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs
Maintenance
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker/Parking Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Turn the steering wheel and pull the inner fender back in the same way as when
replacing the front side marker light bulbs
*
.
2 Front Side Marker Light Bulbs P. 532
1. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it.
2. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights
*
Door mirror side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect
and replace the light assembly.
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs: 28/8 W (Amber)
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker/Parking Light Bulbs: 28/8 W (Amber)
Models with halogen headlights and LED type parking/daytime running lights
Models with halogen headlights and bulb type parking lights
Models with halogen headlights and LED type parking/daytime running lights
Models with halogen headlights and bulb type parking lights
Bulb
Socket
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 533 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
534
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker/Taillight Bulbs
Maintenance
Brake Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side
Marker/Taillight Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip
screwdriver, then pull the lining back.
2. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it.
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Brake Light: LED
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)
Rear Side Marker/Taillight: LED
Brake Light: 21 W
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)
Rear Side Marker/Taillight: LED
1Brake Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker/Taillight
Bulbs
Brake and rear side marker/taillights are LED type.
Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace
the light assembly.
Rear side marker/taillights are LED type. Have an
authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light
assembly.
When removing the clip, insert a flat-tip screwdriver,
then lift and remove the clip.
Insert the clip with the pin raised, and push until it is flat.
Models with LED type brake lights
Models with bulb type brake lights
All models
Clip
Push until the
pin is flat.
Models with LED type brake lights
Models with bulb type brake lights
Holding Clip
Bulb
Socket
Bulb
*
Socket
*
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 534 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
535
uuReplacing Light BulbsuTaillights and Back-Up Light Bulbs
Maintenance
Taillights and Back-Up Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip
screwdriver, then pull the lining back.
2 Brake Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and
Rear Side Marker/Taillight Bulbs P. 534
2. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it.
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Back-Up Light: 16 W
Taillight: LED
1Taillights and Back-Up Light Bulbs
Taillights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda
dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Holding Clip
Bulb
Socket
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 535 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
536
uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulbs
Maintenance
Rear License Plate Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the license plate light assembly by
pushing the left edge of the lens toward the
right and pulling the assembly out.
2. Remove the lens by pushing the tabs.
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
High-Mount Brake Light
High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.
Rear License Plate Light: 5 W
Bulb
Tab
Lens
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 536 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
537
Continued
Maintenance
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the hard surfaces
of the blade may scratch the window glass.
Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the
passenger side.
2. Press and hold the tab, then slide the blade
from the wiper arm.
1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE
Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the
windshield.
Tab
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 537 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
538
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber
Maintenance
3. Slide the wiper blade out from its holder by
pulling the tabbed end out.
4. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade
that has been removed, and mount to a
new rubber blade.
u Correctly align the rubber protrusion and
the retainer grooves.
5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder
from the bottom end.
u The tab on the holder should fit in the
indent of the wiper blade.
6. Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm,
then push down the lock tab.
7. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,
then the driver side.
Blade
Top
Retainer
Blade
Tab
Indent
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 538 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
539
Maintenance
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
■ Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort.
Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specification’s page for the specified pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and
are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in
all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm
2
) per month.
■ Inspection guidelines
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.
Look for:
• Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
• Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
• Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
• Excessive tread wear.
2 Wear Indicators P. 544
• Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
1Checking Tires
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This
means the vehicle has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If
necessary, add or release air until the specified
pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as
4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm
2
) higher than if
checked when cold.
Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must
calibrate the TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 475
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent
vibration while driving. New tires and any that have
been removed and reinstalled should be properly
balanced.
Check the spare tire pressure once a month or before
long trips.
3
WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or
improperly inflated can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 539 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
540
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
Maintenance
Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading
information.
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle have a
number of markings. Those you should be
aware of are described below.
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.
1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb contains:
a The number of people your vehicle can carry.
b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight.
c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare.
d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.
Label
Example
Example
Tire Size
Tire
Identification
Number (TIN)
Maximum
Tire Load
Maximum
Tire Pressure
Tire Size
■
Tire Sizes
1Tire Sizes
Following is an example of tire size with an
explanation of what each component means.
215/55R17 94V
215: Tire width in millimeters.
55: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a
percentage of its width).
R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
17: Rim diameter in inches.
94: Load index (a numerical code associated with the
maximum load the tire can carry).
V: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the
maximum speed rating).
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 540 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
541
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling
Maintenance
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can
hold.
Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
■
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
■
Glossary of Tire Terminology
1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year
Week
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 541 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
542
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Maintenance
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety
Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction,
and temperature performance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these
gradings.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
■
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
■
Treadwear
1Uniform Tire Quality Grading
For example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 542 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
543
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Maintenance
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
■
Traction
■
Temperature
1Traction
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
1Temperature
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 543 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
544
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators
Maintenance
Wear Indicators
The groove where the wear indicator is
located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than
elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so
that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire.
Worn out tires have poor traction on wet
roads.
Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is
recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10
years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.
1Checking Tires
High speed driving
We recommend that you do not drive faster than the
posted speed limits and conditions allow. If you drive
at sustained high speeds (over 99 mph or 160 km/h),
adjust the cold tire pressures as shown below to
avoid excessive heat build up and sudden tire failure.
Tire Size 215/55R17 94V
Pressure Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
)
Tire Size 235/40R19 96V
Pressure Front: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
)
Models with 215/55R17 tires
Models with 235/40R19 tires
Models with 215/55R17 tires
Models with 235/40R19 tires
Example of a Wear
Indicator mark
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 544 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
545
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement
Maintenance
Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause the ABS and VSA® (vehicle stability assist)
system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the
front or rear tires in pairs.
Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.
1Tire and Wheel Replacement
3
WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can
affect handling and stability. This can cause
a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Always use the size and type of tires
recommended in this owner’s manual.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 545 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
546
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation
Maintenance
Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the information display
*
/
multi-information display
*
helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.
■ Tires without rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
■ Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be
rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).
Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation
indication mark facing forward, as shown below.
Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the
TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 475
FRONT
Direction Mark
Front
Front
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 546 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
547
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires
Maintenance
Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, or tire
chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent
skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires:
• Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
• Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains:
• Install them on the front tires only.
• Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
• Follow the chain manufacturer's instruction when installing. Mount them as
tightly as you can.
• Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
• Drive slowly.
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1034
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1036
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1040
1Winter Tires
NOTICE
Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly
installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are
hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions regarding vehicle
operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware that these tires are not designed for winter
driving conditions. For more information, contact a
dealer.
3
WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly
installing chains, can damage the brake
lines and cause a crash in which you can be
seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding the selection and use of
tire chains.
Models with 205/65R16 tires
Models with 215/55R17 tires
Models with 235/40R19 tires
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 547 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
548
Maintenance
Battery
Checking the Battery
Check the battery terminals for corrosion
monthly.
The battery condition is being monitored by
the sensor on the negative terminal. If there is
a problem with the sensor, the warning
message on the information display
*
/multi-
information display
*
will let you know. Have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead:
• The audio system is disabled.
2 Reactivating the audio system P. 189
• The clock resets.
2 Clock P. 114
• The navigation system
*
is disabled.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Charging the Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle's electrical system.
Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.
1Battery
WARNING: Battery post, terminals,
and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals
by applying a baking powder and water solution.
Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel
dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.
When replacing the battery, the replacement must be
of the same specifications.
Please consult a dealer for more information.
3
WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to
explode with enough force to kill or
seriously hurt you.
When conducting any battery
maintenance, wear protective clothing and
a face shield, or have a skilled technician do
it.
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 548 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
549
Continued
Maintenance
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.
1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillips-
head screwdriver.
2. Open the remote transmitter.
u Wrap the small flat-tip screwdriver with a
cloth to prevent scratching the
transmitter.
3. Remove the button battery with the small
flat-tip screwdriver.
4. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
■
Master Keys with Remote Transmitter
*
1Replacing the Button Battery
NOTICE
An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.
Screw
Battery type: CR1620
Battery
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 549 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
550
uuRemote Transmitter CareuReplacing the Button Battery
Maintenance
1. Remove the built-in key.
2. Remove the upper half of the cover by
carefully prying on the edge with a coin.
u Remove carefully to avoid losing the
buttons.
u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent
scratching the smart entry remote.
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
■
Smart Entry Remote
*
Battery type: CR2032
Battery
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 550 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
551
Maintenance
Climate Control System Maintenance
Dust and Pollen Filter
The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects
pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance Minder
TM
messages will let
you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.
1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the climate control system
deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up
easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please
contact a dealer for replacement.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 551 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
552
Maintenance
Cleaning
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
■
Cleaning Seat Belts
1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle.
Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if
liquids are splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices
such as audio devices and switches.
Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or a fire
inside the vehicle.
If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on
electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and
liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,
and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as
benzene or gasoline.
After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them
away using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts
or textiles for long periods of time without washing.
Opening
■
Cleaning the Window
1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.
Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a
soft cloth so as not to damage them.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 552 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
553
uuCleaninguInterior Care
Maintenance
The driver’s floor mat hooks over the floor
anchors, which keep the mat from sliding
forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn
the anchor knobs to the unlock position.
When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn
the knobs to the lock position.
Do not put additional floor mats on top of
the anchored mat.
Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats
and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and
10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or
dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
■
Floor Mats
1Floor Mats
If you use any floor mats that were not originally
provided with your vehicle, make sure they are
designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and
are securely anchored by the floor anchors.
Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are
not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere
with the front seat functions.
Lock
Unlock
■
Maintaining Genuine Leather
*
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 553 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
554
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance
Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.
Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a
painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following
conditions:
• If driving on roads with road salt.
• If driving in coastal areas.
• If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
• Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash.
• Fold in the door mirrors.
• Turn off the automatic intermittent wipers
*
.
• Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
• Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior. Do not spray water into the engine compartment.
• Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,
use low pressure water and a mild detergent.
■
Washing the Vehicle
■
Using an Automated Car Wash
■
Using High Pressure Cleaners
1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can
cause a malfunction.
Air Intake Vents
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 554 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
555
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the
elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the
elements, so reapply as necessary.
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they
may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and
clean water.
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road
contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly.
Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or
a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that
helps keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing.
■
Applying Wax
■
Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
■
Cleaning the Window
■
Maintaining Aluminum Wheels
1Applying Wax
NOTICE
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage
the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe
away spills immediately.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when
you want to repair the painted surface of the parts
made of resin.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 555 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
556
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily
if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash.
Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant
enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to
vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural
processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.
Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame
surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.
However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops
building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
■
Fogged Exterior Light Lenses
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 556 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
557
Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.
Tools
Types of Tools.................................. 558
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire......................... 559
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine........................ 565
If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is
Weak..........................................566
Emergency Engine Stop ................... 567
Jump Starting.................................... 568
Shift Lever Does Not Move.............. 571
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating............. 572
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes
On ............................................. 574
If the Charging System Indicator Comes
On ................................................. 574
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes
On or Blinks ................................... 575
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes
On ................................................. 576
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator Comes On ....................... 576
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes On or Blinks ....................... 577
Fuses
Fuse Locations ................................. 578
Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 581
Emergency Towing........................... 582
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 557 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
559
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact
spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface, and apply the parking
brake.
2. Move the shift lever to
(P.
2. Move the shift lever to
(R.
3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0
*1
.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Changing a Flat Tire
Follow these compact spare precautions:
Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact
spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.
Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the
vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with
a full-size tire as soon as possible.
The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are
specifically for this model. Do not use them with
another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact
spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.
Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.
If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of
the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact
spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it
with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear.
Mount the tire chains on the front tire.
Do not use the jack if it doesn’t work properly.
Call your dealer or a professional towing service.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Manual transmission models
All models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 559 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
560
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
1. Open the trunk floor lid.
2. Take the tool case out of the trunk. Take
the jack and wheel nut wrench out of the
tool case.
3. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the
spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.
4. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear
of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.
■
Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
Tool Case
Spare Tire
Wheel
Blocks
The tire to be replaced.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 560 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
561
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
5. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up)
under the vehicle body, near the tire that
needs to be replaced.
6. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn
using the wheel nut wrench.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 561 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
562
Handling the Unexpected
1. Place the jack under the jacking point
closest to the tire to be changed.
2. Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in
the image until the top of the jack contacts
the jacking point.
u Make sure that the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar
and the jack handle, until the tire is off the
ground.
■
How to Set Up the Jack
1How to Set Up the Jack
Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the
vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle.
Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or
may not fit the jacking point.
The following instructions must be followed to use
the jack safely:
• Do not use while the engine is running.
• Use only where the ground is firm and level.
• Use only at the jacking points.
• Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
• Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.
3
WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,
seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire
exactly, and never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the jack.
Jacking Points
Jacking Point
Jack
Handle
Bar
Wheel Nut
Wrench as Jack Handle
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 562 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
563
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.
2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel
with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire.
4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, then stop
rotating.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
Tighten the wheel nuts in the order
indicated in the image. Go around,
tightening the nuts, two to three times in
this order.
Wheel nut torque:
80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)
■
Replacing the Flat Tire
1Replacing the Flat Tire
Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra
torque using your foot or a pipe.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 563 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
564
Handling the Unexpected
1. Remove the center cap.
2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire
well.
3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing
bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the
bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
4. Securely put the jack and wheel nut wrench
back in the tool case. Store the case in the
trunk.
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator
comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the
indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on. Tire Pressures Low
appears on the multi-information display
*
, but this is normal.
Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 475
■
Storing the Flat Tire
1Storing the Flat Tire
3
WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a
crash and can seriously injure the
occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely
before driving.
Spacer Cone
Wing Bolt
For
compact
spare tire
For
full-size
tire
■
TPMS and the Spare Tire
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 564 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
565
Handling the Unexpected
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine
If the engine does not start, check the starter.
Starter condition Checklist
Starter doesn’t turn or turns
over slowly.
The battery may be dead. Check
each of the items on the right and
respond accordingly.
Check for a message on the multi-information display.
●
If the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 566
uMake sure the smart entry remote is in its operating range.
2 ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range P. 140
Check brightness of the interior lights.
Turn on the interior lights and check the brightness.
●
If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all
2 Battery P. 548
●
If the interior lights come on normally
2 Fuses P. 578
The starter turns over normally
but the engine doesn’t start.
There may be a problem with the
fuse. Check each of the items on
the right and respond accordingly.
Review the engine start procedure.
Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again.
2 Starting the Engine P. 421, 423
Check the immobilizer system indicator.
When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.
2 Immobilizer System P. 132
Check the fuel level.
There should be enough fuel in the tank.
2 Fuel Gauge P. 95
Check the fuse.
Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 581
If the problem continues:
2 Emergency Towing P. 582
1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an
assisting vehicle to jump start it.
2 Jump Starting P. 568
Models with multi-information display
Models with smart entry system
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 565 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
566
uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
Handling the Unexpected
If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
If the beeper sounds, the indicator on the ENGINE START/STOP button flashes,
and the engine won’t start.
The To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears on the multi-
information display.
Start the engine as follows.
1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/
STOP button with the H logo on the smart
entry remote while the indicator on the
ENGINE START/STOP button is flashing.
The buttons on the smart entry remote
should be facing you.
u The indicator flashes for about 30
seconds.
2. Depress the brake pedal (automatic
transmission) or clutch pedal (manual
transmission) and press the ENGINE
START/STOP button within 10 seconds
after the beeper sounds and the indicator
stays on.
u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode
will change to ACCESSORY.
Models with smart entry system
Models with multi-information display
All models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 566 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
567
uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop
Handling the Unexpected
Emergency Engine Stop
The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an
emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the
following operations:
• Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds.
• Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice.
The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables
the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will
require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use
both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a
safe place. With manual transmission models you can also downshift the
transmission to utilize engine braking.
The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped.
To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, move the shift lever to
(P after the vehicle
comes to a complete stop.
Then press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake
pedal.
The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.
Models with smart entry system
1Emergency Engine Stop
Do not press the button while driving unless it is
absolutely necessary for the engine to be switched
off.
U.S. automatic transmission/CVT models
Canadian automatic transmission/CVT models
Manual transmission models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 567 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
568
Handling the Unexpected
Jump Starting
Jump Starting Procedure
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine,
then open the hood.
1. Connect the first jumper cable to your
vehicle's battery + terminal.
2. Connect the other end of the first jumper
cable to the booster battery + terminal.
u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.
u When using an automotive battery
charger to boost your 12-volt battery,
select a lower charging voltage than 15-
volt. Check the charger manual for the
proper setting.
3. Connect the second jumper cable to the
booster battery - terminal.
1Jump Starting
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they
do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be
careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the
cable ends to touch each other while attaching or
detaching the jumper cables.
3
WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow
the correct procedure, seriously injuring
anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking
materials away from the battery.
Booster Battery
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Booster Battery
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 568 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Continued
569
uuJump StartinguJump Starting Procedure
Handling the Unexpected
4. Connect the other end of the second
jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt
as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable
to any other part.
5. If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle's engine
and increase its rpm slightly.
6. Attempt to start your vehicle's engine. If it
turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
1Jump Starting
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and
may prevent the engine from starting.
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 569 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
570
uuJump StartinguJump Starting Procedure
Handling the Unexpected
Once your vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following
order.
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's ground.
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery -
terminal.
3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's battery + terminal.
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal.
Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.
■
What to Do After the Engine Starts
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 570 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
571
Handling the Unexpected
Shift Lever Does Not Move
Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P
position.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
2. Remove the built-in key from the smart
entry remote.
3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flat-
tip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock
release slot as shown in the image, and
remove the cover.
4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
5. While pushing the key down, press the shift
lever release button and place the shift lever
into
(N.
u The lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
■
Releasing the Lock
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Slot
Cover
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
All models
Release Button
Shift Lock
Release Slot
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 571 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
572
Handling the Unexpected
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows:
• The temperature gauge needle is at the mark or the engine suddenly loses
power.
• Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
■ First thing to do
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.
u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.
Then open the hood.
1How to Handle Overheating
NOTICE
Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge
needle at the mark may damage the engine.
3
WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated
engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming
out.
H
H
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 572 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
573
uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating
Handling the Unexpected
■ Next thing to do
1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
stop the engine once the temperature
gauge needle comes down.
u If the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling
system components for leaks.
u If the coolant level in the engine coolant
reserve tank is low, add coolant until it
reaches the MAX mark.
u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank,
check that the radiator is cool. Cover the
radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open
the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to
the base of the filler neck, and put the
cap back on.
■ Last thing to do
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge.
If the temperature gauge needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone
down, contact a dealer for repairs.
1How to Handle Overheating
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.
Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze
as soon as possible.
3
WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
MAX
Engine Coolant Reserve Tank
MIN
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 573 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
574
Handling the Unexpected
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.
■ What to do as soon as the indicator comes on
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
■ What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about three minute.
2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
u Add oil as necessary.
3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator.
u The indicator goes off: Start driving again.
u The indicator does not go off within 10 seconds: Stop the engine
and contact a dealer for repairs immediately.
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the battery is not being charged.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Turn off the climate control system, rear defogger, and other electrical
systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs.
1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE
Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause
serious mechanical damage almost immediately.
1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the
engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge
the battery.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 574 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
575
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
Handling the Unexpected
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or
Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink
• Comes on if there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose.
• Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a
dealer.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least
10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.
■ The message appears on when:
An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being
loose or not being installed.
■ What to do when the message appears:
1. Stop the engine.
2. Check if the fuel fill cap is fully installed.
u If not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once.
3. Drive for several days of normal driving.
u The message should go off.
■ When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of
gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described
above.
■
Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message
1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,
the emissions control system and the engine could be
damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when
restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at
31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle
inspected.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 575 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
576
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
Handling the Unexpected
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• The brake fluid is low.
• There is a malfunction in the brake system.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving
Press the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
• If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
• If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator
Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS system.
• If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and
sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
Have your vehicle repaired immediately.
It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop
immediately in a safe place. If necessary, downshift
the gears.
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come
on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution
system is not working. This can result in vehicle
instability under sudden braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
U.S.
Canada
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 576 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
577
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
Handling the Unexpected
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or
Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink
A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated.
If there is a problem with the TPMS or the compact spare tire is installed,
the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver side doorjamb.
u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.
■ What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact
spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire.
The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers).
u Calibrate the TPMS after a full-size tire is reinstalled.
1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause
it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always
inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 577 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
578
Handling the Unexpected
Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working,
turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0
*1
and
check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.
Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push
the tabs to open the box.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box
cover. Locate the fuse in question by the
fuse number and box cover number.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have
an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.
■
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
*2:Models with LKAS
*3:Models without LKAS
*4:4-cylinder models
*5:6-cylinder models
Circuit Protected Amps
1 Battery 125 A
2
EPS 70 A
Fuse Box Main 1 (60 A)
Fuse Box Option 1 (40 A)
−−
− −
ABS/VSA FSR
20 A
*2
40 A
*3
ABS/VSA Motor
40 A
*2
30 A
*3
3
− −
− −
− −
− −
4 Front Fog Light
*
(10 A)
5 Horn 10 A
6 Stop Light 10 A
7 FI Sub 15 A
8 DRL (7.5 A)
9 IG Coil 15 A
10
Injector
*4
−
*5
(20 A)
*4
−
*5
*6:Models with smart entry system
*7:Models without smart entry system
Circuit Protected Amps
11 Hazard 15 A
12
Fuse Box Main 2 60 A
Fuse Box Option 2 (40 A)
IG Main 1
30 A
*6
50 A
*7
IG Main 2
*6
−
*7
30 A
*6
−
*7
Sub Fan Motor
20 A
*4
30 A
*5
Headlight Low Beam Main 30 A
Fuse Box 30 A
Wiper Motor 30 A
Main Fan Motor 30 A
Starter Motor
*6
−
*7
30 A
*6
−
*7
13 Rear Defogger 40 A
14 Heater Motor 40 A
15 FI Main 15 A
16
Heated Door Mirror
*, *4
−
*5
(10 A)
*4
−
*5
17 MG Clutch 7.5 A
18 DBW 15 A
19 Small Light 20 A
20 Interior Light 7.5 A
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 578 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
579
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
*2:Models with LKAS
*3:Models without LKAS
Circuit Protected Amps
21 Back Up 10 A
22 Audio 10 A
23 Fan Timer 7.5 A
24 Right Headlight Low Beam 10 A
25 Left Headlight Low Beam 10 A
26
ABS/VSA ECU
*2
−
*3
7.5 A
*2
−
*3
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 579 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
580
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Handling the Unexpected
Located under the dashboard.
Fuse locations are shown on the label on
the side panel.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse
number and label number.
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
■
Interior Fuse Box
Fuse Label
Circuit Protected Amps
1 A/C 7.5 A
2 DRL 7.5 A
3 − −
4 − −
5 Meter 7.5 A
6 SRS 7.5 A
7 Option (7.5 A)
8 MISS SOL 10 A
9 Fuel Pump 20 A
10 ABS/VSA 7.5 A
11 − −
12 Front Wiper 7.5 A
13 ACG 15 A
14
Rear Accessory Power Socket
(Console Compartment)
(20 A)
15
Driver’s Power Seat
Reclining
*
(20 A)
16 Moonroof
*
(20 A)
17 Front Seat Heaters
*
(20 A)
18 − −
19
Passenger Side Door
Unlock
10 A
20
Driver Side Rear Door
Unlock
10 A
21 Driver’s Door Lock 10 A
22 Passenger Side Door Lock 10 A
23 Driver’s Door Unlock 10 A
24 SRS 10 A
25 Illumination 10 A
26 Key Lock 7.5 A
27 Parking Lights 10 A
28 Lumbar Support
*
(10 A)
29 Right Headlight High Beam 10 A
30 Washer 15 A
31 SMART
*
(10 A)
32 Driver’s Power Window 20 A
Circuit Protected Amps
33
Front Passenger’s Power
Window
20 A
34
Rear Driver Side Power
Window
20 A
35
Rear Passenger Side Power
Window
20 A
36 Driver’s Power Seat Sliding
*
(20 A)
37 ACCESSORY 7.5 A
38 − −
39 Left Headlight High Beam 10 A
40
Front Accessory Power Socket
(Console Panel)
20 A
41 Driver Side Rear Door Lock 10 A
42 Door Lock 20 A
a Audio
*
(7.5 A)
b ACM
*
(20 A)
c Rear Seat Heaters
*
(15 A)
d Premium Amp
*
(20 A)
e − −
f − −
g
Passenger’s Power Seat
Reclining
*
(20 A)
h
Passenger’s Power Seat
Sliding
*
(20 A)
Circuit Protected Amps
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 580 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
581
uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses
Handling the Unexpected
Inspecting and Changing Fuses
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0
*1
. Turn
headlights and all accessories off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Check the large fuse in the engine
compartment.
u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and
replace it with a new one.
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine
compartment and the vehicle interior.
u If there is a burned out fuse, remove it
with the fuse puller and replace it with a
new one.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of
an ignition switch.
1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE
Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating
greatly increases the chances of damaging the
electrical system.
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified
amperage.
Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on
P. 578 to 580.
There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine
compartment fuse box cover.
Combined
Fuse
Blown Fuse
Fuse Puller
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 581 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
582
Handling the Unexpected
Emergency Towing
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
■ Flat bed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.
This is the best way to transport your vehicle.
■ Wheel lift equipment
The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to
tow your vehicle.
1Emergency Towing
NOTICE
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
to support the vehicle's weight.
NOTICE
Improper towing such as towing behind a
motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the
transmission.
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.
It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift
from side to side or break.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 582 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
583
Information
This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.
Specifications .................................... 584
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number and Transmission
Number ......................................... 588
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 589
Reporting Safety Defects ................. 590
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 591
Warranty Coverages ........................ 593
Authorized Manuals......................... 595
Customer Service Information......... 596
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 583 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
584
Information
Specifications
■ Vehicle Specifications
*1: LX models
*2: Except LX models
Model Honda Accord Sedan
No. of Passengers:
Front 2
Rear 3
Total 5
Weights:
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating
U.S.: 4,200 lbs (1,905 kg)
*1
4,321 lbs (1,960 kg)
*2
Canada: 1,930 kg
*1
1,980 kg
*2
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)
U.S.: 2,249 lbs (1,020 kg)
*1
2,315 lbs (1,050 kg)
*2
Canada: 1,030 kg
*1
1,065 kg
*2
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)
U.S.: 2,006 lbs (910 kg)
*1
2,050 lbs (930 kg)
*2
Canada: 910 kg
*1
930 kg
*2
Air Conditioning:
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Charge Quantity 15.0 – 16.8 oz (425 – 475 g)
Lubricant Type ND-OIL 8
4-cylinder models
■ Engine Specifications
■ Fuel
■ Washer Fluid
Displacement 144 cu-in (2,356 cm
3
)
Spark Plugs
NGK
DILKAR7G11GS
DILKAR7H11GS
DENSO DXE22HQR-D11S
Fuel:
Type
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
of 87 or higher
Fuel Tank Capacity 17.2 US gal (65 ℓ)
Tank Capacity
U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ)
Canada: 4.85 ℓ
■ Light Bulbs
*3: Models with halogen headlights
*4: Models with LED headlights
*5: Models with bulb type parking lights
*6: Models with LED type parking/daytime running lights
*7: Models with bulb type brake lights
*8: Models with LED type brake lights
Headlights (Low Beam)
55W (H11)
*3
LED
*4
Headlights (High Beam)
60W (HB3)
*3
LED
*4
Fog Lights
*
LED
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker/Parking Lights
*3, *5
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights
*3, *6
28/8W (Amber)
Parking/Daytime Running Lights
*6
LED
Front Turn Signal Lights
*4
LED
Front Side Marker Lights
*4
3CP
Side Turn Signal Lights
(on Door Mirrors)
*
LED
Brake Lights
21W
*7
LED
*8
Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W (Amber)
Rear Side Marker Lights LED
Taillights (on Fenders) LED
Back-Up Lights 16W
Taillights (on Trunk Lid) LED
High-Mount Brake Light LED
Rear License Plate Lights 5W
Trunk Light 5W
Interior Lights
Map Lights 8W
Ceiling Light 8W
Vanity Mirror Lights 1.4W
Courtesy Lights
*
2CP
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 584 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
585
uuSpecificationsu
Continued
Information
■ Brake/Clutch Fluid
■ Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) Fluid
■ Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Specified HCF-2
Capacity Change 3.9 US qt (3.7 ℓ)
Specified Honda Manual Transmission Fluid
Capacity Change 2.0 US qt (1.9 ℓ)
■ Engine Oil
■ Engine Coolant
*1: Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models
*2: Manual transmission models
Recommended
·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Capacity
Change 4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ)
Change
including
filter
4.4 US qt (4.2 ℓ)
Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity
1.66 US gal (6.28 ℓ)
*1
1.66 US gal (6.30 ℓ)
*2
(change including the remaining
0.17 US gal (0.64 ℓ) in the reserve tank)
■ Tire
*3: U.S. LX models
*4: U.S. EX, EX-L models and Canadian LX, EX-L models
*5: U.S. Sport models and Canadian Sport, Touring models
Regular
Size
205/65R16 95H
*3
215/55R17 94V
*4
235/40R19 96V
*5
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm
2
])
Front
33 (230 [2.3])
*3, *5
33 (225 [2.3])
*4
Rear
32 (220 [2.2])
*3, *5
33 (225 [2.3])
*4
Compact
Spare
Size
T135/90D16 102M
*3, *4
T135/80D17 103M
*5
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm
2
])
60 (420 [4.2])
Wheel Size
Regular
16 x 7J
*3
17 x 7 1/2J
*4
19 x 8J
*5
Compact Spare
16 x 4T
*3, *4
17 x 4T
*5
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 585 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
586
uuSpecificationsu
Information
■ Vehicle Specifications
Model Honda Accord Sedan
No. of Passengers:
Front 2
Rear 3
Total 5
Weights:
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating
U.S.: 4,542 lbs (2,060 kg)
Canada: 2,060 kg
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)
U.S.: 2,491 lbs (1,130 kg)
Canada: 1,130 kg
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)
U.S.: 2,072 lbs (940 kg)
Canada: 940 kg
Air Conditioning:
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Charge Quantity 15.0 – 16.8 oz (425 – 475 g)
Lubricant Type ND-OIL 8
6-cylinder models
■ Engine Specifications
■ Fuel
■ Washer Fluid
Displacement 212 cu-in (3,471 cm
3
)
Spark Plugs
NGK ILZKR7B11
DENSO SXU22HCR11
Fuel:
Type
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
of 87 or higher
Fuel Tank Capacity 17.2 US gal (65 ℓ)
Tank Capacity
U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ)
Canada: 4.85 ℓ
■ Light Bulbs
*1: Models with halogen headlights
*2: Models with LED headlights
*3: Models with bulb type parking lights
*4: Models with LED type parking/daytime running lights
*5: Models with bulb type brake lights
*6: Models with LED type brake lights
Headlights (Low Beam)
55W (H11)
*1
LED
*2
Headlights (High Beam)
60W (HB3)
*1
LED
*2
Fog Lights LED
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker/Parking Lights
*1, *3
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights
*1, *4
28/8W (Amber)
Parking/Daytime Running Lights
*4
LED
Front Turn Signal Lights
*2
LED
Front Side Marker Lights
*2
3CP
Side Turn Signal Lights
(on Door Mirrors)
LED
Brake Lights
21W
*5
LED
*6
Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W (Amber)
Rear Side Marker Lights LED
Taillights (on Fenders) LED
Back-Up Lights 16W
Taillights (on Trunk Lid) LED
High-Mount Brake Light LED
Rear License Plate Lights 5W
Trunk Light 5W
Interior Lights
Map Lights 8W
Ceiling Light 8W
Vanity Mirror Lights 1.4W
Courtesy Lights 2CP
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 586 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
587
uuSpecificationsu
Information
■ Brake Fluid
■ Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Specified
Honda ATF DW-1
(automatic transmission fluid)
Capacity Change 3.3 US qt (3.1 ℓ)
■ Engine Oil
■ Engine Coolant
Recommended
·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Capacity
Change 4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ)
Change
including
filter
4.5 US qt (4.3 ℓ)
Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity
1.72 US gal (6.5 ℓ)
(change including the remaining
0.17 US gal (0.64 ℓ) in the reserve tank)
■ Tire
*1: EX-L V6 models
*2: U.S. Touring models and Canadian V6 Touring models
Regular
Size
215/55R17 94V
*1
235/40R19 96V
*2
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm
2
])
33 (225 [2.3])
*1
33 (230 [2.3])
*2
Front
Rear
33 (225 [2.3])
*1
32 (220 [2.2])
*2
Compact
Spare
Size
T135/90D16 102M
*1
T135/80D17 103M
*2
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm
2
])
60 (420 [4.2])
Wheel Size
Regular
17 x 7 1/2J
*1
19 x 8J
*2
Compact Spare
16 x 4T
*1
17 x 4T
*2
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 587 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
588
Information
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number
and Transmission Number
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle.
The locations of your vehicle’s VIN, engine number and transmission number are
shown as follows.
1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number and
Transmission Number
The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is
located under the cover.
Cover
Vehicle Identification Number
Engine Number
Certification Label/
Vehicle Identification
Number
Manual Transmission
Number
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
Number
6-cylinder models
4-cylinder models
Engine Number
Automatic Transmission
Number
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 588 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
589
Information
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in
operation.
Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required
standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada
Standard, described below:
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-Gen/210/251/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Audio System
Bluetooth® Audio
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
Immobilizer System
Keyless Access System
*
Remote Transmitter
Wireless Charger
*
* Not available on all models
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 589 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
590
Information
Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For
more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 590 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
591
Continued
Information
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has “Readiness Codes,” as part of the onboard self diagnostic system.
Some States use these codes as a test to see if your vehicle's emissions components
are working properly.
The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has
gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, without starting the
engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are
not set.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,
prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:
1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for six hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20
seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in
(P (automatic transmission/CVT) or (N (manual
transmission). Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about
three minutes.
6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Testing of Readiness Codes
The readiness codes are erased when the battery is
disconnected, and set again only after several days of
driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness
codes are not set, you may be requested to return at
a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes
are still not set, see a dealer.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 591 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
592
uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
Information
7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
(D (automatic/CVT) or 5th (manual). Do not use cruise control. When traffic
allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds
because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 592 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
593
Continued
Information
Warranty Coverages
■ U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance
Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered for
rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this
warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other
factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts
against defects in materials and workmanship.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 593 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
594
uuWarranty Coveragesu
Information
Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a
replacement battery purchased from a dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as
long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
■ Canadian Owners
Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 594 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
595
Information
Authorized Manuals
■ Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to
Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.
■ For U.S. Owners:
Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by
phone at (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.
■ For Canadian Owners:
Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 595 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
596
Information
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals.
They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that
your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the
dealership's service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership's management, contact Honda Customer Services.
U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Honda Automobile Customer Services
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Canadian Owners:
Honda Canada Inc.
Customer Relations
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-mail: [email protected]
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
1Customer Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following
information:
• Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number and Transmission
Number P. 588
• Date of purchase
• Odometer reading of your vehicle
• Your name, address, and telephone number
• A detailed description of the problem
• Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 596 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
597
uuCustomer Service Informationu
Continued
Information
Music recognition technology and related
data are provided by Gracenote®.
Gracenote is the industry standard in music
recognition technology and related content
delivery.
For more information, visit
www.gracenote.com.
When music is recorded to the HDD from a
CD, information such as the recording artist
and track name are retrieved from the
Gracenote Database and displayed (when
available).
Gracenote may not contain information for
all albums.
Gracenote is an internet-based music
recognition service that allows artist, album,
and track information from CDs to display
on the HDD.
Gracenote users are allowed 4 free updates
a year. More information about Gracenote,
its features, and downloads are available at
■
Gracenote Music Recognition
Service (CDDB)
www.honda.com (in U.S.) or
www.honda.ca (in Canada).
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright © 2000 to present
Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright
© 2000 to present Gracenote.
One or more patents owned by Gracenote
apply to this product and service. See the
Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list
of applicable Gracenote patents.
Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS,
the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the
“Powered by Gracenote” logo are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of
Gracenote in the United States and/or other
countries.
This application or device contains software
from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville,
California (“Gracenote”). The software
from Gracenote (the “Gracenote
Software”) enables this application to
perform disc and/or file identification and
obtain music- related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or
■
Gracenote® END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
embedded databases (collectively,
“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other
functions. You may use Gracenote Data
only by means of the intended End-User
functions or this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal non-
commercial use only.
You agree not to assign, copy, transfer, or
transmit the Gracenote Software or any
Gracenote Data to any third party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to
use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers will
terminate if you violate these restrictions. If
your license terminates, you agree to cease
any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 597 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
598
uuCustomer Service Informationu
Information
Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and the
Gracenote Servers, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide.
You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce
its rights under this Agreement against you
directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique
identifier to track queries for statistical
purposes. The purpose of a randomly
assigned numeric identifier is to allow the
Gracenote service to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote
service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of
Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or
warranties, express or implied, regarding
the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in
the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves
the right to delete data from the Gracenote
Servers or to change data categories for any
cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No
warranty is made that the Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers are error-
free or that functioning of Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers will be
uninterrupted.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide you
with new enhanced or additional data types
or categories that Gracenote may provide in
the future and is free to discontinue its
services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES
NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE
OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES.
© Gracenote 2009
Requirements to access Pandora®
• Latest version of the Pandora application
installed on your mobile device. (Visit the
Apple iTunes store or Google Play
Marketplace to download the latest
version.)
• Registered Pandora account (you can
create a free account at
www.pandora.com <http://
www.pandora.com/> or on your
smartphone)
• Connection to the internet via WiFi or
cellular data network.
• Android devices must be connected to
the vehicle via Bluetooth, iPhone devices
may be connected via Bluetooth or USB.
■
Disclaimer of Pandora®
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 598 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
599
uuCustomer Service Informationu
Information
Limitations
• Access to Pandora requires an active
internet connection
• Ability to access Pandora through this
system is subject to change without
notice
• Certain functionality of Pandora service is
not available when accessing the service
through this system including, but not
limited to, creating new stations, deleting
stations, emailing current stations,
buying songs, viewing additional text
information, logging in to Pandora, and
adjusting Cell Network Audio Quality.
Pandora internet radio is a music service
not affiliated with HONDA. More
information is available at http://
www.pandora.com <http://
www.pandora.com/>. Pandora, the
Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used
with permission.
• Mobile access requires a smartphone
with an active data plan. Standard data
rates may apply.
• Pandora is only available in the United
States.
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 599 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
Index
600
Index
Index
Numbers
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode .................... 434
Operation ................................................ 435
A
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)................... 481
Accessories and Modifications................. 500
Accessory Power Sockets .......................... 173
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)........... 82, 447
Additives
Coolant ................................................... 523
Engine Oil................................................ 517
Washer.................................................... 528
Additives, Engine Oil................................ 517
Adjusting
Armrest ................................................... 167
Clock....................................................... 114
Front Seats .............................................. 160
Head Restraints........................................ 163
Mirrors .................................................... 158
Rear Seats................................................ 166
Steering Wheel........................................ 157
Temperature...................................... 98, 102
Aha
TM
......................................................... 264
Air Conditioning System (Climate Control
System) .................................................... 180
Changing the Mode ................................ 180
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows ............................................... 181
Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 551
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 180
Sensor..................................................... 183
Synchronized Mode................................. 182
Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 180
Air Pressure............................... 540, 585, 587
Airbags........................................................ 39
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 45
After a Collision ........................................ 42
Airbag Care............................................... 51
Event Data Recorder.................................... 0
Front Airbags (SRS).................................... 42
Indicator.............................................. 49, 72
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 50
Sensors ..................................................... 39
Side Airbags .............................................. 46
Side Curtain Airbags.................................. 48
AM/FM Radio.................................... 199, 239
Android Auto ........................................... 281
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 481
Indicator.................................................... 72
Apple CarPlay ........................................... 277
Armrest ..................................................... 167
Audio Remote Controls ........................... 190
Audio System............................................ 186
Adjusting the Sound........................ 197, 232
Audio/Information Screen................ 193, 216
Audio/Information Touch Screen ............. 218
Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 188
Changing the Home Screen Icon
Layout ................................................... 221
Closing Apps........................................... 231
Display Setup .................................. 198, 233
Error Messages ....................................... 286
General Information................................ 291
Home Screen .......................................... 224
Internet Radio ......................... 207, 262, 264
iPod ........................................ 204, 255, 294
Limitations for Manual
Operation ............................. 234, 344, 377
MP3/WMA/AAC ............. 201, 210, 252, 265
Playing a CD ................................... 201, 252
Recommended CDs ................................ 292
Recommended Devices ........................... 294
Remote Controls..................................... 190
Security Code ......................................... 189
Selecting an Audio Source ...................... 234
Status Area ............................................. 230
Theft Protection ...................................... 189
USB Flash Drives...................... 210, 265, 294
USB Port(s).............................................. 187
Wallpaper Setup ............................. 195, 222
Audio/Information Screen ............... 193, 216
Audio/Information Touch Screen............ 218
Authorized Manuals ................................ 595
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................ 127
Customize .............................. 109, 309, 332
Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support
System).................................................... 147
Indicator ................................................... 80
Automatic Intermittent Wipers .............. 152
Automatic Lighting.................................. 145
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 600 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
601
Index
Automatic Transmission
Creeping................................................. 429
Fluid ....................................................... 526
Kickdown ............................................... 429
Operating the Shift Lever .................. 20, 437
Shift Lever Does Not Move...................... 571
Shifting................................................... 436
Auxiliary Input Jack ................................. 188
Average Fuel Economy ...................... 97, 101
Average Speed ......................................... 102
B
Battery ...................................................... 548
Charging System Indicator ................ 69, 574
Jump Starting ......................................... 568
Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ....... 548
Maintenance (Replacing)......................... 549
Belts (Seat).................................................. 32
Beverage Holders..................................... 172
Bluetooth® Audio............................. 213, 268
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ............ 343, 374
Booster Seats (For Children)...................... 63
Brake System ............................................ 479
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 481
Brake Assist System................................. 482
Fluid ....................................................... 527
Foot Brake .............................................. 480
Indicator ........................................... 68, 576
Parking Brake.......................................... 479
Brake System Indicator (Amber)................ 68
Brake System Indicator (Red)..................... 68
Brightness Control (Instrument Panel).... 153
Bulb Replacement .................................... 529
Brake Lights, Rear Turn Signal Lights and Rear
Side Marker/Taillights............................. 534
Fog Lights................................................ 531
Front Side Marker Lights .......................... 532
Front Turn Signal Lights ........................... 531
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights........ 533
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker/Parking
Lights .................................................... 533
Headlights ............................................... 529
High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 536
Parking/Daytime Running Lights .............. 531
Rear License Plate Lights .......................... 536
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator
Lights .................................................... 533
Taillights and Back-Up Lights ................... 535
Bulb Specifications ........................... 584, 586
C
Carbon Monoxide Gas................................ 64
Cargo Hooks ............................................. 176
Carrying Cargo.................................. 413, 415
CD Player........................................... 201, 252
Center Pocket ........................................... 171
Certification Label .................................... 588
Changing Bulbs......................................... 529
Charging System Indicator................. 69, 574
Child Safety................................................. 52
Childproof Door Locks............................. 126
Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 131
Child Seat.................................................... 52
Booster Seats ............................................ 63
Child Seat for Infants................................. 54
Child Seat for Small Children..................... 55
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat
Belt ......................................................... 59
Larger Children ......................................... 62
Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 54
Selecting a Child Seat................................ 56
Using a Tether........................................... 61
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 126
Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 554
Cleaning the Interior................................ 552
Climate Control System............................ 180
Changing the Mode ................................ 180
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows............................................... 181
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 551
Recirculation and Fresh Air Mode ............ 180
Sensors ................................................... 183
Synchronized Mode................................. 182
Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 180
Clock.......................................................... 114
Clutch Fluid............................................... 527
CMBS
TM
(Collision Mitigation Braking
System
TM
)................................................. 483
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 601 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
602
Index
Coat Hook ................................................. 176
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
).................................................. 483
Compact Spare Tire .................. 559, 585, 587
Compass .................................................... 409
Console Compartment ............................. 170
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
Creeping ................................................. 429
Fluid ........................................................ 525
Kickdown ................................................ 429
Operating the Shift Lever ........... 19, 431, 433
Shift Lever Does Not Move....................... 571
Shifting............................................ 430, 432
Controls ..................................................... 113
Coolant (Engine)....................................... 523
Adding to the Engine Coolant Reserve
Tank ...................................................... 523
Adding to the Radiator ............................ 524
Overheating............................................. 572
Creeping (Automatic Transmission
/CVT) ........................................................ 429
Cruise Control ........................................... 442
Indicator.................................................... 78
Cup Holders............................................... 172
Customer Service Information ................. 596
Customized Features ................ 103, 298, 316
D
Daytime Running Lights........................... 150
Dead Battery............................................. 568
Defaulting All the Settings .............. 315, 339
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows ................................................. 181
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ............... 589
Dimming
Headlights............................................... 144
Rearview Mirror....................................... 158
Dipstick (Engine Oil)................................. 518
Directional Signals (Turn Signal) ............. 144
Display Button .................................. 193, 216
Door Mirrors ............................................. 159
Doors......................................................... 116
Auto Door Locking .................................. 127
Auto Door Unlocking .............................. 127
Door and Trunk Open Indicator ........... 31, 74
Keys ........................................................ 116
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from
the Inside .............................................. 124
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from
the Outside ........................................... 119
Lockout Prevention System...................... 123
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 542
Driving ...................................................... 411
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ................ 447
Automatic Transmission/CVT ................... 429
Braking ................................................... 479
Cruise Control......................................... 442
Shifting Gear................................... 436, 438
Shifting Position .............................. 430, 432
Starting the Engine.......................... 421, 423
Driving Position Memory System ............ 155
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 551
E
Eco Assist System.......................................... 9
ECON Button ............................................ 441
Elapsed Time ............................................ 101
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator ........................................... 74, 576
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............ 471
Emergency................................................ 582
Emergency Engine Stop........................... 567
Emergency Trunk Opener ....................... 131
Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ...... 591
Engine....................................................... 588
Coolant .................................................. 523
Jump Starting ......................................... 568
Oil .......................................................... 517
Remote Engine Start ............................... 425
Starting........................................... 421, 423
Switch Buzzer ......................................... 139
Engine Coolant ........................................ 523
Adding to the Engine Coolant Reserve
Tank ..................................................... 523
Adding to the Radiator ........................... 524
Overheating............................................ 572
Temperature Gauge.................................. 95
Engine Oil................................................. 517
Adding ................................................... 520
Checking ................................................ 518
Displaying Oil Life ........................... 505, 509
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 602 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
603
Index
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 69, 574
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 517
ENGINE START/STOP Button.................... 140
EPS (Electric Power Steering)
System............................................... 74, 576
Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon
Monoxide) ................................................ 64
Expanded View Driver’s Mirror............... 159
Exterior Care (Cleaning) .......................... 554
Exterior Mirrors........................................ 159
F
Features .................................................... 185
Filters
Dust and Pollen....................................... 551
Oil .......................................................... 521
Flat Tire..................................................... 559
Floor Mats ................................................ 553
Fluids
Automatic Transmission .......................... 526
Brake/Clutch ........................................... 527
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) .................................................... 525
Engine Coolant ....................................... 523
Manual Transmission .............................. 525
Windshield Washer ................................. 528
FM/AM Radio ................................... 199, 239
Fog Light Indicator .................................... 77
Folding Down the Rear Seat ................... 166
Foot Brake ................................................ 480
Front Airbags (SRS)..................................... 42
Front Seats
Adjusting................................................. 160
Front Sensor Camera ................................ 445
Fuel...................................................... 21, 497
Economy ................................................. 499
Gauge ....................................................... 95
Instant Fuel Economy......................... 97, 102
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 72
Range................................................ 98, 101
Recommendation .................................... 497
Refueling................................................. 497
Fuel Economy............................................ 499
Fuel Fill Cap......................................... 21, 498
Message.................................................. 575
Fuel Fill Door....................................... 21, 498
Fuses .......................................................... 578
Inspecting and Changing......................... 581
Locations......................................... 578, 580
G
Gasoline (Fuel)
Economy ................................................. 499
Gauge ....................................................... 95
Information ............................................. 497
Instant Fuel Economy......................... 97, 102
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 72
Refueling................................................. 497
Gauges ........................................................ 95
Gear Shift Lever Positions
Automatic Transmission .......................... 436
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT)............................................. 430, 432
Manual Transmission............................... 439
Glass (care)........................................ 552, 555
Glove Box.................................................. 170
H
Halogen Bulbs .......................................... 529
Handling the Unexpected........................ 557
HandsFreeLink® (HFL)....................... 343, 374
Auto Answer........................................... 358
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and
Call History.................................... 360, 388
Automatic Transferring............................ 358
Displaying Messages................................ 403
Displaying Text Messages ........................ 371
HFL Buttons..................................... 343, 374
HFL Menus ...................................... 345, 378
HFL Status Display ........................... 344, 376
In Case of Emergency.............................. 407
Limitations for Manual Operation .... 344, 377
Making a Call.................................. 364, 396
Options During a Call ...................... 369, 400
Phone Setup.................................... 350, 383
Phonebook Phonetic Modification ........... 392
Receiving a Call............................... 368, 399
Receiving a Text Message........................ 370
Receiving a Text Message/E-mail.............. 401
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 603 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
604
Index
Ring Tone........................................ 359, 387
Selecting a Mail Account ......................... 402
Speed Dial ....................................... 361, 389
To Create a Security PIN........................... 357
To Set Up Text Message Options.............. 355
To Set Up Text Message/E-mail Options ... 386
Hazard Warning Button............................... 4
HD Radio
TM
................................................ 239
Head Restraints......................................... 163
Headlights ................................................. 144
Aiming .................................................... 529
Auto High-Beam...................................... 147
Automatic Operation ............................... 145
Dimming ......................................... 144, 150
Operating ................................................ 144
Heaters (Seat).................................... 178, 179
High Beam Indicator................................... 76
Hill Start Assist System...................... 422, 427
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver ............ 340
HondaLink® ............................................... 270
I
Identification Numbers
Engine and Transmission.......................... 588
Vehicle Identification ............................... 588
Ignition Switch.......................................... 139
Illumination Control
Knob ....................................................... 153
Immobilizer System .................................. 132
Indicator.................................................... 77
Indicators .................................................... 68
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Amber)..... 82
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(White) ............................................ 82, 448
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)..................... 72
Auto High-Beam (Amber) .......................... 80
Auto High-Beam (Green) ........................... 80
Brake System (Amber) ............................... 68
Brake System (Red).................................... 68
Charging System ............................... 69, 574
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)................................................. 84
CRUISE CONTROL ............................. 78, 443
CRUISE MAIN .................................... 78, 442
Door and Trunk Open ............................... 74
ECON Mode...................................... 78, 441
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
System ............................................ 74, 576
Fog Light................................................... 77
High Beam ................................................ 76
Immobilizer System ................................... 77
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
(Amber)................................................... 83
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
(White) ............................................ 83, 466
Light Control............................................. 79
Lights On .................................................. 76
Low Fuel ................................................... 72
Low Oil Pressure................................ 69, 574
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS............. 75, 475, 477
Maintenance Minder ......................... 78, 505
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............. 69, 575
Parking Brake and Brake System ....... 68, 576
Parking Sensor System .............................. 74
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) ............. 81
Seat Belt Reminder.............................. 33, 71
Security System Alarm............................... 77
Smart Entry System ................................... 79
Starter System........................................... 79
Supplemental Restraint System ........... 49, 72
System Message ....................................... 76
Transmission ............................................. 71
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning............... 76
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)
System ............................................ 73, 471
VSA® OFF.......................................... 73, 472
Washer Level ............................................ 78
Information .............................................. 583
Information Display ................................... 96
Instant Fuel Economy ........................ 97, 102
Instrument Panel........................................ 67
Brightness Control .................................. 153
Interior Lights........................................... 168
Interior Rearview Mirror ......................... 158
iPod........................................... 204, 255, 294
J
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench)........................ 562
Jump Starting........................................... 568
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 604 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
605
Index
K
Key Number Tag ...................................... 117
Keyless Lockout Prevention..................... 123
Keys........................................................... 116
Lockout Prevention ................................. 123
Master Keys ............................................ 116
Number Tag............................................ 117
Rear Door Won’t Open ........................... 126
Remote Engine Start ............................... 425
Remote Transmitter ................................ 121
Types and Functions................................ 116
Valet Key ........................................ 117, 130
Won’t Turn ............................................... 24
Kickdown (Automatic Transmission
/CVT)........................................................ 429
L
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ........ 464
LaneWatch
TM
............................................ 473
Language (HFL) ................................ 344, 376
LATCH (Child Seats) ................................... 57
Lights ................................................ 144, 529
Auto High-Beam ..................................... 147
Automatic............................................... 145
Bulb Replacement ................................... 529
Daytime Running Lights .......................... 150
Fog Lights ............................................... 146
High Beam Indicator ................................. 76
Interior.................................................... 168
Light Switches ......................................... 144
Lights On Indicator .................................... 76
Turn Signals............................................. 144
Load Limits................................................ 415
Locking/Unlocking .................................... 116
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .................. 127
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 126
From Inside.............................................. 124
From Outside........................................... 119
Keys ........................................................ 116
Using a Key ............................................. 123
Lockout Prevention System...................... 123
Low Battery Charge.................................. 574
Low Fuel Indicator...................................... 72
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 69, 574
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal
Strength .................................................. 118
Lower Anchors............................................ 57
Lubricant Specifications Chart ......... 584, 586
Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 415
M
Maintenance............................................. 501
Battery .................................................... 548
Brake/Clutch Fluid ................................... 527
Cleaning.................................................. 552
Climate Control System ........................... 551
Coolant ................................................... 523
Maintenance Minder
TM
............................ 505
Oil........................................................... 518
Precautions ............................................. 502
Radiator .................................................. 524
Remote Transmitter................................. 549
Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 529
Safety...................................................... 503
Service Items ................................... 507, 511
Tires........................................................ 539
Transmission Fluid ................................... 525
Under the Hood ...................................... 513
Malfunction Indicator Lamp.............. 69, 575
Manual Transmission ............................... 438
Map Lights ................................................ 169
Maximum Load Limit ............................... 415
Meters, Gauges........................................... 95
Mirrors ...................................................... 158
Adjusting ................................................ 158
Door ....................................................... 159
Exterior ................................................... 159
Interior Rearview ..................................... 158
Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 500
Moonroof ................................................. 138
MP3 ................................... 201, 210, 252, 265
Multi-Information Display ......................... 99
Multi-View Rear Camera.......................... 496
N
Numbers (Identification).......................... 588
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 605 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
606
Index
O
Odometer............................................ 97, 101
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 517
Adding .................................................... 520
Checking................................................. 518
Displaying Oil Life ............................ 505, 509
Low Oil Pressure Indicator.................. 69, 574
Recommended Engine Oil........................ 517
Viscosity .................................................. 517
Open Source Licences ............................... 297
Opening/Closing
Hood....................................................... 515
Moonroof................................................ 138
Power Windows ...................................... 135
Trunk....................................................... 128
Outside Temperature Display ............ 98, 102
Overheating .............................................. 572
P
Paddle Shifters (7-Speed Manual Shift
Mode) ...................................................... 434
Pandora® ........................................... 209, 262
Panic Mode ............................................... 134
Parking ...................................................... 491
Parking Brake............................................ 479
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator ............................................ 68, 576
Parking Sensor System.............................. 492
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 50
Passing Indicators ..................................... 144
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................ 213, 268
Power Windows ....................................... 135
Precautions While Driving
Rain ........................................................ 428
Pregnant Women ....................................... 37
Puncture (Tire).......................................... 559
R
Radiator .................................................... 524
Radio (AM/FM) ................................. 199, 239
Radio (SiriusXM®) ..................................... 244
Radio Data System (RDS) ................. 200, 242
Range.................................................. 98, 101
RDS (Radio Data System) ................. 200, 242
Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing)....... 591
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button ..................................................... 154
Rear Seat (Folding Down)........................ 166
Rear Seat Heaters ..................................... 179
Rearview Mirror ....................................... 158
Refueling .................................................. 497
Fuel Gauge................................................ 95
Gasoline.................................. 497, 584, 586
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 72
Regulations............................... 477, 542, 589
Remote Engine Start ................................ 425
Remote Transmitter ................................. 121
Replacement
Battery .................................................... 549
Bulbs....................................................... 529
Fuses .............................................. 578, 580
Tires........................................................ 545
Wiper Blade Rubber ................................ 537
Reporting Safety Defects......................... 590
Resetting a Trip Meter....................... 97, 101
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) ......... 460
Indicator ................................................... 81
On and Off ............................................. 461
S
Safe Driving................................................ 27
Safety Check............................................... 31
Safety Labels .............................................. 65
Safety Message ............................................ 1
Seat Belts .................................................... 32
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor ................. 36
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 34
Checking .................................................. 38
Fastening .................................................. 35
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat
Belt ......................................................... 59
Pregnant Women...................................... 37
Reminder .................................................. 33
Warning Indicator ............................... 33, 71
Seat Heaters ..................................... 178, 179
Seats.......................................................... 160
Adjusting ................................................ 160
Front Seats.............................................. 160
Rear Seats............................................... 166
Seat Heaters ................................... 178, 179
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 606 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
607
Index
Security System ........................................ 132
Immobilizer System Indicator..................... 77
Security System Alarm Indicator ................ 77
SEL/RESET Button ..................................... 100
Select/Reset Knob ...................................... 96
Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 56
Selector Knob (Audio) ............................. 192
Shift Lever .................. 19, 430, 432, 436, 438
Operation ................. 19, 431, 433, 437, 438
Releasing ................................................ 571
Won’t Move ........................................... 571
Shift Lever Position
Indicator ........................... 70, 431, 433, 437
Shifting (Transmission) .... 430, 432, 436, 438
Shoulder Anchor ........................................ 36
Side Airbags ............................................... 46
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 48
Siri Eyes Free............................................. 285
SiriusXM® Radio ....................................... 244
Smart Entry Remote......................... 116, 425
Smart Entry with Push Button Start
System..................................................... 119
Snow Tires ................................................ 547
Song By Voice
TM
(SBV).............................. 258
Spare Tire ................................. 559, 585, 587
Spark Plugs ....................................... 584, 586
Specifications ........................................... 584
Specified Fuel ........................... 497, 584, 586
Speedometer.............................................. 95
SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................ 42
Starting the Engine .......................... 421, 423
Does Not Start......................................... 565
Engine Switch Buzzer .............................. 139
Jump Starting .......................................... 568
Remote Engine Start................................ 425
Steering Wheel
Adjusting................................................. 157
Stopping.................................................... 491
Summer Tires ............................................ 547
Sunglasses Holder..................................... 177
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)........ 42
Switches (Around the Steering
Wheel) ............................................. 4, 5, 139
SYNC Mode ............................................... 182
System Message Indicator.......................... 76
T
Tachometer................................................. 95
Temperature
Outside Temperature Display ............. 98, 102
Temperature Sensor ................... 98, 102, 183
Time (Setting) ........................................... 114
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ..................................................... 475
Indicator............................................ 75, 577
Tires ........................................................... 539
Air Pressure ............................. 540, 585, 587
Checking and Maintaining....................... 539
Inspection................................................ 539
Labeling .................................................. 540
Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 559
Regulations ............................................. 542
Rotation .................................................. 546
Spare Tire................................ 559, 585, 587
Summer .................................................. 547
Tire Chains .............................................. 547
Wear Indicators....................................... 544
Winter..................................................... 547
Tools.......................................................... 558
Towing a Trailer ....................................... 417
Equipment and Accessories ..................... 418
Load Limits.............................................. 417
Towing Your Vehicle................................ 420
Emergency .............................................. 582
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System).................................................... 475
Indicator............................................ 75, 577
Transmission ..................... 430, 432, 436, 438
Automatic............................................... 436
Continuously Variable (CVT)............ 430, 432
Fluid................................................ 525, 526
Manual ................................................... 438
Number................................................... 588
Shift Lever Position
Indicator.......................... 70, 431, 433, 437
Trip Meter........................................... 97, 101
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 607 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
608
Index
Troubleshooting ....................................... 557
Blown Fuse...................................... 578, 580
Brake Pedal Vibrates .................................. 25
Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door .......... 25
Emergency Towing .................................. 582
Engine Won’t Start .................................. 565
Noise When Braking .................................. 26
Overheating............................................. 572
Puncture/Flat Tire..................................... 559
Rear Door Won’t Open ...................... 25, 126
Shift Lever Won’t Move ........................... 571
Warning Indicators .................................... 68
Trunk ......................................................... 128
Lid........................................................... 128
Light Bulb........................................ 584, 586
Main Switch ............................................ 130
Turn Signals............................................... 144
Indicators (Instrument Panel)...................... 76
U
Unlocking the Doors................................. 119
Unlocking the Front Doors from
the Inside................................................... 13
USB Flash Drives........................ 210, 265, 294
USB Port(s)................................................. 187
Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start
System...................................................... 119
V
Valet Key........................................... 117, 130
Vanity Mirrors............................................... 7
Vehicle Identification Number ................ 588
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®).................. 471
Off Button............................................... 472
Off Indicator.............................................. 73
System Indicator........................................ 73
Ventilation................................................ 180
Viscosity (Oil) ............................ 517, 585, 587
Voice Control Operation.......................... 235
Audio Commands ................................... 237
Climate Control Commands .................... 238
General Commands ................................ 238
Music Search Commands ........................ 238
On Screen Commands............................. 238
Phone Commands................................... 237
Useful Commands................................... 237
Voice Portal Screen.................................. 236
Voice Recognition ................................... 235
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist).................. 471
W
Wallpaper ......................................... 195, 222
Warning and Information Messages... 85, 87
Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 574
Warning Labels........................................... 65
Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately) .............................................. 593
Watts................................................. 584, 586
Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 544
Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle)........... 562
Wi-Fi Connection ..................................... 275
Window Washers ..................................... 151
Adding/Refilling Fluid .............................. 528
Switch .................................................... 151
Windows (Opening and Closing) ............ 135
Windshield ............................................... 151
Cleaning ......................................... 552, 555
Defrosting/Defogging ............................. 181
Washer Fluid........................................... 528
Wiper Blades........................................... 537
Wipers and Washers ............................... 151
Winter Tires
Snow Tires .............................................. 547
Tire Chains.............................................. 547
Wipers and Washers ................................ 151
Automatic Intermittent Wipers ................ 152
Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades..... 537
Wireless Charger ...................................... 174
WMA................................. 201, 210, 252, 265
Worn Tires ................................................ 539
16 US ACCORD 4D (KA KC KL)-31T2A6300.book 608 ページ ２０１５年７月２３日 木曜日 午後５時０分
